Гирокомпас yokogawa cmz 900 инструкция по эксплуатации - Большая энциклопедия инструкций и руководств

CMZ 900DGyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM 80B10M-17E

IM 80B10M-17E3rd Edition

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

CONTENTSForeword…………………………………………………………………………………………………..vi1. Overview………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-1

1.1 Features of CMZ900………………………………………………………………………………1-11.2 Gyrocompass System…………………………………………………………………………..1-31.3 Device Composition Type……………………………………………………………………..1-41.4 Connection with External Devices…………………………………………………………1-5

1.4.1 Input Signal …………………………………………………………………………….1-5

1.4.2 Output Signal ………………………………………………………………………….1-5

1.5 Outline of Operation ……………………………………………………………………………..1-61.5.1 Startup and Stoppage………………………………………………………………1-6

1.5.2 Operation Unit…………………………………………………………………………1-6

1.5.3 Normal Display………………………………………………………………………..1-7

1.5.4 Output Heading Selection…………………………………………………………1-8

1.5.5 Command Function …………………………………………………………………1-8

1.6 Outline of Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………….1-101.6.1 The Display When Alarm is Generated …………………………………….1-10

1.6.2 Buzzer Stop…………………………………………………………………………..1-10

1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm Causes…………………………………………………1-10

1.7 Maintenance and Inspection ………………………………………………………………. 1-111.7.1 Daily Inspection…………………………………………………………………….. 1-11

1.7.2 Regular Inspection………………………………………………………………… 1-11

1.8 Definition of Terms………………………………………………………………………………1-12

2. Hardware ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2-12.1 Component Models ………………………………………………………………………………2-12.2 Component Names and Functions………………………………………………………..2-3

2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026] …………………………………………………….2-3

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327] ……………………………………………………………2-4

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071] ………………………………………………2-4

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]………………………………………………….2-5

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019] ……………………………………………………………2-6

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]…………………………………….. 2-6

3. Operation……………………………………………………………………………………… 3-13.1 Startup and Stoppage……………………………………………………………………………3-1

3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and Stoppage……………………………………. 3-1

CMZ900D GyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

3.1.2 Startup Sequence ……………………………………………………………………3-2

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start ……………………………………………………………3-3

3.2 Operation Unit ………………………………………………………………………………………3-53.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its Functions……… 3-6

3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its Functions …….. 3-8

3.3 Display of Normal State……………………………………………………………………….3-103.4 Command Mode………………………………………………………………………………….3-12

3.4.1 The Classification of Command Functions………………………………..3-12

3.4.2 Command Code List ………………………………………………………………3-13

3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode ……………………………………………3-15

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the Value …………………………………….3-18

4. Function Explanation and operation method ………………………………… 4-14.1 Display Functions…………………………………………………………………………………4-1

4.1.1 Displaying Heading………………………………………………………………….4-2

4.1.2 Displaying Heading Deviation……………………………………………………4-3

4.1.3 Displaying Rate of Turn…………………………………………………………….4-4

4.1.4 Displaying Running Time………………………………………………………….4-5

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and Adjust ………………………….. 4-6

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase Current………………………………………. 4-7

4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery Voltage…………………………………………….4-8

4.1.8 Displaying Deviation Volatage …………………………………………………..4-9

4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version Number……………………………………….4-10

4.2 Setting Functions………………………………………………………………………………..4-134.2.1 External Heading Input Selection …………………………………………….4-14

4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error Correction…………………………………4-15

4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error Correction ………………………………4-16

4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master Compass …………………………………4-17

4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master Compass……………………………………..4-19

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up Gain…………………………….4-21

4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass Alarm…………………4-22

4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit Alarm………………4-23

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm Setting…………………………………………………………..4-24

4.2.10 Startup Timer Setting ……………………………………………………………..4-25

4.3 Maintenance Functions……………………………………………………………………….4-314.3.1 Permission for Maintenance Function ………………………………………4-32

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC Signals…………………………………………..4-33

4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master Compass ……………………………………………4-35

4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater Compass ………………………………………..4-36

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running Time ……………………………………….4-37

4.3.6 Resetting Log………………………………………………………………………..4-38

4.3.7 Initializing Backup Memory……………………………………………………..4-39

4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation Error ………………….4-40

iii

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

4.3.9 Displaying Log ………………………………………………………………………4-43

4.4 Generation Function……………………………………………………………………………4-544.4.1 Permission for Generation Function…………………………………………4-55

4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper Signal…………………………4-56

4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output Port…………………………4-57

4.4.4 Setting Format of Output Port………………………………………………….4-58

4.4.5 Setting Format of Input Port…………………………………………………….4-63

4.4.6 Miscellaneous ……………………………………………………………………….4-69

4.5 Heading Signal Selection…………………………………………………………………….4-784.5.1 Prohibition of Heading Changeover………………………………………….4-78

4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover Method……………………………………………4-79

4.5.3 External Heading Changeover Method …………………………………….4-82

4.6 «MUTE» Function of Alarm Sound ………………………………………………………4-83

5. Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………………… 5-15.1 Advice for Specific Situations……………………………………………………………….5-15.2 Alarm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………5-2

5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been Generated ………………………………. 5-2

5.2.2 Confirmation of Error Factor ……………………………………………………..5-3

5.2.3 Cancellation of Alarm……………………………………………………………….5-3

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures ……………………………… 5-4

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures……………………. 5-85.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater Compass

5-8

5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass Indication …………………. 5-9

6. Specifications ………………………………………………………………………………. 6-16.1 Performance and Specifications……………………………………………………………6-1

6.1.1 Power Supply………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.2 Input Signal …………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.3 Output Signal ………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy ……………………………………………………….6-2

6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating Conditions)………. 6-2

6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and Circuits …………….. 6-3

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data Sentence ………………………………………………………..6-86.3 Setting Dip Switches …………………………………………………………………………….6-96.4 List of Initial Values…………………………………………………………………………….. 6-116.5 External Product View…………………………………………………………………………6-13

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation……………………………………………………7-17.1 Inspection …………………………………………………………………………………………….7-1

7.1.1 Daily Inspection……………………………………………………………………….7-1

7.1.2 Regular Maintenance……………………………………………………………….7-1

7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere…………………………………………………………….7-27.2.1 Precautions During Removal…………………………………………………….7-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere………………………………………………………..7-3

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere………………………………………………………….7-8

7.2.4 Replacement of Lamps in the Repeater Compass …………………….7-14

7.2.5 Replacing the Fuse………………………………………………………………..7-14

7.2.6 Confirmation of System Operation …………………………………………..7-15

7.2.7 Preparation of Supporting Liquid ……………………………………………..7-15

7.3 Precautions During Installation …………………………………………………………..7-167.3.1 Vibration Measures………………………………………………………………..7-16

7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s Lines…………………………………………………..7-16

7.3.3 Service Area………………………………………………………………………….7-16

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table………………..A-11.1 Speed Error…………………………………………………………………………………………. A-11.2 Determining Speed Error …………………………………………………………………….. A-1

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass ……………………………………………………A-52.1 Gyro……………………………………………………………………………………………………. A-52.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass…………………………………………… A-62.3 Gyrocompass Errors…………………………………………………………………………… A-7

2.3.1 Speed Error…………………………………………………………………………….A-7

2.3.2 Acceleration Error ……………………………………………………………………A-7

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error …………………………………………………………A-7

Appendix-3 Block Diagram……………………………………………………………………..A-8Appendix-4 Components List………………………………………………………………..A-37

4.1 Master Compass ……………………………………………………………………………….. A-37(1) MKM026-1,4 …………………………………………………………………………A-37

(2) MKM026-2,3 ………………………………………………………………………..A-39

4.2 Control Box……………………………………………………………………………………….. A-40(1) MKC327-F,W ………………………………………………………………………..A-40

(2) MKC327-S ……………………………………………………………………………A-41

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050) ……………………………………………………………. A-424.4 Junction Box (MKN019) …………………………………………………………………….. A-434.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)………………………………………………. A-444.6 AC Adapter (MKS066)………………………………………………………………………… A-454.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071) ………………………………………………………………… A-464.8 Junction Unit (MKN018) ……………………………………………………………………. A-474.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040)……………………………………………………………….. A-47

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format …………………………………………………………..A-485.1 Basic Format ……………………………………………………………………………………. A-485.2 Existing Format…………………………………………………………………………………. A-495.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass………………………………………………. A-52

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

ForewordThank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass.

This manual describes the functions, operating procedures, and the handling precautions of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation.

� About this manual• This manual should be read by the end user.

• Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.

• After you have finished reading this User’s Manual, be sure to keep it at your side.

• This manual explains the functions of the product. Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user.

• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. is strictly prohibited.

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. dealer.

� Trademarks• All the brands or names of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd.’s products used in this manual are

either trademarks or registered trademarks of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd..

• For purposes of this manual, the TM and ® symbols do not accompany their respective trade-mark names or registered trademark names.

• Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trade-marks of their respective holders.

� Safety precautions

� Notes about environmental condition for using To use the CMZ900 Gyrocompass, keep the environment that satisfies “Specification” and “Equip-ment condition” of this product. See chapter 6 about specification of this products. And see section 7.3 about precautions during installation. The details of precautions during installation is described in approval drawing.

� Notes about installation• To install this products , follow the “Notes for installation” of approval drawing.

• If reinstallation will be needed , contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

� Notes about preparation before usingRead this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Notes about using other than usageThis products are designed for gyrocompass for vessel. Do not use for other purpose.

� Notes about maintenance and inspection• Regular inspection is recommended to keep this system good condition.

• Do not detach the unit cover without the instruction of service engineer.

• Contact your nearest service agent when the inspection which is not permitted in this manu-al is needed.

� Notes about abnormal circumstances• When abnormal allophone or abnormal smell is generated from this product, turn off the

power supply. After then deal with referring to this manual chapter 5. If it is impossible to deal, contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

• Do not keep using the system , if dealing methods are unknown when the system is under abnormal condition.

• Contact your nearest service or sales agent to repair the system.

• When there is some instruction about the method of trouble shooting from service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. , obey the instructions and work.

� Notes about disposal of the productsWhen this product is scrapped , follow the regulations specified by each country.A lithium battery is used in this product. Before disposing , insulate the both of terminals of lithium battery with insulation tape. Dispose of the lithium battery as industrial waste following the regula-tions.

� Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste

disposal trader.

• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

� Precautions related to the protection, safety, and alteration of the product• The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.

«Handle with care.» To avoid injury and damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to the explanation in the manual.

“Risk of Electric Shock”

Protective ground terminal

«High temperature.» To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not touch locations where this symbol appears.

vii

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

• For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these instructions, the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired. In such cases, Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. does not guarantee the quality, performance, function, and safety of the product.

• When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equip-ment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or safety circuits for fool-proof design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system, the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment.

• If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

• Do not modify this product without instruction from service engineer of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. .

� Exemption from responsibility• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. makes no warranties regarding the product except those

stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.

• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product.

� How to use this manualThe following markings are used in this manual.

Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in the correspond-ing place in the user’s manual to identify those instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”

WARNINGCalls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and pre-cautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.

CAUTIONCalls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.

NOTECalls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument.

viii

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Important Cautions

WARNING

Risk of Electric Shock

Turn off the power before carrying out any wiring.

CAUTION

Do not perform an insulation resistance test using a megohmmeter except on the ship’s power terminals. Performing such a test may cause a failure in the gyro system.Precautions in handling the gyrosphere

• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.

• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.

Precautions in handling the container

• Hold the container firmly with both hands.

• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

Polishing of the slip ring is prohibited

• Carry out cleaning by wiping dirt off the slip ring with ethyl alcohol or ligroin.

� About the replacement parts for repair• After discontinuation of production, the possession period of the replacement parts is ten

years.

• The replacement parts for repair are the parts necessary to maintain the function of this prod-uct.

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Handling precautions

� Startup of gyrocompass(1) Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship’s departure.

(2) After startup, do not touch the internal unit of the Master compass. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged or an error generated.

� Handling in cold districtsSince the Master compass container containing the gyrocompass is filled with liquid, if a gyrocom-pass is to be stopped in a cold district where the ambient temperature is -3°C or less it should therefore be handled as shown below.

(1) In the case where it is stopped for a period of a few days or less:

Wrap the Master compass in a blanket or the like to provide heat insulation.

(2) In the case of a prolonged stopping period (a week or more):

Drain the liquid completely.

� External heading out putExternal heading can use with the Master compass′s signal driver circuits. Turn on the main power of the Master compass (MKM026) in case of using external heading.

NOTEThe external heading sensor is optional unit. If the external heading sensor is not installed or con-nected to gyrocompass, external heading signal can not be used.

� Heading changeover Normally the heading signal is switched from other gyrocompass or external heading signal with operating key on the C.operation unit. In the following condition, it is not possible to switch.

· Master compass is standing by to start.· The other sensor which is scheduled to switch is abnormal.· Exchanging the signal is prohibited.

CAUTIONPlease execute the switch of heading signal between gyrocompass and external sensor in the safety area.

NOTEWhen external heading signal is used at other systems of RADAR , ECDIS or etc. , the signal format should be fit for other system.

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� G1/G2 gyro select switch on the changeover unitThe G1/G2 gyro select switch in control box should not be switched excluding the emergency (ex. Failure of C.operation unit). Normally use the G1/G2 changeover switch in “NOR” position. If the G1/G2 changeover switch is used in excluding “NOR” position, the following phenomenon will occur.(1) An alarm is generated and unable to change heading signal The switch alarm (error code : 130) will occur. And even if gyro heading selection key or ex-

ternal heading selection key is pushed, it is unable to change azimuth signal.(2) The stepper signals become asynchronously Because the stepper signals of two Mastercompass become asynchronously, the heading of

the device which is using stepper signal will become disagreement.

� Action method to heading changeover failureRefer to section 4.5.2(2) when the heading changeover with an operation unit becomes impossible.

1-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1. OverviewThe CMZ900 Gyrocompass fully conforms to the technical requirements of the IMO resolu-tion A.424 (XI), gyrocompass performance standards, as well as to JIS F9602, Class A stand-ards. The anti-vibration structure has been strengthened and improvement of the follow-up performance has been achieved, leading to increased rigidity of the gyrocompass in all types of ships, from small to large.

1.1 Features of CMZ900� High north-seeking accuracy

High north-seeking accuracy is achieved because of the following configuration: The gyrosphere, the heart of the gyrocompass, is supported in a container filled with liquid, which prevents distur-bance from affecting the center pin. In addition, two gyro-rotors rotate at a high speed and work with each other to cancel out errors due to the rolling, pitching and yawing of a ship.

� Excellent vibration resistance and shock resistanceA unique anti-vibration mechanism enhanced by the velocity damping effect of high viscous oil, provides superior damping of vibration and decoupling of shock at sea.

� Improvement of follow-up performanceThe container size is more reduced and it is realized more stabilized follow-up performance has been achieved.

� Digitalization of Master compass headingThe master compass heading is displayed with digital numbers. It offers easy reading of the heading.

� Automatic speed-error correcting functionSpeed-error is corrected automatically by entering the ship’s speed signal and latitude signal re-spectively from the log and GPS or the like. The amount of latitude change in the case where there is no latitude signal input is estimated from a calculation of the ship’s speed and heading. In a B-Type system, this function is implemented in the remote unit.

� Functions for various displays and settingsVarious types of gyrocompass information can be displayed and set on the Master compass op-eration unit and remote unit.

� Preparation of outputs corresponding to every requirementIn addition to the digital heading signal output for the Repeater compass, the stepper heading signal output, digital signal output (IEC61162-1/-2), analog heading, quadrant, and angular turning velocity signal output are equipped as standard.

� Onboard battery driveCompass running by the onboard battery is available as standard.

1-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

� Built-in startup timerThe restart time of the timer can be set from 1 to 99 hours.

� Heading output using external azimuth sensor signalUsing the heading signal from the external heading sensor (GPS compass, magnet compass, etc.) signals can be output to external connecting device such as Repeater compasses or a radar.

1-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.2 Gyrocompass SystemThe CMZ900 Gyrocompass determine the ship’s heading using gyrosphere which is included in Master compass.The heading signal is displayed on operation unit, and is output to Repeater compass or external units.If any system failure will be occurred, the buzzer will sounds and the FAIL LED will blink.The gyrocompass system is composed of the following units;

� Master compassThe Master compass is detect ship’s heading and calculate rate of turn.These signals are output to any units. The M.operation unit is included in this Master compass.

� Repeater compass / Steering repeater compassThe Repeater compass is receive serial heading signal from Master compass, and indicates ship’s heading.

� Control boxThe Control box is connected to Master compass and other external device. This unit drives each heading signals. This unit is used with D-Type.

� Operation unitThe operation unit is used to control gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation unit and the other is M. Operation Unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S / D and optional device in Type-B.

See chapter 2. for detail of system construction.

1-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.3 Device Composition TypeCMZ900 has 3 type systems. Each systems has different composition and specification. The sys-tem composition is described in chapter 2.

� CMZ900B (Not explain in this manual)B-Type is composed of master compass, repeater compass and steering repeater compass. This type is used with a medium ship by a small ship.The automatic speed error correction is achieved using C. operation unit (option) and Junction unit (option). The backup of power supply is achieved using AC adapter (option).

� CMZ900S (Not explain in this manual)S-Type is composed of master compass, control box, repeater compass and steering repeater compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This type equips control box nor-mally and can execute the functions which are optional functions for CMZ900B. This type has many signal distribution drivers for external units.

� CMZ900DD-Type is composed of two master compasses, control box, dual AC adapter, repeater compasses, steering repeater compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This system al-ways observes errors by using the heading signal comparison data. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal from the one hand to the other hand by operat-ing the C. operation unit (software) or selector switch (hardware). This changeover function improves the reliability of the system.

1-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.4 Connection with External DevicesCMZ900 Gyrocompass has speed error correction using ship’s speed and position signal from external devices. The heading signal or external input signal is output to external devices such as Autopilot, Radar, Course Recorder and more.

1.4.1 Input SignalThe following signals can be input from external devices to gyrocompass.

Input signal External devices Signal formatShip’s speed signal E.M.Log, Doppler Log, GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial , PulseLatitude signal GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 SerialHeading / Rate of turn signal Magnet compass , GPS compass, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial

The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.

1.4.2 Output SignalThe following signals can be output to external devices from gyrocompass.

Output signal External devices Signal formatRepeater compass heading signal Repeater compass IEC61162-1 SerialStepper heading signal Radar, etc. 3Bit gray code

Serial heading / Rate of turn signal Autopilot, Universal data display, etc. IEC61162-1 SerialAnalog heading / Rate of turn signal Course recorder, ROT Indicator, etc. Analog (0 to 5V)

The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.

1-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5 Outline of OperationThis section describes the operation of gyrocompass.

1.5.1 Startup and StoppageThe gyrocompass starts when the main power supply is turned on. The Master compass starts North-seeking. The Repeater compasses receive heading signal and start display.The gyrocompass settles within 5 hours, and displays true heading.The gyrocompass stops when the main power supply is turned off. The detail of startup is described in section 3.1.

1.5.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S/D and optional device in Type-B. See section 3.2 for details of function and operation of operation unit.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Control box

C.operation unit

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

1-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5.3 Normal DisplayThe gyrocompass become to “Normal Mode” through the “Standby status” at startup.The operation unit displays the heading and status like at the standby.See section 3.3 for details of displays in “Normal Mode”.

� Normal display on C.operation unitThe heading and system status are displayed on screen.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

ea in i pla

S te tatu i pla

Input et o

Input alue

� Normal display on M.operation unitThe heading is displayed on the heading display.(The displayed heading is not corrected speed error. So the displayed heading on M.operation unit might be different from the heading on C.operation unit or Repeater compass while the ship is navigating.)

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

Hea in isp a

1-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5.4 Output Heading SelectionCMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.To select the heading, press the heading selection key.

1.5.5 Command FunctionThe command for the setting is prepared in CMZ900.Call-up code for various data display/setting in the CMZ900 Gyrocompass are assigned to the predetermined numbers (command code). Calling the command code, it is possible to achieve various function.Move to command mode from normal mode to use command function.See section 3.4 for detail of command function.

� List of Command Function

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Display Function

○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display

10 ○ – True heading and value of speed error correction dis-play ○ 4-2

11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-312 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4

13○ ○ Gyro sphere running time display ○ 4-5○ – Total running time and the time after startup display

14 ○ – Dimmer rank display ○ 4-615 ○ ○ Gyro-sphere phase current display ○ 4-716 ○ ○ Backup battery voltage display ○ 4-817 ○ – Deviation voltage display ○ 4-9

19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10

Setting Function

20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-1421 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1522 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1623 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-1724 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-1925 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-21

26 ○ ○ Displaying/resetting cause of Master compass alarm ○ 4-22

27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-2429 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25

1-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Maintenance Function

30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-3231 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3332 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-3533 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-3634 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-3735 ○ ○ Resetting log ○ 4-3836 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-3937 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-4039 ○ ○ Log display ○ 4-43

Generation Function

40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-55

41 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56

42 ○ – Setting communication protocol of output port ○ 4-57

43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-58

45 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-63

49 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

1-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.6 Outline of AlarmIf abnormal condition occurs on gyrocompass, an alarm is generated.

1.6.1 The Display When Alarm is GeneratedWhen an alarm is generated, the buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks.The error code and the cause of the alarm are displayed on the screen of C.operation unit.

The error message disappears by pushing the command key.

1.6.2 Buzzer StopPressing the buzzer-stop key stops the buzzer.

1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm CausesThe alarm LED goes out if the alarm is reset, but continues to light up if the alarm continues.The check procedure when the alarm is generated is described to Chapter 5.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

1-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.7 Maintenance and InspectionImplement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to main-tain the gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:

1.7.1 Daily InspectionThe inspection items are as follows.

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”. (See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

Check that the heading of each Repeater com-pass agrees with that of the Master compass. Once/departure

3Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed

and latitude by executing the command codes “21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-nomical or physical target observation. Once/day

DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter (MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage. MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24 MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4

Once/year

NOTECheck the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-

1.7.2 Regular InspectionPerform the following maintenance once a year.

NOTEOrder to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.

Inspection Item Procedure1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .

2 Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) , lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.

3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

1-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.8 Definition of TermsThis section describes the definition of terms used in this manual.

Compass heading The heading detected by the master compass

True heading The heading obtained by subtracting the value of the speed error correction from the compass heading

Value of speed-error correction The error calculated from the ship’s heading, speed and latitude

Output headingA heading output to external connected device (such as repeater compasses).Either the gyro heading or external sensor heading should be selected.

Gyro heading True heading

External sensor heading A heading to be input from external heading sensors (such as magnet compass/GPS compass and the like)

2-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2. Hardware2.1 Component Models

CMZ900D are composed following units. The units are selected for the usage.

� CMZ900D System Configuration

INMARSATRADARGPS . . .et

AUTO PILOTIBSINS . . .et

M R M R

X22 AX2 1A X21

M N 1

M R1 1A/1 1A M R 2

M M 2M C 2

M S /M S 1

M M 2

Conne tion Box

ori ontal Bra et Tiltin Bra et ori ontal Stan

Repeater Co pa Sterrin Repeater Co pa

Serial Si nal or Repeater Co pa

Cour e Re or er RATE OF TURN

STEPPER SIGNAL

Serial Si nalIEC 11 2 1

Analo to

MASTER COMPASS

No.1 Po er Suppl 2 DC

No.1 Po er Suppl 1 to 22 AC /

No.2 Po er Suppl 2 DC

2 DC Po er Suppl

No.2 Po er Suppl 1 to 22 AC /

AC A apter

De i e to be onne te

MASTER COMPASS Control Box

C.operationUnitM R

2-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

� Component Models

M M 2 1 M T

CMZ D

M M 2

M C 2 F

M C 2 S

M C 2

M R G X22 A

M N 1 G X2 1A

X21

M R P X22 A

M N 1 P X2 1A

X21

M R

M S /MKS071

M R

M R 2

G ro o pa

Ma ter o pa

Control box

Repeater o pa

SteerinRepeater o pa

C.Operation Unit

AC A apter

Stan Alone t pe

Pilot tan t pe

Con ole t pe

Flu ount t pe

Pilot tan t pe

all ount t pe

Glan t pe

Plu t pe

Conne tionbox

ori ontal tan

ori ontal bra et

Tiltin bra et

G ro p ere

S it Unit

M.Operation Unit

Conne tionbox

2-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2 Component Names and Functions2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026]

Master compass detects ship’s heading.

� Master Compass Stand Alone TypeThis master compass is stand alone type which includes components to exclusive case.

Switch unit

M.operation unit

Container with Gyrosphere

See section 3.2.2 for name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.

� Pilot Stand typeThis type includes gyro compass units into stand.

C.operation Unit

M.operation Unit

Container with gyrosphere

Fuse

No.1 power switch

No.2 power switch

External output power switch

Gyro select switch

Autopilot Stan

See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C. operation unit and its functions.

� Console TypeThis type is used to be included into ship’s bridge console. This type master compass has plate and rails for drawing it out.

2-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327] The Control box distributes heading signals and power to other units and receives signals from other units. The Control box equips C.operation unit on the front cover and equips power switches and terminals into the box.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Front

In i e

ront co er

C.operation unituse

o. ower switch

Gyro se ect switch

terna output power switch

er ina oar

The Control box has three kinds of structures which are wall mount type, flush mount type and built-in Pilot stand type.See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071] This unit supplies DC power to master compass.

M M 1

Front ieInsi e ie

Fuse

ower switch

er inal loc

Front co er

Fuse

ower switch

2-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]The repeater compass receives a heading signal from the master compass, indicates the true heading.

ointer

Sca e e ree /roun

Sca e 1 e ree /roun

Top ie

Si e ie

Sha ow pin ountin ho e

ori onta stan

ori onta rac et

i tin rac et

unction o

er ina u

Connector

NOTEIf the heading of repeater compass has errors, check and adjust it referring to chapter 5.

2-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019]This unit receives heading signal and power from Master compass and drives Repeater compass. It is used to adjust dimmer.

ai in icator reT i i lit or blin en an error i ete te .Nor all it i o .

un in icator reenT i blin en ero a u t ent i bein arrie out. Nor all it i lit.

ero a ust ent switchU e en t ere a been a i t in t e alue in i ate b t e Repeater o pa .

i er controTurnin t i ial a u t t e illu ination o t e o pa aran run in i ator .

G an or ConnectorConne t to Repeater o pa .

G anConne t to Ma ter o pa or ontrol box.

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]

DIMMER

FAIL

RUN SYNC

ointer

cale 1 egrees roun

cale egrees roun

i er controlTurnin t is ia a usts t e i umination o t e compasscar an run in icator E .

Fail in icator E

un in icator E

ero a ust ent switch

3-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3. OperationThis chapter describes the operation of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass system.

3.1 Startup and StoppageNOTE

Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship’s departure.

3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and StoppageConfirm the presence of power supply for the system at startup.

� The operation on the Control box and Autopilot stand.The gyrocompass is started up and stopped by operating the main power switch in the Control box or Autopilot stand. The power switch is placed at right hand in the Control box or Autopilot stand. For startup, locate the toggle switch to ON side. For stoppage, locate the toggle switch to OFF side.

In i e o t e Autopilot tan

In i e o t e ontrol box

o. ower switch

terna output power switch

o. power switch

terna outputpower switch

3-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.1.2 Startup SequenceThe following processes are passed until gyro sphere is stabilized and true heading is output.

Po er OnMain it i turne on

Repeater o pa po er ONStepper ROT po er ON

Zero a u t ent o Ma tero pa

t e Ma ter o pa i ollo e ro p ere ea in

Zero a u t ent o Repeatero pa

Output in al are tarte

T e Repeater o pa an tepper i nal ea in ollo e

to Ma ter o pa ea in

T e ro p ere ea in i ettle an t e te output true ea in

about our

about 2 inute

about 1 inute

Supplie po er to te an t e rotator in ro p ere i tarte to rotate.

T e Ma ter o pa tart ero a u t ent en t e p a e urrent i lo er t an . A an t ere olution o rotator o e on tant.

3-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start

� Flow diagram

Turn on ea o t e ip AC an DCpo er upplie or t e ro o pa te .

Turn on t e ain po er it .

I AC po er i not upplie to t ete turn on DC po er onl .

Re olution o t e ro p ere rotor i i .→P a e urrent i i er t an . A

Re olution o t e ro ere rotor i lo .→P a e urrent i . A or le

Col tart ot tart

･S te tatu STBY･T e ollo up operation o t e Ma ter o pa top .･Ali nin operation i pro ibite .･P a e urrent e rea e blo . A an en it rate o an e be o e lo t e o pa enter no al operatin tatu .

Nor al tatu ・S te tatu blan

T e ro o pa enter nor al operation tatu i e iatel .

Start up the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before performing normal operation.After the power switch is turned on, the gyrocompass system is started up at either hot start or cold start depending on the condition of the gyro-sphere.If the gyro rotor is rotating at a high enough speed to detect the heading, hot start begins, however, if it is rotating at a speed that is too low to detect the heading, cold start begins.The rotating status of the gyro rotor is determined by monitoring the phase current.

3-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Hot startHot start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is 0.35 A or less and follow-up of Master compass, signal input/output, and indicator LEDs are normal.

� Cold startCold start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is higher than 0.35 A. The stand-by state continues until the phase current drops and the rate of change in the phase current drops below a specified level. Normal operation will start when these requirements are met. During stand-by, functions of Master compass automatic aligning and manual aligning cannot be carried out. After about 2 hours, the heading becomes to practical and gyrocompass is ready for operation.

0.35A

Nor al

P a e urent

Ti e

0.35A

Nor al

P a e urent

Ti e

0.35A

Time

NormaSTAND BY

P ase curent0.35A

Time

NormaSTAND BY

P ase curent

3-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit.

� C.operation unitThe C.operation unit is equipped on the front door of Control box or Autopilot stand. The operation unit is used for operating the Master compass and setting the communication port to connect with the external devices. It is possible to shift operation right to M.operation unit.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Control box

C.operation unit

� M.operation unitThe M.operation unit is equipped on the front panel of Master compass (Stand alone type / Console type). The M.operation unit is used for operating the Master compass which is connected with. Some commands can not be operated with M.operation unit. (Refer to section 3.4.2)

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

3-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� The operation mode of operation unitThe operation units have two mode. The one mode is used for displaying the azimuth data and system status. This mode is named «Normal mode».The other mode is used for displaying the detail information and setting the system. This mode is named «Command mode».

COMMAND

C.operation Unit

COMMAND

BZ STOP

M.operation Unit

PreCOMMAND e

Nor al Mo e

Co an Mo e

Di pla in t e ea in Di pla in t e te tatu Di pla in t e ata to u e pee error orre tion C.operation unit

Exe utin t e o an Di pla un tion Settin un tion Maintenan e un tion Generation un tion

3.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its Functions

This section describes the name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.

� The name of each part

GYRO GYRO

GYROGYRO

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Hea in isp a area Data isp a area A arm LED anBu er stop e

Se ect LED anse ect e

Arro e s

ENT eComman e

Dimmer e

E terna ea inse ection e

G ro ea in se ection e

3-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� The function of each part

� Heading displayDisplays a compass heading and system status.

� Data displayIndicates displays corresponding to menus and each command code.

� Alarm LED and buzzer stop key Displays alarm statuses for the gyrocompass system.

If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer is stopped.

� Select LED and Select key Displays and selects the operating initiative (C.operation unit or M.operation unit). keep the

key pressed for at least two seconds.

When LED is lit, this unit can be operated.

When LED goes off, M.operation unit can be operated.

� Arrow key Carry out selection of commands and data and switching of displays.

ENT keyEnters and sets commands and data.

COMMAND key If pressed when in normal mode, the display switches from the data display to the MAIN

MENU.

If pressed when the display is in access mode, the display returns to normal mode.

� Dimmer key Adjusts brightness of the displays of this unit.

In addition, if this key is pressed in combination with the ENT key, contrast of the LCD can be adjusted.

If both keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.

� External heading selection key Changes the output heading to that of the external heading (bow heading input from external

heading sensor). keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

Gyro heading selection key If GYRO1 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of

the No.1 master compass).

If GYRO2 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of the No.2 master compass).

keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

If key �, � or is to be operated, keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

NOTEThe back-light of external heading selection key is not lit on system that the external-input is not available.

3-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its Functions

This section describes the name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.

NOTEIf the C.operation unit has operation rights ,the M.operation unit can not be operated. To operate the M.operation unit, press the selection key on the C.operation unit and turn off the selection LED.

� The name of each part

OFFPO ER

GYROCOMPASS

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt .

S IFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Po er it External ea in ele tor it

Set/Di er e Co an /Bu er top e

ENT e

Data i pla area

G ro ea in i pla area

RUN in i ator LEDEXT in i ator LEDFAIL in i ator LED Co an o e i pla area

� The function of each part

� Power switch Turns on/off the power to the gyro system.

� External heading selector switch If the switch is kept pressed for 2 seconds or more when in normal mode, the output heading

(gyro heading/external heading) is selected.

When the C.operation unit is used, this switch isn’t used.

� Set/dimmer key In normal mode these are dimmer keys that adjust the level of brightness of all displays on the

M.operation unit. The displays can be darkened by pressing the ▼ key and brightened by pressing the ▲ key. Brightness can be adjusted in 32 steps.

If two keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.

If the key is pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, data is input. Pressing the SHIFT key changes the input digit (blinks) while pressing the UP key changes the numeric value in the input digit.

3-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Command/buzzer stop key If this key is pressed in normal mode, the mode changes to the command selection mode, and

if pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, the mode returns to normal.

If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer and blinking of the FAIL indicator LED stops.

� ENT keyEnters an input value in command selection mode or command execution mode. To carry out operations with this key switch, keep it pressed for 2 seconds.

Data display area Displays/sets data when a command is executed.

Gyro heading display areaDisplays a compass heading.

� Command code display areaDisplays a command code.

� RUN indicator LED Lights up when the power switch is turned “on.”

EXT indicator LED Goes out when the currently selected output heading is the gyro heading and lights up when

the output heading is the external sensor heading.

�11 FAIL indicator LED Blinks when an alarm is generated.

If the “BZ STOP” key is pressed, it lights up during an alarm and goes out when the alarm is restored to normal.

3-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.3 Display of Normal StateDisplays of the operation unit at startup (normal state) will be described below.

� Displays of the C.operation unit at normal stateThe heading display indicates true headings of each heading sensor and system status, and the data display indicates input method and input value of ship’s speed and ship’s position (the figure on the right is an example of this display).

� Heading displayThe true heading of the No.1 master compass is displayed in the first line (GYRO 1), the true head-ing of the No.2 master compass is displayed in the second line (GYRO 2) and the heading of ex-ternal heading sensor is displayed in the third line (EXT) of the heading display.The display is blank for heading values not connected to this C. operation unit.The true heading whose heading value is ineffective is displayed with «- — — . — «. ( i.e. signal input error.)For the heading sensor that is selected, «>» is displayed immediately before the heading.To switch to another heading sensor, press the external heading selector key or the gyro heading selector key (cannot be selected to an unconnected compass).

� System status displayThe gyro system status is displayed in the bottom line of the heading display. The system status at normal running is not shown and the display is blank.

System Status

STBY Displayed when No.1 and No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.G1 STBY Displayed when No.1 master compass is in stand-by status.G2 STBY Displayed when No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.HDG FLT Displayed when there is a failure with the azimuth sensor that is selected.

PWR FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 and No2 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. In-dication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

PWR1FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

PWR2FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No2 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

C/O FLT Displayed when the automatic changeover is not possible.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Input met o

Input a ue

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Input met o

Input a ue

3-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

C/O PRF Displayed when the changeover operation is not permitted.ALIGN Displayed during heading change over. (From gyrocompass to gyrocompass)

COP1FLT Displayed when the main power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.COP2FLT Displayed when the sub power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.

MUTE Displayed when the mute function of alarm sound is enable.

*1: This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

� Input methodThere are displayed the method of input for speed and latitude.

MANUAL The value is set manually.AUTO The value is input from external sensor.

� Input valueThe values to correct the speed error is displayed.

� Displays of the M.operation unit at normal mode

� Heading displayThe gyro heading display shows a compass heading, in-dications in the command and data displays disappear.

� System status displayDuring standby the gyro heading dispaly indicates the compass heading when the power was last turned off , and the data display indicates “C.S.” .

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

3-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4 Command ModeThis section describes the functions which are achieved in command mode and the procedures to execute.

3.4.1 The Classification of Command FunctionsThe command functions are classified into following four types.

� The displaying functionThe displaying function is used for displaying various information.

� The setting functionThe setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyro compass properly.

� The maintenance functionThe maintenance function is used for maintaining and operation verification when the system is rigged or regular inspection. This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input password when this function is used.

� The generation functionThe generation function is used for setting to connect external units.This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input password when this function is used.

See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.

Column:Each functions are assigned individual command code. The command function is a generic name of the function that can be achieved by operating these command codes.

3-13

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.2 Command Code ListThis section shows the list of command codes assigned for each function.Some functions can not be operated when gyrocompass is standing by.See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.

NOTESome commands can not be operated with M.operation unit. Refer to the following table for the executable commands on the M.operation unit.

� Command code list

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execution during

standbyPage

C M

Display Function

○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display

10 ○ – True heading and value of speed error correction dis-play ○ 4-2

11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-312 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4

13○ ○ Gyro sphere running time display ○ 4-5○ – Total running time and the time after startup display

14 ○ – Dimmer rank display ○ 4-615 ○ ○ Gyro-sphere phase current display ○ 4-716 ○ ○ Backup battery voltage display ○ 4-817 ○ – Deviation voltage display ○ 4-9

19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10Setting Function

26 ○ ○ Displaying/resetting cause of Master compass alarm ○ 4-22

27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-2429 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25

3-14

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execution during

standbyPage

C M

Maintenance Function

Generation Function

40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-55

41 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56

42 ○ – Setting communication protocol of output port ○ 4-57

43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-58

45 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-63

49 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

3-15

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.3 Operation in the Command ModeTo execute the commands shift to “Command Mode”. This section describes about “Command Mode”.

� Operation on C.operation unitPress the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then an menu appears on the data display area. The commands are executed by selecting the menu item.Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.

� Accessing Menus

(1) Rough classification menuIf the command key is pressed when in normal mode, the MAIN MENU appears in the data dis-play (the figure on the right).The item that is selected blinks. (The blinking part is called the cursor.)Select an item by moving the position of the cur-sor with the up and down arrow keys.

If the down arrow key is pressed when the cursor resides in the bottom line, the displayed menu shows the next page.If the up arrow key is pressed when the cursor resides in the top line, the displayed menu shows the preceding page.To return to normal mode from the display thus accessed, press the COMMAND key.

(2) Medium classification menuSelect “1 Display” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Disp.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

Select “2 Operate” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Operat.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

1 Display

2 Operate

3 Maintain

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

2 Operate

3 Maintain

4 Generate

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

1 Display

2 Operate

3 Maintain

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

2 Operate

3 Maintain

4 Generate

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Disp.MENU

10 HDG

11 DEV

12 ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Operat.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Disp.MENU

10 HDG

11 DEV

12 ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Operat.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

3-16

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

Select “3 Maintain” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Maint.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

Select “4 Generate” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Generat.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

� Flow of accessing menus

ENT

SPD.MANUAL +00[kt] LAT.MANUAL N 00[°]

MA N MENU1 D2 O t3 M t

MA N MENU2 O t3 M t4 G t

ENT ENTENT

D .MENU10 DG11 DE12 ROT

O t.MENU20 EXT SEL21 SPD SET22 LAT SET

M t.MENU30 P

G t.MENU40 P

ENT ENT ENT ENT

OMMAND

Nomaisp a

Me iumc assi icationmenu

Rouc assi icationmenu

Disp a menu Operation menu Maintenance menu Generation menu

To isp a in ea in To e terna ea ininput se ection

To pass or input ormaintenance mo e

To pass or input oreneration mo e

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

>123.4

126.0

123.4

3-17

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Operation on M.operation unitThis paragraph describes the operation procedures on the M.operation unit.Press the command key to shift the “Command Mode”.Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.

� Operation flowPress the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then the code number “00” appears and blinks on the command code display area. Input the command code for executing the com-mand. Press the ENT key 2 times each 2 seconds or more for command decision. (If command code number is less than 20, press ENT key 1 time.)

COMMAND DATA

COMMANDBZ STOP

COMMAND DATA

U P▲

S IFT▼

U P▲

COMMAND DATA

ENT

COMMANDBZ STOP

blin in

1 Nor al o e

2 Co an ele tion o e

Co an ex ution o e

T e alue o pla e o ten be o e 1 .

T e blin in o e to pla e o one.

T e alue o pla e o one be o e .

Pu ENT e 2 ti e ea 2 e on or ore.

Pu UP e ti e .blin in

3-18

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the ValueThis section describes the procedure for changing the set value.

� The procedure on C.operation unitThe set value is changed using arrow keys on the C.operation unit. The set value is fixed by press-ing ENT key.

� The item selection operation

I t e 1I t e 2I t e I t e . . .

Set alueen i pre e T e pre iou ite i ele te .

en i pre e T e next ite i ele te .

� The setting value input operation

W en is presse T e pre ious item is se ecte .

W en is presse T e cursor mo e to ne t p ace.

W en is presse T e ne t item is se ecte .

W en is presse T e cursor mo e to pre ious p a

Set a ue

It is same procedure to input alphabet.

� The procedure on M.operation unitThe set value is changed using SHIFT and UP keys on the M.operation unit. The set value is fixed by pressing ENT key.

� The item selection operation

…

Set a ue

UP▲T e ne t item is se ecte e er pressin t e e .

� The setting value input operation

…

UP▲

SHIFT▼

Set a ue

W en is presse t e in in p ace mo es to t e ne t.

T e ne t a ue is se ecte e er pressin t e e .

4-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4. Function Explanation and operation method

This chapter describes the functions of CMZ900D. The operation , the adjusting and the setting methods of gyrocompass which are executed by using the commandfunctions are described in section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4. The heading exchange functionis described in section 4.5. The mute function of alarm sound is described in section 4.6.

Refer to the chapter 3 for the procedure of executing the command function. And execute these operation with enough understanding

4.1 Display FunctionsThis section describes how to display various information.

The following 9 items can be displayed.

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display

10 ○ – True heading and value of speed error correction dis-play ○ 4-2

11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-3

12 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4

13○ ○ Gyro sphere running time display ○ 4-5○ – Total running time and the time after startup display

14 ○ – Dimmer rank display ○ 4-615 ○ ○ Gyro-sphere phase current display ○ 4-716 ○ ○ Backup battery voltage display ○ 4-817 ○ – Deviation voltage display ○ 4-9

19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

Each functions are executed by operating of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.See the section 3.4 for the command function.See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

4-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.1 Displaying HeadingCOMMAND CODE :10

This function displays the true heading , the compass heading, and the value of speed error correction .

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “10 HDG” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading.

Each true heading, compass heading and speed error correction (only for master compasses)of the No.1 master compass (GYRO1), No.2 mas-ter compass (GYRO2), and external unit (EXT) are displayed in the first,Pressing the right and left arrow keys switches the display between true heading, compass heading and the value of speed error correc-tion.The upper, middle and lower figure on the right is an example of displaying the true heading (True HDG), compass heading (Compass HDG) (*1) and the value of speed error correction (SPD Error).If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

*1: The «Compass HDG» displayed on operation unit is the value which corrected with master compass installation error.

� Operation with the M.operation unitNOTE

It is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

True HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

122.9°

Compass HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

-00.5°

SPD Error

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

122.9° 123.4

-00.5° 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

True HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

122.9°

Compass HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

-00.5°

SPD Error

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

122.9° 123.4

-00.5° 123.4

4-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.2 Displaying Heading DeviationCOMMAND CODE : 11

This function displays the heading deviation between gyrocompass heading and external heading. The unit of display is degree(s).

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting «11 DEV» from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading deviation.Deviation values of each azimuth sensor based on the heading currently being output are dis-played.

The figures on the right show examples of dis-playing the heading deviations .

If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

NOTEThe deviation between gyrocompass and external signal is not displayed when external signal is not input.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G2 G1 00.2

D t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 G2 00.2

D t

123.4

126.0

E G2 02.4

G1 E 02.6

>123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 02.4

D t

123.4

>126.0

G2 E 02.6

G2 G1 00.2

123.6

E G1 02.6

G2 E 02.4

123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G2 G1 00.2

D t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 G2 00.2

D t

123.4

126.0

E G2 02.4

G1 E 02.6

>123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 02.4

D t

123.4

>126.0

G2 E 02.6

G2 G1 00.2

123.6

E G1 02.6

G2 E 02.4

123.6

4-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.3 Displaying Rate of TurnCOMMAND CODE : 12

This function displays the Rate of Turn. There are two kinds of units of display. One is “degree(s)/second”, the other hand is “degree(s)/minute”.

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “12 ROT” from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the rate of turn.Each turn rate for No.1 master compass and No.2 master compass are displayed in the first and second line of the display ,respectivelyIf the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the display for rate of turn units can be changed from degrees/minute to degrees/second.The upper figure on the right shows an example of displaying a rate of turn in degrees/minute and the lower figure on the right, an example of displaying a rate of turn in degrees/second.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

12.34°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

12.34° 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

12.34°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

12.34° 123.4

4-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.4 Displaying Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 13

This function displays the total running time of Master compass, the running time of gyrosphere and the run-ning time after startup.

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “13 Run Time” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the running time.

The first line (G1), second line (G2), and third line (OP) indicate the running time of No. 1 master compass, No. 2 master compass, and the op-eration unit, respectively.

If the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the display can be switched between the total run-ning time, gyrosphere running time, and time after startup.

The upper, middle and lower figures on the right show examples of displaying total running time (Total time), gyrosphere running time (Gyro time) and the time after startup (Power time) respec-tively.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEThe M.operation unit displays the gyrosphere-running-time only .

Running hours of the current gyrosphere is displayed (from 000000 to 999999 hours).If the command code “13” is executed, the upper two digits of the six digits of the gyrosphere running time are displayed in the data display.If the SHIFT key is pressed, the middle two digits of the six digits are displayed, and if the SHIFT key is pressed once more the lower two digits of the six dig-its with a decimal point after the least significant digit are displayed.If for example, the running time of the gyrosphere is 1952 hours, the digits “00” → “19” → “52.” will be displayed.→ “19” → “52.” will be displayed. “19” → “52.” will be displayed.→ “52.” will be displayed. “52.” will be displayed.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 001234h

OP 012345h

Total time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345h

Gyro time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 000123h

OP 000123h

Power time

>123.4

126.0

G2 001235h 123.4

G2 001236h 123.4

G2 000124h 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 001234h

OP 012345h

Total time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345h

Gyro time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 000123h

OP 000123h

Power time

>123.4

126.0

G2 001235h 123.4

G2 001236h 123.4

G2 000124h 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and AdjustCOMMAND CODE : 14

This function displays dimmer rank and contrast rank on the C.operation unit.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting «14 Dim level» from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the dimmer rank (as shown in the figure on the right).

The figure to the right shows an example of dis-playing the dimmer rank of 16 and contrast rank of 13 in the operation unit.

� adjusting the valueThe dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key.The contrast rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key while pressing the ENT key.

To increase the brightness and contrast, press key.

To decrease the brightness and contrast, press key.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEM.operation unit does not display the dimmer rank.

� adjusting the valueThe dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the SET/DIMMER key. To increase the brightness, press ▲ key. To decrease the brightness , press ▼ key.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

16 32 D M.

13 32 ONT.

D .

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

16 32 D M.

13 32 ONT.

D .

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase CurrentCOMMAND CODE : 15

This function displays the gyro sphere’s phase current (gyro sphere’s driving current). This value is useful for estimating the gyro sphere’s state.The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “15 G.Current” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the gyro-sphere phase current (as shown in the figure on the right).

The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe gyrosphere phase current (current for driving the gy-rosphere) is displayed (0.00 to 0.99 A).Normal value : from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.If the command code “15” is executed, two decimal plac-es of the gyrosphere phase current are displayed in the data display.The figure to the right shows an example of 0.21A of the gyrosphere phase current.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.21 A

G t

>123.4

126.0

0.21 A 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.21 A

G t

>123.4

126.0

0.21 A 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery VoltageCOMMAND CODE : 16

This function displays battery voltage of being used for backup memory.If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the C.operation unit and the Master compass.If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the Mas-ter compass.The normal value is in the range from 2.5 V to 4.0 V.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “16 BT.Volt” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the backup battery voltage (as shown in the figure on the right).

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe voltage of the battery for backup memory is displayed (from 0.0 to 9.9 V).

If the command code “16” is executed, the backup battery voltage is displayed in the data display.The figure to the right shows an example of 3.6 V for the voltage of the backup battery.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98V

BATT.Volt

>123.4

126.0

G2 3.75V 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98V

BATT.Volt

>123.4

126.0

G2 3.75V 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.8 Displaying Deviation VolatageCOMMAND CODE : 17

This function displays deviation voltage of used Master compass.The normal value is in the range from -0.4 V to 0.4 V.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “17 DV.Volt” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the deviation voltage (as shown in the figure on the right).

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.12

D . t

>123.4

126.0

0.23 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.12

D . t

>123.4

126.0

0.23 123.4

4-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version NumberCOMMAND CODE : 19

This function displays software version number.If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays the version of the C.opera-tion unit and the Master compass.If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays version of the Master compass.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “19 Soft.Ver.” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the software version number (as shown in the figure on the right).If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe software version number of master compass is shown by major version (alphabet) and minor version (numerical value).The major version is shown by numerical value at M.op-eration unit. The version “A” is shown as ‘01’. The minor version is shown by numerical value of two digits. When command 19 is executed, the major version is dis-played. The minor version is displayed by pressing shift key. The decimal point is displayed in displaying the minor version.The display is switched by pressing the shift key.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying software version number “A01”.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01

Soft.Ver.

>123.4

126.0

G2 CD065A01 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01

Soft.Ver.

>123.4

126.0

G2 CD065A01 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the display function (C.operation unit)

ENT

OMMAND

D .MENU10 DG11 DE12 ROT

D .MENU13 R T14 D 1 G. t

123.4° 123.4°

T DG

00. ° 00. °

SPD E

122. ° 122. °

ENT

>123.4 123.6 126.0

G2 G1 00.2°E G1 02.6°E G2 02.4°D t

GYRO 1GYRO 2EXT

123.4° 123. °

ROT

ENT

12.34°12.3 °

ROT

ENT

G1 001234G2 00123OP 01234T t t

G1 01234G2 001236

G t

G1 000123G2 000124OP 000123P t

16 32 D M. 13 32 ONT.

D .

D .MENU13 R T14 D 1 G. t

D .MENU16 BT. t1 D . t1

D .MENU1 D . t1 1 S t. .

ENT

0.2 A 0.26 A

G t

ENT

G1 3.G2 3. 6OP 3.BATT. t

ENT

0.1 0.16

D . t

ENT

G1 D06 A01G2 D06 A01OP D066A01S t. .

ENT

Mi iumc ass icationmenu

Disp a inHea in

Disp a in Hea inDe iation

Disp a in Rateo Turn

Disp a inRunnin Time

Disp a inDimmer Ran

Disp a inG rosp ereP ase Current

Disp a inBac up Batter

o ta e

Disp a inDe iation

o ta e

Dispa inSo t are ersionNum er

From an screen

Norma mo e

4-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the display function (M.operation unit)

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

COMMANDBZ STOP

Di pla in ro p ererunnin ti e

Di pla in ro p erep a e urrent

Di pla in ba upbatter olta e

Dipla in o t areer ion nu ber

Fro an reen

Nor al o e

4-13

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2 Setting FunctionsThe setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyrocompass properly.

The maintenance functions include the following:

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-1421 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1522 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1623 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-1724 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-1925 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-21

26 ○ ○ Displaying/resetting cause of Master compass alarm ○ 4-22

27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-24

29 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

Each functions are executed by operation of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit

See the section 3.4 for the command function.

See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

4-14

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.1 External Heading Input SelectionCOMMAND CODE : 20

C.operation unit has 3 input ports for the serial signal and all port can be connected the heading sensors. This COMMAND executes the status display of each port and the selection of external heading sensor that display as EXT.The example of connected external heading sensor and the selecting procedure are as follows.

� The example of connected external heading sensor Port 1 : Magnetic compass (TMC unit)

Port 2 : THDPort 3 : disconnected

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “20 EXT SEL” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the external heading input selection.

External heading input information for external heading input ports 1 to 3 is displayed (as shown in the figure on the right).

External heading input information

NONE Without external heading input settingOK With external heading input setting; External heading input information is being normally input.NG With external heading input setting; External heading input information failure is being generated.

For the port used as the external heading, “>” is displayed immediately before “Port-.”In order to change input ports, move the “>” to the targeted port by pressing the up or down arrow key and press the ENT key. The display blinks, signaling the need to validate the change.If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input port is changed. However, the port cannot be changed without setting the external heading input.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-15

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 21

This is a function to setting the ship’s speed for correcting speed-error.Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) = (compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)

Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = Ship’s speed [knot] × cos (Compass heading) 5π cos (Latitude)

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “21 SPD SET” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing speed-error correction speed input.The figure on the right shows an example of dis-playing ship’s speed of 23 knots (kt) with auto-matic input.To select automatic or manual input, press the ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then, with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.If AUTO is selected, the automatic ship’s speed input becomes valid.If MANUAL is selected, the tens digit of the ship’s speed blinks, allowing for a value between 00 to 99 kt to be entered for the ship’s speed by manual.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering ship’s speed press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “21” is executed, the current speed is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Press the shift key to change the digit and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to enter a new speed (from 00 to 99 kt). The figure to the right shows an example of entering the speed 10 kt.After entering the speed, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-16

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 22

This is a function to setting the ship’s latitude for correcting speed-error.Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) = (compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)

Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = Ship’s speed [knot] × cos (Compass heading) 5π cos (Latitude)

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “22 LAT SET” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the speed-error correcting latitude input.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the latitude of 39 °N.To select automatic or manual input, press the ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then, with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.If AUTO is selected, the automatic latitude input becomes valid.If MANUAL is selected, the character N or S blinks allowing for a value between 00 to 70 degrees N or S to be entered for the ship’s latitude by manual. Select N or S with up or down arrow key and press ENT key.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering the latitude press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “22” is executed, the current latitude is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks. If the latitude displayed is south, a decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit. For example, with a latitude of 16° S, “16.” is displayed.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to enter a latitude (from 00 N or S to 70 N or S). The figure to the right shows an example of entering 45° N.After a value for the latitude has been entered, the en-tered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the en-tered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

N 39°

AUTO

LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

N 39°

AUTO

LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-17

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 23

This is a function to align the azimuth of the container and the compass heading by detecting the zero point of the gyrocompass system again.

� Operation with the C.operation uniSelecting «23 Sync.Auto» from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches the display showing automatic master compass alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).

«Follow Up» is displayed, signifying that the mas-ter compass is following up the gyrosphere.

After pressing the ENT key, G1 blinks, enabling the operator to select the master compass with which automatic alignment is conducted (G1 or G2 or G1/G2) by pressing the up or down arrow keys.Pressing the ENT key again after selection has been made calls up the Ready display, which indicates standby for automatic alignment mode. (The second and subsequent figures on the right show examples of the display indication when No. 1 master compass is automatically aligned.)

If the ENT key is again pressed, the «Running» display appears showing that automatic align-ment is being carried out. (The master compass starts automatic alignment.)If automatic alignment finishes normally, the «Success» display appears. If the automatic alignment finished abnormally, the alarm will be generated. If a failure occurs, execute master compass alignment manually

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Follow Up

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Ready

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Running

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Success

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

Gyro=G1

123.4

Follow Up

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Follow Up

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Ready

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Running

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Success

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

Gyro=G1

123.4

Follow Up

4-18

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “23” is executed, alignment starts and the container rotates to detect the zero point: “CA” blinks in the data display and the alignment can be sus-pended by pressing the COMMAND key.If the alignment is completed normally, “CA” is still dis-played but stops blinking and the gyro heading display indicates “000.0” (see the figure to the right).If the alignment is not successful (zero point cannot be detected), an alarm is generated and the “CA” continues to blink. If this occurs, carry out manual alignment.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-19

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 24

If automatic Master compass alignment cannot be executed, it is necessary to adjust the compass heading to the container heading. There are relative value alignment and absolute value alignment as the adjustment method.

CAUTIONPlease make zero degree the speed error correction value by setting ship’s speed 0 knot by using code “21” when you execute this adjustment.

� Relative value alignment The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the input value. (Input range : — 180 ° to + 180° ) Input value = (true reading through astronomical observation) — (compass reading) Easterly : “-”, Westerly : “+”For example, if compass reading is “050.0” and the true reading through astronomical observation is “020.0”, the input value is “- 30”.This method may be effective in case of sailing because the standard of absolute heading can be not obtained.

� Absolute value alignmentBy inputting present absolute heading the compass heading is adjusted to the value. Input value = (true heading)This method may be effective in the dock, because the standard of absolute heading can be obtained.

4-20

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with The C.operation UnitSelecting “24 Sync.Manu” from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key, switches to the display showing the manual master compass alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).If the ENT key is pressed, “G1” blinks, and allow to select master compass which is executed manual alignment. Select master compass us-ing up and down key (G1,G2,G1/G2), and press ENT key.If G1 or G1/G2 is selected, the first line “Rel.” blinks and be shifted to Relative value align-ment mode. If G2 is selected, the second line “Rel.” blinks and be shifted to Relative value alignment mode.Select Absolute value alignment (Abs.:0 to 359.9 degrees) or Relative value alignment (Rel.:±180 degrees) using up and down key, and press ENT key. Move cursor to alter place using right and left key, and change sign or value using up and down key.After the value is changed, press ENT key, then input value start blink. If the blinking value is OK, press ENT key. The blinking will be stopped and the master compass will be aligned.If you select G1/G2, second line “Rel.” starts blinking. You can do No.2 master compass manual alignment.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “24” is executed, the data display indicates “AE,” the gyro heading display indicates “000.0” and the mode changes to relative value alignment setting mode.If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the data display indicates “AH” and the gyro heading display indi-cates the current compass heading and the mode chang-es to the absolute value alignment setting mode. (Switch between the setting modes with the EXT key.)The hundreds digit (digit to be entered) of the display in the gyro heading display blinks.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key (relative value: — 180.0 to 180.0 degrees; absolute value: 000.0 to 359.9 degrees).If a negative value is to be entered, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds digit) and press the UP key several times until the data display indicates “AE.” display.After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.0

Sync.Manu

>123.4

126.0 Gyro=G1

Rel. +000.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.0

Sync.Manu

>123.4

126.0 Gyro=G1

Rel. +000.0 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-21

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up GainCOMMAND CODE : 25

Adjust the Master compass follow-up gain when there is a deadband in the follow-up actions and thus follow-up is not smooth or when hunting occurs because the gain is too high.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “25 Fol. GAIN” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current setting of follow-up gain.Press the ENT key again, then the «G1» blinks. Selecting «G1» (No 1 Master-compass) or «G2» ( No 2 Master-compass ) by the upper and low-er arrow keys and press the ENT key again, then the follow-up gain blinks.Pressing the upper arrow key increases the gain by 5 % (max. 200 %).Pressing the lower arrow key decreases the gain by 5 % (min. 10 %).After entering the gain value, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The follow-up gain finally changes to the value you set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “25” is executed, the data display indi-cates the current gain (two digits of hundreds and tens) and the digit of hundreds (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter a gain value (01 to 20).The figure on the right shows an example of entering a gain of 95 %. (Standard: 100 %)After entering a gain, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for an-other 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continu-ously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

100

G G1

.GA N

>123.4

126.0

123.4 100

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

100

G G1

.GA N

>123.4

126.0

123.4 100

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-22

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass AlarmCOMMAND CODE : 26

When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting «26 ErrRef.MC» from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the cause of the master compass alarm.The figure on the right shows an example of a display when a gyrosphere failure is generated in No.2 master compass.If an alarm is generated, the master compass (G1 or G2) and an error code are displayed in the first line, and the error contents in the second and third lines. If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered; if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered. If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-ing the right or left arrow key.When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “26” is executed, an error code is displayed in the data display for the cause of alarm gen-erated and detected in the Master compass.A decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the error code. The figure to the right shows an example in which the backup battery voltage failure is being generated.An error code without a decimal point means that the error that caused the alarm has already been rectified, and if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds it will be reset and the error message will disappear.If there was no reason for the generation of the alarm, then “—” is displayed.In addition, if there is more than one cause for the gen-eration of the alarm, the error code with the smallest code number is displayed first and the follow-ing codes can be displayed by pressing the UP key. For example, pressing the UP key may switch the displayed error codes between “40” → “50” → “60” .If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

—.-

>126.0

G2>123.4

—.-

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

—.-

>126.0

G2>123.4

—.-

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-23

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit AlarmCOMMAND CODE : 27

When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “27 ErrRef.OP” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the cause of C.operation unit alarm.The figure on the right shows an example of a display when no alarm cause in C.operation unit is shown. If there is an alarm occurring, the corresponding error code is displayed on the first line and the error contents on the second and third lines.If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered; if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered. If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-ing the right or left arrow key.When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.

See section 5.2.4 for the procedure to check the error contents.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

No error at

operation

unit

ErrRef.OP

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

No error at

operation

unit

ErrRef.OP

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-24

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm SettingCOMMAND CODE : 28

This is the function to set a limit value of the deviation alarm that is generated by difference between the current heading and the external heading.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “28 Dev Alrm” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the deviation alarm setting.

The figure on the right shows an example of the deviation limit value to generate a devia-tion alarm (difference of Master compass heading from external input heading) being at 10.0 degrees.

If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the deviation alarm limit value blinks to allow the value to be entered.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering the limit value press the ENT key. Then the input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.In addition, if the limit value is set to “00.0,” a deviation alarm is not generated.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 0 .0°

D A

>123.4

126.0

G1 E 10.0° 123.4

G2 E 10.0°

G2GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 0 .0°

D A

>123.4

126.0

G1 E 10.0° 123.4

G2 E 10.0°

4-25

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.2.10 Startup Timer SettingCOMMAND CODE : 29

This function restarts the gyro system automatically after a preset time.

CAUTIONDon’t cut off DC power supply for gyro system during timer mode.If the startup time is set to “00”, the system goes into “timer mode” for one minute and the power supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.

In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-tion, becomes the gyro heading. At this time, the last selected gyro compass signal is used for output.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “29 W-UP Time” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the startup timer setting (as shown in the figure on the right).

If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the startup time blinks to allow a startup time be-tween 00 to 99 hours to be entered.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric values.After entering the time press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the input.If the ENT key is again pressed, the system goes into timer mode and the power supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.In timer mode the time until restart is displayed (as shown in the figure on the right).If the ENT key is pressed when in timer mode, the timer is reset and the system can be immedi-ately started.In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-tion, becomes the gyro heading.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

00[Hour]

W-UP.Time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Next wake

up to

07.59.29

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

00[Hour]

W-UP.Time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Next wake

up to

07.59.29

123.4

4-26

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (C.operation unit) ···1/3

ENT

OMMAND

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

ENT

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

+12kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

+12kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SET ENT

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

ENT

N 00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

S 00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N2°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N2°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

GG1

S.A

Ot.MENU

23 S

.At

24 S

.M2

.GAN

ENT

G1S

.At

G2S

.At

GG1

G2S

.At

ENT

R GG1

S.A

R GG1

S.A

t S G

G1S

.At

ium

cas

sii

catio

enu

Ete

rna

inin

put s

eec

tion

Spee

set

tein

spee

erro

r cor

rect

ion

Latit

sette

in o

rsp

ee e

rror c

orre

ctio

nAu

tom

atic

nmen

t o

mas

ter c

ompa

From

scr

een

Nom

a m

4-27

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (C.operation unit) ···2/3

COMM

AND

ENT

Oper

at.M

ENU

23 S

ync.

Auto

24 S

ync.

Manu

25 F

ol.G

AIN

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

Abs.

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

ENT

Fro

iula

iiat

ion

enu

Man

ual a

lin

ent o

ter

4-28

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (C.operation unit) ···3/3

Ot.

23 S

.At

24 S

.M2

ENT

100

GG1

.GA

ENT

100

GG1

.GA

100

GG2

.GA

100

GG1

G2.G

100

GG1

G2.G

ENT

0 100

GG1

G2.G

ENT

0 100

GG1

G2.G

ENT

0 110

GG1

G2.G

ENT

0 110

GG1

G2.G

ENT

t.ME

NU26

.M2

.OP

2 D

ENT

G1OD

E01

G1OD

tDG

ENT

G1OD

E01

ENT

Ot.

26 E

R.M

2 E

R.O

D A ENT

OPOD

1 T

.OP

ENT

OPOD

E11

0LA

T t

.OP

OPOD

1 T

.OP

OPOD

E11

0LA

T t

.OP

ENT

Ot.

26 E

R.M

2 E

R.O

D A ENT

G1G2

00.

0°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

ENT

G1G2

00.0

°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E00

.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E11

.0°

G2E

00.

0 °D

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

00.0°

D A

ENT

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

12.0°

D A

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

12.0°

D A

ENT

Ot.

2 E

R.O

D A

UP T

ENT

00[

]

UP.T EN

00[

]

UP.T EN

]

UP.T EN

k t

.. ENT

OMMA

From

scr

een

Nor

ium

cas

sii

catio

enu

Setti

n o

oup

isp

a/re

setti

n c

ause

mas

ter c

ompa

ss a

arm

Dis

in/re

setti

n c

ause

C.o

pera

tion

unit

aar

eia

tion

aar

m s

ettin

Star

tup

timer

set

tin

in c

ase

o re

ease

act

orin

cas

e o

reea

se a

ctor

Gro

sta

rts

Nom

a m

4-29

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···1/2

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲

COMM

AND

BZ ST

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

EXT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲ GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲ GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

SIF

T▼

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

Fro

Nor

Setti

n t

e ip

pee

erro

r or

retio

nSe

ttin

latit

orpe

e e

rror

orre

tion

Auto

rat

ate

pa a

lin

ent

Man

ual

ate

r o

pa a

lin

ent

Rel

ati

e al

ue a

lin

ent

Abol

ute

alue

ali

nen

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

4-30

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···2/2

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲EN

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA DATA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TADA

DATA

ENT

COMM

AND

BZ ST

Setti

ate

r o

paol

loup

ipl

ain

/reet

tin

aue

ate

r o

pa a

lar

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

Pre

or 2

A e

ial

poi

nt i

pla

e a

ter

lea

t i

nii

ant

iit

o t

e er

ror

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tin

alue

1 2

Fro

Nor

4-31

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3 Maintenance FunctionsThis section describes the functions used for maintenance. Do not use these functions in normal state. When command codes of 30’s in the command functions are to be used, enable the mainte-nance functions as shown in section 4.3.1

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. are authorized to implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this section.

The maintenance functions include the following:

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-3231 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3332 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-3533 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-3634 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-3735 ○ ○ Resetting log ○ 4-38

36 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-39

37 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-40

39 ○ ○ Log display ○ 4-43

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

Each functions are executed by operation of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.

See the section 3.4 for the command function.

See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

NOTEAfter changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4-32

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.1 Permission for Maintenance FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 30

The maintain function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.The command code “30” is the function to check password.

NOTEAsk your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to implement the operation above.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “30 Password” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password (as shown in the upper figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-rectly entered, the maintenance functions are ena-bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.The maintenance functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “30” is executed “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered ) of “00” is blinking.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the maintenance functions are enabled (in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAN D key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the maintenance functions are enabled.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

maintenance

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maintenance

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

maintenance

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maintenance

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-33

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC SignalsCOMMAND CODE : 31

A simulated output of any of the following signals can be selected using this function : analog head-ing signal, analog quadrant signal, or analog rate-of-turn signal.

The following graphs show the output span for each analog output.

� Heading (HDG) and quadrant (QUAD) � Rates of turn (ROT1, ROT2, and ROT3)

Output Le el

1 2

Output.

1.2

1 2

ea in i nal

ua rant i nal

Output Le e..

/min /min /min

Rate o turn

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “31 DAC Dummy” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the simulated DAC sig-nal setting (as shown in the upper figure on the right).

Press the ENT key again. The HDG blinks and an analog signal can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a channel from HDG (heading), QUAD (quad-rant), ROT1 (rate of turn), ROT2, and ROT3, then the ENT key. The channel stops blinking and the ones digit of the output voltage level blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the voltage level, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The voltage level stops blinking and finally changes to the value you set.The lower figure on the right shows an example of setting the simulated output of 1.23 V for the quadrant signal of the Master compass.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 0.00 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

QUAD 1.23 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 0.00 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

QUAD 1.23 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-34

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “31” is executed, channel number “1” blinks in the data display, and the analog output signal level of each channel is set to the most recent level (initial value of the simulated output).If the UP key is pressed, the blinking display of channel number (1 to 5 channels) changes.If a channel number is selected and the SHIFT key is pressed, the current output level of that channel is dis-played in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be en-tered by pressing the UP key to enter a simulated output level (0.0 to 5.0 V).After entering the simulated output level, the channel number and entered value alternately blink to enable the operator to confirm the value if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds;(1) the entered value is displayed continuously, (2) the output level finally changes to the level you set, and (3) the channel number is again displayed in the data display (blinking).The figure on the right shows an example of setting the simulated output of 3.8 V for channel 2.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.Until the COMMAND key is pressed, the simulated output remains in the set level.

Channel No. Output signal1 Analog heading2 Analog quadrant3 Analog rate of turn : port 14 Analog rate of turn : port 25 Analog rate of turn : port 3

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-35

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 32

This function turns the Master compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of Mas-ter compass.During execution of this command, the container is released from the follow-up of the gyro-sphere and can be rotated at a specified turning speed. In this condition, the Repeater compass remains stopped.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “32 Rotate MC” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the angular speed setting of “00” deg/s.Press the ENT key again, then the “00” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the angular speed as follows:

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise: 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 18 → 24 → 30 18 → 24 → 30→ 24 → 30 24 → 30→ 30 30

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -30 → -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -02 → -01 → 00 -02 → -01 → 00→ -01 → 00 -01 → 00→ 00 00

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 00 → — 01 → — 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ — 01 → — 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 — 01 → — 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ — 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 — 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -18 → -24 → -30 -18 → -24 → -30→ -24 → -30 -24 → -30→ -30 -30

Decelerates the speed clockwise: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 02 → 01 → 00 02 → 01 → 00→ 01 → 00 01 → 00→ 00 00

The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of -12 deg/s.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “32” is executed, the gyro heading display remains the present heading value, and the data display indicates the turning speed (00 deg/s).If the ▼ key is pressed, the Master compass turns clock-wise (CW) and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns counter-clockwise (CCW).The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the turning speed of 06 deg/s.By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning speed accelerates.By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning of Master compass decelerates, stops and then acceler-ates in the opposite direction.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly. Pressing the same key : 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30

Pressing the opposite key: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

A SPD

G G1

R t t M

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

A SPD

G G1

R t t M

>123.4

126.0

123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-36

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater CompassCOMMAND CODE : 33

This function turns the Repeater compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of Repeater compass.During execution of this command, the Repeater compass is released from the follow-up of the Master compass and can be rotated at a specified turning speed.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “33 Rotate RC” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the angular speed setting of “0.0” deg/s.Press the ENT key again, then the “0.0” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the angular speed as follows:

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise: 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 2.4 → 3.0 2.4 → 3.0→ 3.0 3.0

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -3.0 → -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.1 → 0.0 -0.1 → 0.0→ 0.0 0.0

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 0.0 → — 0.1 → — 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ — 0.1 → — 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 — 0.1 → — 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ — 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 — 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -2.4 → -3.0 -2.4 → -3.0→ -3.0 -3.0

Decelerates the speed clockwise: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.00.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.1 → 0.0 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.0 0.0

The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of 0.6 deg/s.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “33” is executed, the gyro head-ing display continues to indicate the compass head-ing and the data display indicates the turning speed (0.0 deg/s).If the ▼ key is pressed, the repeater-compass turns clockwise (CW), and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns counterclockwise (CCW).The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the turning speed of 1.2 deg/s.By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning speed accelerates.By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning of Repeater compass decelerates, stops and then ac-celerates in the opposite direction.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly. Pressing the same key : 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0

Pressing the opposite key: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 → 0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

0.6 deg/s

Rotate RC

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

0.6 deg/s

Rotate RC

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-37

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 34

Use this function to reset the running time (hours) of the gyrosphere to zero when replacing the gyrosphere. This operation is required to grasp the accurate running time of the gyrosphere for adequate maintenance scheduling.

NOTEAsk your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to implement the operation above.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “34 Reset RT” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password.Press the ENT key , then the «G1» blinks. Se-lecting «G1″(No.1 Master-compass) or «G2″( No.2 Master-compass ) by the upper and lower arrow keys and press the ENT key again. The ones digit of «00000» blinks, prompting you to enter a password.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirma-tion. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the running time is reset to zero.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “34” is executed, “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right for an example.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the gyrosphere runtime is reset to zero.(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 01234

G G1

00000

>123.4

126.0

G2 006 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 01234

G G1

00000

>123.4

126.0

G2 006 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-38

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.6 Resetting LogCOMMAND CODE : 35

This function clears the error history and the command operation history.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “35 Reset LOG” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key.The Err blinks and the log type can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the log type from Err (Error log) or Com (Command log), and press the ENT key.The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the log is reset.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “35” is executed, the data display indicates [EL] and press the shift key to select the log type from EL (Error Log) or CL (Command Log).Press the ENT key for 2 seconds.“00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the selected log is reset .(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OPL E

00000R t LOG

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OPL E

00000R t LOG

>123.4

126.0 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-39

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.7 Initializing Backup MemoryCOMMAND CODE : 36

Use this function to reset all the function settings.

CAUTIONDO NOT carry out the following operation unless instructed by an authorized service technician of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “36 Init. MEM” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key. The unit stops blinking and the ones digit of “00000” blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the backup memory is initialized when the power is turned on next time.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “36” is executed, “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right for an example.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously but the backup memory has not yet been initialized. The backup memory is initialized when the power is turned on next time.(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the com-mand display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OP

00000

t.MEM

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OP

00000

t.MEM

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-40

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation ErrorCOMMAND CODE : 37

This section describes the procedure for correcting the error caused when the gyrocompass is not installed in such a way that the lubber line of the Master compass is precisely aligned parallel with the ship’s fore-and-aft line.

� Relative value correctionThe procedure uses the compass heading error as the amount of correction.

Example: 0.56 (Amount of error correction) = 42.56 (true heading through astronomical observation) – 42.00 (compass heading)

CAUTIONThe setting of installation-error by the relative value should be executed, after the last setting value is returned to zero to prevent the setting mistake.

NOTEThe amount of correction for Master compass installation error is determined from the difference between the compass heading detected by a reading when the Master compass is settled and an accurate turn heading obtained through astronomical observation.Perform these measurements when there is no change in the heading, such as when the ship is docked.

� Absolute value correctionIf the absolute true heading can be obtained, such as when the ship is docked, set it as the compass heading. Example: (Input value) = (absolute true heading when the ship is docked)

NOTEWhenever performing error correction, be sure to record the amount of correction in the maintenance record book.

4-41

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “37 Inst. Err” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the current correction setting.There are two correction procedures: relative value correction and absolute value correc-tion. The figure on the right shows the current setting of 0.5°.In the example of display above, press the ENT key, then Rel. (relative value correction) blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the correction procedure from Rel. (relative: ±180) and Abs.(absolute: 0 to 359.9),and Press the ENT key. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit: sign (for absolute correction only) → the hundreds digit → the tens digit → the ones digit → the first decimal place

Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the amount of correction, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The blinking stops and the correction method and the amount is finally set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf error compensation is to be carried out using key operation, execute the command code “37.” There are two compensation procedures; relative value compensation and absolute value com-pensation. Pressing the EXT key for 2 seconds switches between these two procedures.

� Example of display for relative value compensation

� Example of display for absolute value compensation

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.5

Gyro=G1

Inst.Err

>123.4

126.0

123.4 Rel. -000.5

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.5

Gyro=G1

Inst.Err

>123.4

126.0

123.4 Rel. -000.5

4-42

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Relative vlaue correction (AE)The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the compensation value. The gyro heading display indicates the current value of compensation and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the value of error compensation (- 180.0 to 180.0 degrees).To enter a negative value, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds digit) and press the UP key several times. When correction value is negative, M.operation unit displays “AE.”.After entering the value of compensation, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

� Absolute value correction (AH)If absolute ship’s heading is obtained by the quay-bearing etc. its heading value is input as compass heading.

On the � display, the gyro heading display indicates “container heading + installation error com-pensating value” and the hundreds digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the compass heading (000.0 to 359.9 degrees).After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

4-43

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.3.9 Displaying LogCOMMAND CODE : 39

This function displays the recorded log data.There are two kind of log data. The one is error log , and the other is command log.If the number of log data is over the maximum recordable number, the oldest log data is deleted.The maximum number of error log is 100. The maximum number of command log is 1000.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “39 LOG Ref.” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key.The Err blinks and the log type can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the log type from Err (Error log) or Com (Com-mand log), then press enter key.The latest error log of the selected unit is displayed. The second line indicates the error number (00 to 99), the third line the error code, and the fourth line the time of occurrence.If the error number is 1 or more, or more than one error has occurred, pressing the lower arrow key displays the immediately preceding log, and pressing the upper arrow key displays the immedi-ately following log. A larger error number corresponds to a later error.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “39” is executed, the data display indicates [EL] and press the SHIFT key to select the log type from EL (Error Log) or CL (Command Log).Press the ENT key for 2 seconds, then the data display indicates the log number of the most recent log data (0 to 99). (� That is the 31st log number is shown.)

Press the SHIFT key to switch between the log data display items. Log number → Log code → (Lower 2 digits of Log code :at CL) →Upper 2 digits of the generated time →intermediate 2 digits of the generated time → Lower 2 digits of the generated timeIf gyrosphere runtime is reset at replacing of gyrosphere, the error that generated later is recorded by using the new runtime.If the UP key is pressed, the previous data item is displayed.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEThe maximum number of log which is displayed on M.operation unit is 100.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =99

Code=080

Time=012345

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =99

Code=080

Time=012345

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-44

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

�Example of displaying «EL» �Example of displaying log number

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

The display items can be identified by the decimal point displayed in the command display and data display.

Decimal point Display item

Command display Data display

00 00 Log number00. 00 Upper 2 digits of log code00. 00. Lower 2 digits of log code (at CL)0.0 00 Upper 2 digits of generated time0.0 00. Intermediate 2 digits of generated time0.0 0.0. Lower 2 digits of generated time

�Example of displaying an error code �Example of displaying generated time 1

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

�Example of displaying generated time 2 Example of displaying generated time 3

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

4-45

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···1/5

COMM

AND

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

dMa

int.

30 P

assw

ord

31 D

AC D

ummy

32 R

otat

e MC

ENT

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000 EN

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.**

***

Main

tena

nce

comm

and

isav

aila

ble.

Pass

word

deni

ed.

Try

agai

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

d31

DAC

Dum

my32

Rot

ate

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

QUAD 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT1 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT2 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

0.0

DAC

Dumm

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

QUAD

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT1

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT2

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ENT

HDG

1.00V

DAC

Dumm

QUAD

2.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT1

3.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT2

4.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

5.00V

DAC

Dumm

ENT

enu

isp

ao m

aint

enan

cem

Men

u is

inca

se m

aint

enan

e as

nin

iite

Acce

ssin

mai

nten

ance

utpu

ttin

sim

uat

AC s

ina

From

scr

een

Nor

Ente

rsi

ate

ota

e a

u e

4-46

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···2/5

ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1Ro

tate

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

d31

DAC

Dum

my32

Rot

ate

Angu

lar

SPD

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1Ro

tate

Angu

lar

SPD

deg/

sGy

ro=G2

Rota

te M

Angu

lar

SPD

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1/G2

Rota

te M

Angu

lar

SPD

00 d

eg/s

Gyro

=G1

Rota

te M

Angu

lar

SPD

-12 d

eg/s

Gyro

=G1

Rota

te M

ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

0.0

deg

Rota

te R

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

0.0

deg/

Rota

te R

Angu

lar

SPD

0.6

deg/

Rota

te R

ENT

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

ENT

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G2

Code

=000

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

/G2

Code

=000

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

G1 0

0000

0hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=END

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=***

ENT

COMM

AND

Ente

r pa

it a

rro

Fro

Nor

iula

iiat

ion

enu

Man

ual

rie

ate

r o

paM

anua

l ri

e o

peat

opa

ettin

rop

ere

runt

Sele

t rot

atin

.1,

.2,

1.2 ,

1.,

2.,

.1,

.2,

1.2 ,

1.,

2.,

Sele

t rot

atin

, 1 ,

2 ,

, ,

12,

, 1 ,

2 ,

, 12,

4-47

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···3/5

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

Unit

=G1

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

Unit

=G2

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Com

mand

Code

=000

00Re

set

LOG

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Er

ror

Code

=EN

DRe

set

LOG

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=G1

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=G2

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=END

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Log

=Er

ror

Code

=**

***

Rese

t LO

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=***

Init

.MEM

ium

cas

sii

catio

enu

Res

ettin

oIn

itia

iin

up m

emor

Ente

r pas

sor

Ente

r pas

sor

4-48

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···4/5

COMM

AND

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Abs.

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

Abs.

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

ium

cas

catio

enu

Cor

rect

in in

sta

atio

n er

ror

From

scr

een

Nor

4-49

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of themaintenance function (C.operation unit) ···5/5

ENT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Maint.MENU

37 Inst.Err

38 reserved

39 LOG Ref.

ENT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=G1 Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=G2 Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

ENT

Unit=OP

Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=OP

Com

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=OP

Err

Num =10

Code=095

Time=012345

Unit=OP

Err

Num =09

Code=090

Time=001234

Unit=OP

Err

Num =01

Code=151

Time=000012

Unit=OP

Err

Num =00

Code=090

Time=000012

ENT

Unit=OP

Com

Num =025

Code=1000

Time=001234

Unit=OP

Com

Num =024

Code=2001

Time=001233

Unit=OP

Com

Num =001

Code=2802

Time=000010

Unit=OP

Com

Num =000

Code=3701

Time=000001

ENT

COMMANDMi

ium

cas

sii

catio

enu

Dis

in o

From

scr

een

Nor

4-50

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···1/4

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

COMMAND

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

(QUAD)

(HDG)

(ROT1)

(ROT2)

(ROT3)

ENT

Per i ion or aintenan e un tion

Outputin i ulateDAC i nal

Manual ri e o a ter o pa

Manual ri e o repeater o pa

I pa or i in orre t t en t e e i al point i not i pla e .

pre or 2 e

Manua ri e o aster co passExample of the display when the ▲ key or ▼ key i pre e .a elerate （▲）：00→01→02→03→04→05→

06→12→18→24→30e elerate （▼）：30→24→18→12→06→05→

04→03→02→01→00

Manua ri e o repeater co passExample of the display when the ▲ key or ▼ key i pre e .A elerate （▲）：0.0→0.1→0.2→0.3→0.4→0.5

→0.6→1.2→1.8→2.4→3.0De elerate （▼）：3.0→2.4→1.8→1.2→0.6→0.5

→0.4→0.3→0.2→0.1→0.0

C annel nu ber Entere alue

4-51

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···2/4

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP▲

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT ENT

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 ePre or

2 e

Pre or2 e

i pa or i in orre t t ent e e i al point i not i pla e .

Re ettin ro p ererunnin ti e

Initiali in ba up e or Re ettin loError lo Co an lo

4-52

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···3/4

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

EXT GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

Corre tin a ter o pa in tallation error

Relati e alue orre tion Ab olute alue orre tion

Exa ple o t e ettin alueAE 12 .

Exa ple o t e ettin alueA 2 .

Preor 2 e

Pre or 2 e

4-53

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···4/4

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

ENT ENT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

ENT

Di pla in loError lo Co an lo

Pre or 2 e

Lo nu ber

Lo o e

upper t o i ito t e ti e o lo

inter e iate t o i ito t e ti e o lo

lo er t o i ito t e ti e o lo

un er i pla in t e lo ata

Lo nu ber

Upper t o i it o Lo o e

Lo er t o i it o Lo o e

upper t o i ito t e ti e o lo

inter e iate t o i ito t e ti e o lo

lo er t o i ito t e ti e o lo

un er i pla in t e lo ata

4-54

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4 Generation FunctionThis section describes the functions that facilitate communication with input / output devices con-nected to the CMZ900. The generation functions are divided into two groups : command functions with codes of 40’s and settings with the dip switches. When command codes of 40’s in the command functions are to be used, enable the generation functions as shown in section 4.4.1.

The generation functions include the following:

Command code

Operation unit Function item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-5541 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56

42 ○ – Setting communication protocol of output port ○ 4-57

43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-5845 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-6349 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

Each functions are executed by operation of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.

See the section 3.4 for the command function.

See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

NOTEAfter changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4-55

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.1 Permission for Generation FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 40

The generation function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.The command code “40” is the function to check password.

NOTEAsk your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to implement the operation above.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “40 Password” from the Generat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display for entering a password (as shown in the upper figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower ar-row keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-rectly entered, the generation functions are ena-bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.The generation functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on,

� Operation with the M.operation unitExecuting the command code “40” displays “00” in the data display, in which the tens digit (digit to be entered) is blinking.Press the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit, and then change the displayed code to “XX” using the UP key. After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the generation functions are enabled (in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the generation functions are enabled.When it turns on the power supply again the generation function is refused.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generation

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generation

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-56

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper SignalCOMMAND CODE : 41

This function sets the limit values of angular speed and angular acceleration speed of stepper-signal.Initial Value Follow-up Speed Angular Limit: 24 °/sFollow-up Acceleration Angular Limit: 140 °/s2

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “41 Stepper” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current settings for the maximum follow-up angular speed on line 1, and the maxi-mum follow-up angular acceleration on line 2.The figure on the right shows the standard settings.Press the ENT key . The tens digit of the angular speed blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the angular speed (00 to 99), press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The angular speed stops blinking and the thousands digit of the angular acceleration blinks. Enter the angular acceleration (0000 to 9999) in the same way and press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key once more. The angular acceleration stops blinking and the settings finally change to the values you set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe command code “41” is executed, the data display indi-cates “SL”, the gyro heading display indicates the maximum follow-up speed. If SHIFT key is pressed the display con-tents changes to the maximum follow-up acceleration and the data display indicates “AL”, the gyro heading display indicates the maximum follow-up acceleration.“SL” : Setting of follow-up Speed Limit (00 to 99)“AL” : Setting of follow-up Acceleration Limit (0000 to 9999)The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the maximum follow-up acceleration of 140 °/s2.If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the left digit of the data display blinks.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key.After entering the setting value, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

24 °/s

0140 °/s/s

Gyro=G1

Stepper

>123.4

126.0

123.4

/G2

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

24 °/s

0140 °/s/s

Gyro=G1

Stepper

>123.4

126.0

123.4

/G2

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

4-57

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 42

This function sets the protocol of the serial output ports which output the signal to external unit.The gyrocompass system has four serial output ports, and a different communication protocol can be set for each.The gyrocompass system has three serial output ports, (or four serial ports, if the C.operation unit is used) and a different communication protocol can be set for each.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “42 Out Port” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for selecting a port number (as shown in the figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The port number “1” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the port number (1 to 4). After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The port number stops blinking and the baud rate blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the baud rate (4800 bps or 38400 bps). After selecting the baud rate, press the ENT key. The port number blinks for confirmation.Press the ENT key once more. The port number stops blinking and the communication protocol settings finally change to the values you set.

NOTEThe baud rate of port 1 is fixed to 4800 bps.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 4800 bps

P=2 4800 bps

P=3 4800 bps

>123.4

126.0

123.4

P=4 4800 bps

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 4800 bps

P=2 4800 bps

P=3 4800 bps

>123.4

126.0

123.4

P=4 4800 bps

4-58

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.4 Setting Format of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 43

This function sets the communication format of the serial output signal.

The gyrocompass has three serial output ports. Three records can be set to each port. And different format can be set to each port for gyro heading and external heading.The format is set for gyro heading selected.

Port 1to

Port 4

Gyro heading(GYRO)

Record 1Record 2Record 3

External azimuth (EXT) (*1)

Record 1Record 2Record 3

*1: Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.

There are two types of format setting: ready-made formats and new formats.

� Ready-made formats:The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.

Data Ready-made FormatHeading (HDG) $**HDT, $**HDG, $**HDM, $**THS

Rate of turn (ROT) $**ROT

Heading / Rate of turn (HDG / ROT) $**HRC, $HEHRC, $HCHRC,$PYDKH

See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.

� New formats:If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit , it is possible to generate new format.

� Create a new HDG format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the

external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.

4-59

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

1 2x x x x x

CR LF

Txxx.xFiel Nu ber

C ara ter

ea er

Tal er ID Data ID ea ine ree

Fixe len t

T TrueM Ma neti NULL

C e u

C e uI enti ier

Ter inator

Exa ple o a ne DG or at nu ber o ata tartin po ition 2

� Create a new ROT format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)

CR LF

Data IDTa er ID

Hea er

Terminator

Data Fie Num er

Rate o turn

means o turns to port

Fi e en t

StatusA Data a i

Data in a i NULL

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

E amp e o a ne ROT ormat num er o ata startin position

C aracter

/ . e rees/minute

/ . e rees/secon

� Create a new HDG/ROT format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field for heading.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the

external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)

CR LF

T. A.

Hea ine rees

Fi e en t

Data IDTa er ID

Hea er

Terminator

Data Fie Num erC aractor

Rate o turn

means o turns to port

Fi e en t

StatusA Data a i

Data in a i NULL

T TrueM Ma netic NULL

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

E amp e o a ne HDG/ROT ormat num er o ata startin position HDG startin position ROT

/ . e rees/minute

/ . e rees/secon

4-60

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “43 Out Form” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display for setting the communication formats for serial output ports (as shown in the upper figure on the right).

� Selecting the output port, record number, and typesPress the ENT key, then the port “1” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port number (1 to 4)(*1), and press the ENT key. The port number stops blinking and the record “1” blinks.*1: Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.

Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the record number (1 to 3), and press the ENT key. The record number stops blinking and the output heading “GYRO” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the output heading (GYRO or EXT), and press the ENT key. The output heading stops blinking and the data type “HDG” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the data type (HDG, ROT, HDG/ROT, or NONE), and press the ENT key. When NONE is selected here, no data is output for the selected port, record number, or output heading. When other type is selected, then Already/New blinks on line 4.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, then go to “Selecting a ready-made format” When New is selected, then go to “Creating a new format”.

� Selecting a ready-made formatThe display shows the current settings (as shown in the figure on the right) and the current ready-made format blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to se-lect a format. The selectable ready-made for-mats depend on the data type. See the table on page 4-58.After selecting a ready-made format, press the ENT key. The format stops blinking and the cur-rent communication period blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps

After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. The output port, record number, and output format finally change to the selected settings.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

HDG

Already

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

HDG

Already

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

T 1000

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

T 1000

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-61

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Creating a new formatThe display shows the current settings (as shown in the figure on the right) and the second leftmost character of the header blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. and communication period blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps

After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. and the tens digit of the number of data items (Dat Num) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the number of data items, press the ENT key. The display shows the current settings for the selected data type.

· Example of creating an HDG format

The figure on the right shows an example of selecting HDG for the data type.The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The check sum stops blinking and the True/Mag-netic blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select True, Magnetic, or None, and press the ENT key. The new format (heading) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is fi-nally confirmed.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

EXXX

T 1000

D t N 00

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

EXXX

T 1000

D t N 00

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-62

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

· Example of creation an ROT format

The upper figure on the right shows an example of selecting ROT for the data type.The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The check sum stops blinking and the unit blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a unit (°/min or °/s), and press the ENT key. The designation for use of the A/V status blinks as shown in the lower figure on the right.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off, and press the ENT key. The new format (rate of turn) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is finally confirmed.

· Example of creation a HDG/ROT formatThe upper figure on the right is an example of selecting HDG/ROT for the data type. The display shows the current settings of starting positions of the heading (HDG Pos) and the rate of turn (ROT Pos), and the designation for use of the check sum. Set all the items as in the case of the HDG and ROT.After selecting the check sum, the display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right. Set all the items likewise. When all of the settings are completed, the new format (heading/rate of turn) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is finally confirmed.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

St P 02

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

St P 02

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

True

°/min

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

True

°/min

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

1 R 1 GYRO

HDG 01

ROT 03

C um O

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

1 R 1 GYRO

HDG 01

ROT 03

C um O

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-63

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.5 Setting Format of Input PortCOMMAND CODE : 45

This function sets the communication format of the input signals which are position, speed and heading/ROT sent from external unit.Heading and ROT input:The heading and ROT signal formats can be set to three ports. The ROT signal can not set to dif-ferent port from the heading signal.Position input:The position signal format can be set to one port.Speed input:The speed signal format can be set to one port. The speed signal can be selected from the serial signal or pulse signal.

There are two types of serial signal format settings: ready-made formats (see the table below) and new formats (according to the basic format below).

� Ready-made format:The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.

Data Ready-made FormatShip’s speed (SPD) VMVSD, VBW, VHW, VTG

Latitude (POS)(POS)POS)) GGA, GLL

Heading (HDG)(HDG)HDG)) HDT, HDG, HDM, HRC, THS

Rate of turn (ROT) ROT, HRC

See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.

� New formats:If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit, it is possible to generate new format.

� Create a new SPD format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for speed.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the unit of speed. (knot or km/h)

4-64

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

$1 2

,x x x x x * hh

CR LF

3 4, , ,x.x

Data iel Nu berC ara ter

ea er

Tal er ID Data ID Spee C e u

C e ui enti ier

Ter inator

Exa ple o a ne SPD or at tartin po ition 2 unit NOT

not

� Create a new POS format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for latitude.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)

CR LF

aa .cc

N/S

Data Fie Num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Latitu e

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

aa e rees

E amp e o a ne POS ormat start position

aa Fi e en t

� Create a new HDG format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select whether or not to receive the ROT. If «NONE» is selected, the ROT is calculated from

heading.

CR LF

E amp e o a ne HDG ormat start position

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Hea ine rees

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

4-65

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “45 In Form” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current settings for the communica-tion formats for serial output ports. The figure on the right is an example of setting the ship’s speed to port 3, the ship’s position (latitude) to port 2, and the heading to ports 1 and 2.Press the ENT key, then the ship’s speed input port (SPD) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, P, or “-”). Select P for the ship’s speed pulse input and “-” if there is no input for the ship’s speed. After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The ship’s speed input port stops blinking and the ship’s position input port (POS) blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, or “-”). Choose “-” if there is no input for the ship’s position. After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The ship’s position input port stops blinking and SPD blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the blinking item and select the data type (SPD, POS, or HDG).

When selecting SPD (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Cre-ating a ship’s speed format”.

When selecting POS (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Cre-ating a ship’s position format”.

When selecting HDG and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Setting serial input ports for heading”.

� Creating a ship’s speed formatThe figure on the right shows an example of selecting SPD for the data type.Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed. When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-meric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

POS P t 2

DG P1 P2

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

POS P t 2

DG P1 P2

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

V XXX

C um O

>123.4

126.0123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

V XXX

C um O

>123.4

126.0123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

A y

V V D

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

A y

V V D

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-66

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The display changes as shown in the upper figure on the right. and the unit blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a unit (Knot or Km/h), and press the ENT key. The new format of ship’s speed is finally con-firmed.

� Creating a ship’s position formatThe figure on the right shows an example of selecting POS for the data type.

Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed. When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the right.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-meric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, Press the ENT key . The new format of ship’s position is finally confirmed.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

k t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

k t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

A y

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

A y

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

HEXXX

C um O

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

HEXXX

C um O

>123.4

126.0 123.4

4-67

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Setting serial input ports for headingThe upper figure on the right shows an example of selecting HDG for the data type.The display shows whether the heading is input to the serial ports 1 to 3. Either SET (yes) or NONE (no) is displayed.When the port number for heading input blinking, select the port number using up and down key. After select, press ENTER key.When the state of selected port blinks, select the ‘SET’ or ‘NONE’ using up and down key. After select, press ENTER key.If ‘NONE’ is selected, the selecting screen of port number is displayed again.If ‘SET’ is selected, the screen displays a right example figure.

Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key.

When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The ROT input status blinks on line 4, Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.After selecting the ROT input status ,press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed.

NOTEWhen the selection of ROT signal is set to “NONE”, the ROT is calculated using received heading.

When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the next page.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 1

Port-1 SET

Port-2 SET

Port-3 NONE

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 1

Port-1 SET

Port-2 SET

Port-3 NONE

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

DMROT NONE

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

DMROT NONE

>123.4

126.0 123.4

4-68

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right.The ROT input status blinks on line 2. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.After selecting the ROT input status ,press the ENT key. The selected format is finally con-firmed.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

EXXX

St P 01

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

EXXX

St P 01

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 3

ROT O E

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 3

ROT O E

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-69

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.4.6 MiscellaneousCOMMAND CODE : 49

This function executes the ON/OFF setting of following functions.

� Mute functionIf this function is set to ON, the buzzer is made to mute while any alarm are generated. This func-tion is used when the gyrocompass is connected to the center alarm unit.

� Bow Swap FunctionIf this function is set to ON, the heading signals are reversed by 180 degrees while being input the inverse contact signal.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting ”49 Misc.” from the Generat.MENU and press the ENT key switches to the display for Miscellaneous function.Press ENT key again .The MUTE blinks. press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the MUTE function (MUTE) or the Bow swap Function (Bow swap).After selecting a function, press the ENT key.The current settings of the selection blinks. press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ON/OFF.Press ENT key.

If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Mute =OFF

Bow Swap=OFF

Misc.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Mute =OFF

Bow Swap=OFF

Misc.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-70

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···1/7

COMMAND

ENT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

Please input

generation

password.

00000 EN

Please input

generation

password.

*****

Generation

command is

available.

Password is

denied.

Try again.

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

24° /

s0140

° /s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

ENT

26° /

s0140° /

s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26°/s

0140°/s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26°/s

0152°/s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26° /

s0152° /

s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

ENT

P=1 4800bps

P=2

4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3

4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4

4800bps

P=1

4800bps

P=2

4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2

38400b

psP=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

24° /

s0140

° /s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

Men

u i

pla

ener

atio

ener

atio

n o

eSe

ttin

ollo

pee

tepp

ina

lSe

ttin

uni

atio

npr

oto

ol o

out

put p

ort Se

let p

ort N

Sele

t bau

rate

Fro

Nor

4-71

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···2/7

OMMA

Gt.

43 O

t 44

ENT

1GY

ENT

1GY

ROP

GYRO

1GY

ROP

GYRO

2GY

ROP

GYRO

3GY

ENT

1GY

ROP

EXT

1 R

1GY

RO DG A

1 R

1GY

RORO

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

1 R

1GY

RONO

NEN

ENT

1 R

1GY

RO DG A

1 R

1GY

RO DG N

ENT

GYRO

DTT

1000

GYRO

DGT

1000

GYRO

DMT

1000

GYRO

T10

GYRO

DTT

1000

ENT

GYRO

DTT

GYRO

DTT

200

GYRO

DTT

ENT

1 R

1GY

RORO

ENT

1 R

1GY

RORO

GYRO

ROT

T10

ENT

ENT 1

ENT

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

ENT

GYRO

1000

GYRO

T10

GYRO

PYD

T10

4EN

GYRO

1000

From

scr

een

Nor

ium

cas

sii

catio

enu

Setti

n o

rmat

o o

utpu

t por

4-72

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···3/7

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 20

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 200

msDat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 500 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 03

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

True

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

True

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

True

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONTrue

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONMagnetic

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONNone

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 20

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 200 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 500 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000

Dat Num= 03

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

°/min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min EN

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

° /min

5ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

° /s

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = OFF

ENT

ente

eto

ente

a R

eto

4-73

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···4/7

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

20 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

0 ms

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

500

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEX

XXT=

1000

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

OFF

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Magn

etic

°/m

inA/

V =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

None

° /mi

nA/

V =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /s

A/V

=ON

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =OF

COMM

AND

ente

/RO

Tan

a N

Fro

an M

4-74

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···5/7

OMMA

t.ME

NU43

ENT

SPD

S P

ENT

SPD

S P

SPD

1PO

S P

SPD

1PO

S P

SPD

2PO

S P

SPD

3PO

S P

SPD

PPO

S P

SPD

1PO

S P

t 1

SPD

1PO

S P

t 2

SPD

1PO

S P

t 3

ENT

SPD P

t 1

POS

2DG

SPD

1PO

S P

t 2

SPD

1PO

S P

t 2

ENT

SPDP

t 1

SPD

1NE

EXXX

ENT

POSP

t 2

AGL

POS

2NE

EXXX

ENT

SPDP

t 1

SPD

SPDP

t 1

ENT

POS

GLL

POSP

t 2

AGG

ENT

DG P

t 1

1 NO

NEP

NONE

3 NO

DG P

t 2

1 NO

NEP

NONE

3 NO

DG P

t 3

1 NO

NEP

NONE

3 NO

ENT

DG P

t 3

3SE

NONE

1 NO

NEDG

3NO

NEP

NONE

1 NO

NEENT

ENT

DG P

1 NO

NEP

NONE

3 NO

ENT

DGP

t 3

ADM ROT

NONE

DG P

t 3

NEEX

XX ROT

NONE

ENT

From

scr

een

Nor

ium

assi

ica

tion

men

Setti

n o

rmat

o in

put p

ort

4-75

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···6/78

POS

Port

= 2

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

ENT 6

HDG

Port

= 3

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= ON

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

Alre

ady

Alread

$ **H

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**T

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

y$*

*HRC

SPD

Port

= 1

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 00

Ck S

um =

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= ON

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= OF

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

knot

SPD

Port

= 1

Km/h

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

NONE

HDG

Port

= 3

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**H

DG$*

*ROT

=$*

*HDG

SET

NONE

SET

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

HDG

Port

= 3

Setti

n o

rat

o S

ata

in N

eSe

ttin

at o

S at

a in

Setti

n o

rat

a in

Setti

n o

rat

a in

rent

4-76

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···7/7

Gene

rat.

47 r

eser

ved

48 r

eser

ved

49 M

isc.

ENT

MUTE

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=ON

Misc

. ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Mute

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

. ENT

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Bow

Swap=O

Misc

iiu

laii

atio

nen

ella

neou

Fun

tion

4-77

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (M.operation unit)

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

SIF

COMM

AND

BZ ST

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

SIF

ENT

COM

MAN

GYRO

DING

GYRO

DING

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYRO

DING

GYRO

DING

SIF

TUP

SIF

TUP

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYRO

DING

GYRO

DING

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYRO

DING

GYRO

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYRO

DING

GYRO

DING

SIF

T▼

ENT

Per

iio

n or

erat

ion

Setti

n o

ollo

pee

tepp

ina

lFo

lloup

e li

itFo

lloup

ael

erat

ion

liit

Fro

Nor

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Pre

2 e

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tinS

L : 3

4˚/s

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tinA

L : 2

30˚/s

i pa

or i

inor

ret

ten

al p

oint

not

ipl

4-78

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.5 Heading Signal SelectionCMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.

4.5.1 Prohibition of Heading ChangeoverIf there is large deviation between gyro heading and external heading, the switching of heading signal under the condition which autopilot is auto navigation mode has the possibility of causing a rapid course change. CMZ900 can be limited of heading selection.CMZ900 can prohibit the switching of heading by using contact signal (*1). (*2)When changeover of the heading is prohibited, C.operation unit displays «C/O PRF» at the system status display area.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

O PR

123.4

It means pro i ition o ea in c an eo er

*1: The contact signal for prohibition of heading changeover*2: This function can be used if C.operation unit is equipped and connected autopilot can output signal.

� The commands that cannot be executed during prohibition of heading changeover• Heading selection key (GYRO1/GYRO2/EXT)

• Setting of speed signal (COMMAND 21)

• Setting of latitude signal (COMMAND 22)

• Automatic alignment of master compass (COMMAND 23)

• Manual alignment of master compass (COMMAND 24)

4-79

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover MethodIn this section, it is described about heading changeover between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.

�Block diagram to change over Gyrocompass

UNCTION UNITM N 1

G ro ea in ele tion eNo.2Ma ter o pa ontrol i nalNo.1Ma ter o pa ontrol i nal

No.1MASTER COMPASS

M M 2

No.2MASTER COMPASS

M M 2

No.1Ma ter o pa

ea in i nal

Repeater erialSerial/Stepper an Analo olta e i nal

No.2Ma ter o pa

ea in i nal

Repeater erialSerial/Stepper an Analo olta e i nal

No.1

No.2

NOR

GYRO SELECTS ITC

G ro ea in an e o ero an i nal Conta t i nal

No.1

No.2

NOR

Serial i nal

Stepper i nal

Repeatererial i nal

Analo olta ei nal DG ROT

Cour ere or er

ROTin i ator

Repeater

No.1 RADAR

No.2 RADAR

DOPPLER LOG

ECDIS

U AIS

IAS

SIGNALCON ERTER

M BOPTION

et .

ADAPTICONTROLER

ADAPTI / TRAC PILOTSo t are it

Main G roInputAuxiliarInput

S ip ea in i nalIEC 11 2 1

Sele teea in

Un ele te ea in i nalIEC 11 2 1

For DN NAUT A

C ANGE O ERBD ASSY

CONTROL BOX M C 2

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

C.operation unitM R

There are the following 3 methods as the compass selection of CMZ900D Gyrocompass.

(1) One touch selection with alignment of each compass by the “Gyro heading selector key” on C.operation unit.

(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).

(1) Compass selection by Gyro heading selector keyThe compass is selected by the C.operation unit. Press the “Gyro heading selector key” (GYRO1 or GYRO2) for 2 seconds to select the desired compass.

Changing to No.2 Gyrocompass : Press GYRO key for 2 second.

Changing to No.1 Gyrocompass : Press GYRO key for 2 second.

NOTEThis operation is not possible during prohibition of heading changeover or error-130 .

4-80

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.If the heading changeover can not be operated because of breakdown of C.operation unit, manu-al changeover function can be used.The compass is selected by the “Gyro select switch” in Control Box .

NOTEAt first, confirm that steering mode is manual steering mode.(Do not change the gyrocompass during automatic steering mode.)

No.1

No.2

NOR

Chan in too. Gyroco pass

Chan in to o. Gyroco pass

G ro ele t it

In i e o t e Control box

In i e o t e Autopilot tan

Set to NOR or nor al tate

NOTEWhen C.operation unit works normally, «Gyro select switch» position should be at «NOR». If «Gyro select switch» is at G1 or G2, error-130 will be generated.

When the compass is selected by the «Gyro select switch», if there is heading deviation between No.1 and No.2 , the heading gap will occur at the following devices. The devices with the possibil-ity that heading gap is generated are being connected with stepper signal. For example ECDIS, RADAR, and CONNING DISPLAY, etc.

(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).It is possible to use this function when meeting the following terms. “The vessel which is applied to DNV NAUT-AW” or “The vessel which is required to equip this function by owner’s requirement”.If any error is occurred at selected Master compass, the fail LED blinks and buzzer sounds on C.operation unit and Master compass. And then C.operation unit makes the selected mastercompass heading signal changeover to unselected Master compass heading signal, if error factor is included following lists.

4-81

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

� Error factors to enforce the automatic change over functionIf any following error(s) is (are) occurred at selected master compass, the heading signal is made changeover to unselected heading signal.

• Gyro-sphere failure (Error Code: 010)

• Inverter failure (Error Code: 020)

• Phase current fall (Error Code: 021)

• Communication failure (Error Code: 070/071/073/074)

• Follow-up failure (Error Code: 050)

• Power failure in MKC327 (System staus: COP1FLT/COP2FLT)

� Error factor to not enforce the automatic changeover functionIf the following error is occurred, the heading signal is not enforced changeover. Because of the following reason.

ERROR FACTOR REASONROM failure (Error Code: 030) If this error is occurred, communication failure is occurred

too. So automatic changeover will be enforced by commu-nication failure. RAM failure (Error Code: 031)

Backup battery voltage failure (Error Code: 040) If this error is occurred, there is no effect to gyrocompass heading accuracy. Operation switch failure (Error Code: 060)

Master compass alignment failure(Error Code: 080) This error is detected at only startup.

Selector switch failure (Error Code: 130) It is impossible to enforce automatic changeover, because gyrocompass is selected mechanically by user operation.

The deviation is greater than “the set value of deviation alarm +1 degree (minimum 6 degrees)”.

If the deviation is large, autopilot will steer the rudder rapidly by jumping of heading. (*1)

If any error which is factor to enforce automatic changeover function is occurred at unselected master compass.

There is error on unselected master compass. (*2)

External heading input is selected Gyrocompass heading is not selected. The rate of turn of non-selected gyro compass is greater than threshold. (Threshold : 200 deg/min.)

There is a possibility that an error is occurring at non-selected gyrocompass.

*1: If automatic changeover is not enforced because of this reason, all of heading signal output except unselected heading signal will be stopped. And following message is indicated with System status display of C. Operartion unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

123.4

126.0

O LT

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Menu an ata isp a

In this case, heading signal output will be resumed by selecting unselected Master compass by manually.

*2: If any error is occurred on both Master compass at same time, all of heading output will be stopped.

4-82

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.5.3 External Heading Changeover MethodThe method of external heading changeover is described in this section.

� Changeover to external headingPress the EXT key over 2 seconds or more on the operation unit to switch the signal from gyro compass to external device.

• C.operation unit : key

Press the G1/G2 key to return to the gyro heading.

� Selection of external heading deviceC.operation unit can input the heading from three different devices or less. One of them can be selected. Operate the COMMAND 20 to select the external heading device.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

See section 4.2.1 for detail of COMMAND 20.

NOTEThe function that select the external heading device can not be executed at M.operation unit.

4-83

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4.6 «MUTE» Function of Alarm Sound It is possible to disable alarm sound by setting of command code 49 function. (See the section 4.4.6 about command code 49 function.)This function can be used only when the alarm contacts of Gyrocompass are connected with Bridge Watch Alarm System (BWAS).

(1) The normal display of C. Operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

123.4

126.0

MUTE

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Menu an ata isp a

(2) Behaviour at system alarm occurrence� When one of following alarms has occurred at gyrocompass, the «Alarm LED and Buzzer stop

key» of C.operation unit is blinked, the alarm factor is displayed with «Menu and data display» or «System status display» and the alarm contact is output to BWAS.

• No.1 Power failure alarm

• No.2 Power failure alarm

• Gyrocompass system failure alarm

• Deviation alarm

� Gyrocompass failure alarm is occurred with BWAS by alarm contact from gyrocompass.

� If the alarm is acknowledge by BWAS, alarm sound is stopped.

NOTECheck the alarm factor with C.opeartion unit, because the blinking of «Alarm LED and Buzzer stop key» is continued until pressing this key.

Blank Page

5-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5. Troubleshooting

5.1 Advice for Specific Situations(1) If it is suspected that there is an error in a heading shown by a Repeater compass

or an Autopilot:� Check the settings for the ship’s speed and latitude for correcting speed-error using command

codes 21 and 22. If they are not correct, correct the values.

(See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 of this manual.)� Set the ship’s speed to zero and check that indications on the Master compass and Re-

peater compass are the same. If they are not, align the indications of the Repeater com-pass and Master compass.

(See section 5.3.2 of this manual.)� Check the accuracy of Master compass heading with using astronomilcal or physical target

observation. If the heading is not accurate, operate the automatic or manual alignment com-mand.

(See section 4.2.4 and 4.2.5 of this manual.)

(2) If an abnormal sounds can be heard from the Master compass:� Continue to operate the gyro system if there are no errors in indications of the Master and

Repeater compasses.

� When there are errors in indications of the Master and Repeater compasses, use the external azimuth selector switch to set the operation of the system so that the azimuth sensor is se-lected to “external azimuth.”

(See section 4.5 of this manual.) *: In either case, Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

(3) If you desire to know the gyrosphere running time:This can be displayed using the command code 13. However, a correct value cannot be obtained unless the running time was reset when the gyrosphere was replaced.

(See section 4.1.4 of this manual.)

(4) If you desire to know the phase current of the gyrosphere:This can be displayed using the command code 15.

(See section 4.1.6 of this manual.)

(5) If you desire to implement automatic re-startup using the timer:The timer can be set using the command code 29.

(See section 4.2.6 of this manual.)

(6) There is a possibility that abnormality has occurred on the selected device.(See section 4.5.1 of this manual.)

5-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.2 AlarmThe gyrocompass system generates an alarm in the following situations.

• The units break down.• A communication error is generated.• etc.

This section describes that confirm method and action method of the error content.

YES

Di pla e t e error ontent C.ope Pu COMMAND e to i pla nor al o e.

Soun in t e bu er Pu BZSTOP e to top t e bu er oun .

Blin in t e alar LED Alar a tor an elle

Li tin t e alar LED Re o er

Turnin o t e alar LED

Alar a tor

Appen e to t e urrent alar li t Operate t e COMMAND 2 /2 to on ir .

Re or e on t e error lo Operate t e COMMAND to re er t e error lo .

Alareneration

5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been GeneratedThe gyrocompass system generates an alarm when an error has been generated.The buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks at that time.C.operation unit displays cause of alarm at the general display area.The right figure shows an example that “GYRO SPHERE FAILURE” is generated.The buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off.If two or more alarms cause, push the right or left arrow key to display other error factors.Push the COMMAND key, to display “NORMAL MODE”.

The detail of error code is described in section 5.2.4.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

5-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.2.2 Confirmation of Error FactorOperate the command 26 or 27 to confirm the error factors.The error code is displayed by operating above command. If the cause of alarm is already cancelled, it is possible to delete from error list.The operation of command 26 is described in section 4.2.6. The operation of command 27 is described in section 4.2.7.The contents of error , presumption causes and action method are described in section 5.2.4.

5.2.3 Cancellation of AlarmThe buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off. The alarm LED keeps light on until cause of alarm will be cancelled.To cancel the alarm, refer to the section 5.2.4. The causes of alarm are classified as follows.

� Cancelled by system restorationWhen the alarm is generated by temporarily stopping the signal which communicates external device, the alarm will be cancelled by restoration of signal communication.

� Cancelled by checking the power supply, connected deviceWhen the alarm is generated by down of the power supply or abnormality of connected device, the alarm will be cancelled by turning on power supply or restarting the connected device.

� Cancelled by manual operation or changing the settingThere are some cases that to cancel the cause of alarm by manual operation or changing the set-ting. ex) ERROR CODE : 080 , 151

� Cancelled by exchanging to spare partsIf a fuse is cut, the alarm will be cancelled by exchanging to spare fuse.

� The service call is necessary When a serious breakdown occurs, the service call is necessary for repair. Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain.

5-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and CountermeasuresIf an alarm is generated , confirm the error code and countermeasure with referring the below table.The operation of command function is described in chapter 4.If it is not possible to countermeasure by using following method, ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

� Error code listThe number described in [ ] is an error code for the M.operation unit.

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

10’s : Gyroshere failure

010[10]

Gyrosphere failurePhase current of 350 mA or more continued for 20 min. or more. (40 min. for startup)

The phase current become large by abnormality of gyro sphere.

The gyro sphere replacement is nec-essary. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation] • If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. After changing the navigation mode, switch the gyrocompass to the normal one. (*5)

• If the external heading device is con-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

20’s : Inverter failure

020[20]

Inverter failurePhase current of 75 mA or less continued for 3 seconds. (no inverter output voltage)

• Power unit (inverter section) fail-ure

• Wiring failure

• Check the connectors of container assy. (*1)

• Check the cable connections of M.Main BD ASSY, M.PWM INV BD ASSY, M.PS BD ASSY and TRANS ASSY of mastercompass.

[Correspondence method under navigation]• If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. After changing the navigation mode, switch the gyrocompass to the normal one. (*5)

• If the external heading device is con-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

021[21]

Low phase currentPhase current of 75 mA or less continued for 3 seconds. (with inverter output voltage)

• No phase current flow due to gy-rosphere failure.

• Wiring failure

30’s : Memory Failure (The memory test is executed at start up)

030[30]

ROM failureROM check sum failure is generated.

Memory element failure Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)

031[31]

RAM failureRAM read/write failure is generated.

Memory element failure

*1: Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain. Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to maintain. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform maintenance or exchanging the parts , obey instructions and execute it.

*2: Take enough care to navigation in consideration of the characteristic of the external heading device.*3: Repair the system as soon as possible.*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to mastercompass.*5: If the gyrocompass has automatic heading changeover function (OPTION), the gyrocompass is switched automatically.

5-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

40’s : Backup battery voltage failure

040[40]

Backup battery voltage fail-ure.

Voltage of memory back-up battery falls to 2.5 V or less.

Memory backup battery dissipa-tion

Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation]If the power supply is supplied continu-ously, all set values are kept.However if the power supply is stopped, various settings are initialized. (*3)

50’s : Follow-up failure

050[50]

Follow-up failureDeviation of 0.5° or more is generated for 12 sec-onds or more.

• The follow-up gain is set with large value.

• Follow-up mechanism failure• Motor drive circuit failure• Wiring failure

• Execute command 23 or 24 to restart following-up

• Decrease the follow-up gain using command 25.

• Replace the main-assembly unit.• Replace the follow up mechanism.• Replace the container.(*1)• Check wiring and connections.

60’s : Operation panel switch failure

060[60]

Switch failureON continuously for 60 seconds or more

Switch failure of the operation unit.

• Replace the operation unit. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation]There is no effect for heading detect, displaying and signal output, but there is a possibility that various operations cannot be done.

70’s : Communication failure between C.operation unit and master compass

070[70]

Communication failure • Breakdown of C.operation unit• Breakdown of PWB of master

compass broke • The defectiveness of wiring be-

tween the C.operation unit and the master.

• Check the cable connections of each units.

• Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in master compass.

(M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)

071[71]

Invalid data • The defectiveness of wiring be-tween the C.operation unit and the master compass.

• The Malfunction by signal noise.

• Check the cable connections of each units.

• Check the connection of FG line.

073

No.2 master compass com-munication failure

• Breakdown of C.operation unit• Breakdown of PWB of master

compass broke • The defectiveness of wiring be-

tween the C.operation unit and the master.

• Check the cable connections of each units.

• Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in master compass.

(M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)

074

No.2 master compass invalid data

• The defectiveness of wiring be-tween the C.operation unit and the master compass.

• The Malfunction by signal noise.

• Check the cable connections of each units.

• Check the connection of FG line.

5-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

80’s : Automatic master compass alignment failure (Null point detection failure)

080[80]

Master compass alignment failure (Zero-point detection failure)

• Breakdown of photo sensor• Wiring failure of sensor connec-

tion

• Exchange the photo sensor assy.(*1)• Check the connection of sensor.

[Correspondence method under navigation]If it is necessary to align the master compass, operate the command 24 for manual alignment.

90’s : External heading input failure

090[90]

External heading inputTime out

More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of external heading signal

• Check the activation and setting of the connected device.

• Check the setting of the C.operation unit.

• Check the wiring connection.

091[91]

Protocol error of external signal (*4)

The overrun error , framing error, or parity error occurs in external signal.

• Check the wiring connection. (polar-ity of signal, etc.)

• Check the baud rate and hardware protocols.

092[92]

Check sum error of external heading signal

• The Malfunction by signal noise.• The disagreement of calculation

of check sum between gyro and connected device.

• Check the cable connections of each units. (Especially the connection of FG line.)

• Check the setting of connected de-vice.

093[93]

Data invalid of external heading signal

The system failure of connected device.

Repair the connected device.

094[94]

External ROT input time out

More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of external ROT signal

• Check the activation and setting of the connected device.

• Check the setting of the C.operation unit.

• Check the wiring connection.

096[96]

Check sum error of external ROT signal

• The Malfunction by signal noise.• The disagreement of calculation

of check sum between gyro and connected device.

• Check the cable connections of each units. (Especially the connection of FG line.)

• Check the setting of connected de-vice.

097[97]

Data invalid of external ROT signal

The system failure of connected device.

Repair the connected device.

100’s : Ship’s speed input failure (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

100

Speed signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of speed signal

• Check the activation and setting of the connected device.

• Check the setting of the C.operation unit.

• Check the wiring connection.

102

Check sum error of speed signal

• The Malfunction by signal noise.• The disagreement of calculation

of check sum between gyro and connected device.

• Check the cable connections of each units. (Especially the connection of FG line.)

• Check the setting of connected de-vice.

103 Data invalid of speed signal

The system failure of connected device.

Repair the connected device.

5-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

110’s : Ship’s position input failure (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

110

Latitude signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of latitude signal

• Check the activation and setting of the connected device.

• Check the setting of the C.operation unit.

• Check the wiring connection.

112

Check sum error of latitude signal

• The Malfunction by signal noise.• The disagreement of calculation

of check sum between gyro and connected device.

• Check the cable connections of each units. (Especially the connection of FG line.)

• Check the setting of connected de-vice.

113 Data invalid of latitude sig-nal

The system failure of connected device.

Repair the connected device.

120’s : Serial input port protocol error

120 Protocol error of serial sig-nal input port 1

The overrun error, framing error , or parity error occurs in serial input signal.

• Check the wiring connection. (polar-ity of signal, etc.)

• Check the baud rate and hardware protocols. (*1)121 Protocol error of serial sig-

nal input port 2

122 Protocol error of serial sig-nal input port 3

130’s : Selector switch failure

130Selector switch failure The selector switch of the change-

over unit is positioned out of “NOR”.

Select the selector switch position to “NOR”.

140’s : Alignment failure

140Alignment failure Heading outputs of No. 1 and No.

2 master compasses do not align.Check wiring and connection between the operation unit and master com-passes.

150’s : Deviation alarm (See section 4.2.9 about the setting of threshold of deviation alarm.)

150Deviation alarm (GYRO1-GYRO2)

The heading difference between gyro 1 heading and gyro 2 heading exceeded the alarm value.

• Check the propriety of threshold value.• Check the master compass and ex-

ternal heading device. If gyro com-pass outputs abnormal heading , ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. If ex-ternal heading outputs abnormal heading, ask the manufacture serv-ice department.

[Correspondence method under navigation]If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-tion mode, switch to the hand naviga-tion mode according to the situation.

151Deviation alarm (GYRO1-External)

The heading difference between gyro 1 heading and external azi-muth exceeded the alarm value.

152

Deviation alarm (GYRO2-External)

The heading difference between gyro 2 heading and external azi-muth exceeded the alarm value.

5-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures

5.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater Compass

The fail indicator LED blinks or lights when repeater compass detects failure.The blink cycle of the fail indicator LED indicates the error content of repeater compass.

111

121

1111221

1 2

FAIL

RUN SYNC DIMMER

ai n icator

unction o M Steerin epeater Co pass M

� Repeater compass error contents and countermeasure

Fail indicator LED condition Error contents Causes Countermeasure

Light off ○ Normal

Light on ● CPU RAM failure or ROM failure

Broken down CPU board in Junction Box

Exchange CPU board (*1)

Blink Light on one time per1.6 seconds.

Null point detection failure Broken down optical sen-sor inside of Repeater compass

Exchange optical sensor (It is possible to adjust null point by manually) (*1)

●○○●○○●○○ │1.6 sec│↔

The snapping of a wire for Optical sensor

Restore connection(It is possible to adjust null point by manually) (*1)

Light on two times per1.6 seconds.

Communication failurebetween Master compass and Repeater compass

• Not connected signal wire

• The snapping of signal wire

• Connected signal wire inversely

Restore connection

●●○●●○●●○ │1.6 sec│↔

●: Light on ○: Light off

5-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass IndicationThe Repeater compass indication is automatically aligned with the Master compass indication when the power is turned on. In general, no other alignment is required. However, it is advisable to check the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication before departing from a port to avoid possible accident. If the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication match, alignment of indication is not necessary.

NOTECheck the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the Repeater compass card reading.

� Procedure using the zero adjustment switchIf the Repeater compass indication shifts from the Master compass display, use the zero adjustment switch to align the indication.

Press this switch for 2 seconds or more. The Repeater compass card turns and the zero of the compass card is aligned with the pointer to correct the shift.

Then, the Repeater compass follows up the received value.If an error due to zero point photo-sensor failure is generated, use the procedure described below to align the indication.

� Procedure in the case where the zero point photo-sensor failsIt is possible to adjust null point by manually when null point detection failure is occurred. The procedure is as follows: (1) Push Zero adjustment switch more than 2 seconds. (The Repeater compass card will turn round and stop after 5 seconds.) At this time Fail indicator LED shows null point detection failure. (2) Push Zero adjustment switch. (The Repeater compass card will turn round rapidly)(3) Push Zero adjustment switch when the outer Repeater compass card (360 degrees/

revolution) value go below 10 degrees. (Rough adjustment) The compass card will turn round slowly.(4) Push Zero adjustment switch when the compass needle agree with the 0 scale of inner

Repeater compass card. After about 3 seconds the Fail indicator LED will be turned off and the Repeater compass

shows same heading as Master compass heading. (Fine adjustment)

If you failed manual null point adjustment, try again the above procedure.

Blank Page

6-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6. Specifications

6.1 Performance and Specifications6.1.1 Power Supply

Main power supply 100 /110/115/220 V AC 50/60 Hz Backup power supply 24 V DC +30 %, -10 % Power consumption (24 V DC)

At startup: Approx. 10 A + 0.35 A × number of repeater compassesSteady sate: Approx. 7 A + 0.35 A × number of repeater compasses

Power consumption (AC) At startup: Approx. 250 VA + 12 VA × number of repeater compassesSteady state: Approx. 200 VA + 12 VA VA + 12 VAVA + 12 VA × number of repeater compasses

6.1.2 Input SignalShip’s speed signal for speed-error correction

Number of circuits 1 circuit Signal form 200 pulses/n mile,

or serial IEC61162-1Latitude signal for speed-error correction

Number of circuits 1 circuit Signal form Serial IEC61162-1

Heading signal Number of circuits 3 circuitSignal form Serial IEC61162-1

Alarm buzzer stop signal: 1 circuit, contactBow swap contact input 1 circuit, contact C/O PRF singnal input 1 circuit, contact

6.1.3 Output SignalRepeater compass signal Number of circuits 8 circuits

Signal form Serial IEC61162-1 sentenceStepper heading signal Number of circuits 4 circuit, capacity 1 A

Signal form 24 V DC, 3-bit gray code, 1/6 degree/stepSerial heading/rate-of-turn signal

Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual generation possibleSignal form Serial IEC61162-1 / -2

Analog heading andquadrant signals

Number of circuits 1 circuit each Signal form 0 to 5 V DC

Analog rate-of-turn signal Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual range setting possibleSignal form 0 to 5 V DC; 30, 100, 120, and 300 deg/min

Serial ship’s speed input distribution Output

Number of circuits 1 circuit

Signal form serial IEC61162-1No.1/No.2 Volt-free signal:

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status «Open» or «closed» when no voltage is applied

No.1/No.2 Gyro failure signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status «Open» or «closed» when gyro fails

(No.1/No.2/EXT)Heading selection signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status Closed when each sensor is selected

6-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

No.1/No.2Gyro running signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each , ContactSignal status «Open» or «closed» when running

System fail signal Number of circuits 1 circuit, contactSignal status «Open» or «closed» when system fails

Deviation Alarm Number of circuits 1 circuit, contactSignal status «Open» or «closed» when abnormal

Buzzer stop Number of circuits 1 circuit, contact

6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy

Settling time Within 5 hours (The gyro can actually be used after about 2 hours from start.)North-pointing accuracy Within ± 0.25 °/cos φ (φ being the latitude at that location)Follow-up accuracy 0.1 ° or lessMaximum follow-up speed 30 deg/s

6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating Conditions)

Allowable roll and pitch 40 ° for both rolling and pitching

Allowable vibration 3 mm p-p or less for 8 to 8.3 Hz

0.35 mm p-p or less for 8.3 to 25 Hz

0.1 mm p-p or less for 25 to 50 Hz

Operating temperature range

— 15 °C to + 55 °C- 10 °C to + 50 °C (Master Compass)- 25 °C to + 55 °C (Bearing Repeater Compass)

6-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and Circuits

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal SpecificationsSerial signal input RD1A

RD1B

RD2ARD2B

RD3ARD3B

CurrentRe u atorDio e.

CRDR

RD A

RD B

• Number of connectable circuits: 3 • Data contents: Heading, ship’s speed and latitude• Receiving circuit: Photo-coupler• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.• Data format: See Appendix

Ship’s speed pulse input

LPPLPN/BSC

. KΩ

KΩ

. μFLPP

LPN

• Number of connectable circuits: 1• Pulse rate: 200 pulses/n mile• Signal format: Open collector (photo-coupler) or volt-free contact

Repeater compassheading output

24VOUTGNDSD1RASD1RB

24VOUTGNDSD2RASD2RB

•••

24VOUTGNDSD8RASD8RB

RS Dri er

SD RA

SD RB

GND

• Number of connectable circuits : 8 • Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : 4800 / 9600 bps• Character configuration : Start bit 1, Data bit 8, Stop bit 1, Parity None• Data format and Transmission period:

Format Transmission period RemarksPYDKH 1 sec only at 9600 bps**HRC 1 sec only at 9600 bpsHEHDT 50 ms

6-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications

Stepper heading output

REF1SS11SS21SS31COM

REF2SS12SS22SS32COM

REF3SS13SS23SS33COM

REF4SS14SS24SS34COM

REF

Recei erMastercompass

DC REF

Recei erMastercompass

A armCir.

Com.

irin Contro circuit irin Contro circuit

Signal format

REF SS

• Number of connectable circuits : 4 • COM : 0 V (circuit GND)• REF output voltage : 24 V DC, 35 V DC (Optional)• REF output current : 1 A max. • Output form : Open collector output (24 V DC 3-bit gray code)

Serial signal output SD1ASD1BSG

SD2ASD2BSG

SD3ASD3BSG

RS Dri er

SD A

SD B

• Number of connectable circuits : 1 (IEC61162-1), 2 (IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)• Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2

Unselected gyro heading signal output

SDEASDEBSG

RS Dri er

SDEA

SDEB

• Number of connectable circuits : 1(IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)• Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2

6-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications

Analog headingquadrant signaloutput

HDGCOM

QUDCOM

LF KΩ

. μF

KΩHDG or UD

COM

Signal format

Output Le e

Output.

Hea in si na

ua rant si na

• Number of connectable circuits: 1 each• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)• Output voltage: 0 to +5 V DC• Output resolution: 2.5 mV• Output impedance: 2 kΩ max.• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ min.• Output accuracy: ±1% FS (at 25°C)

Analog rate-of-turn output

ROT1COM

ROT2COM

ROT3COM

LF KΩ

. μF

KΩROT

COM

Signal FormatOutput Le e

/min /min /min

Rate o turn

• Number of connectable circuits: 3• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)• Output voltage: 0 to + 5 V DC• Output resolution: 2.5 mV• Output impedance: 2 kΩ max.• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ min• Output accuracy: ±1 % FS (at 25 °C)

6-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications

Serial Ship’s Speed Signal Distribution Output

RD1RARD1RBSG

RS Dri erRD RA

RD RB

• Number of connectable circuits: 1• Transmission system: RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A or RS485)• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.• Data format: IEC611162-1 See Appendix

C.operation Unit External Buzzer Stop Contact Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

BSPINBSNIN

Contact closed at buzzer stop.

. K

CPU

Bridge Select ion Contact Signal Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

BRGSELLPN / BSC

Contact closed at AFT.Contact open at FWD.

Prohibition Of Head-ing Changeover Con-tact Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

SELOFSELOFC

Contact closed at C/O PRF.

Gyro FailContact Output

(MKC327)

1FAIL1FAILC

2FAIL2FAILC

FAIL

FAILC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Power FailContact Output

(MKC327)

1PFO1PFOC

2PFO2PFOC

PFO

PFOC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close Open

Normal Close Open

Fail Open Close

RunningContact Output

(MKC327)

1RUN1RUNC

2RUN2RUNC

RUN

RUNC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenRunning Open CloseNot running Close Open

6-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications

System Fail Contact Output

(MKC327)

FAILFAILC FAIL

FAILC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Deviation AlarmContact Output

(MKC327)

DEVDEVC DE

DE C

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Buzzer StopAcknowledge

(MKC327)

BSTOPBSTOPC BSTOP

BSTOPC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Normal Close OpenFail (at buzzer stop) Open Close

Output Heading Contact Output

(MKC327)

G1G2EXTCOM

COMEXTGG

Contact is made when the sensor is selected.

6-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data SentenceInput/output Sentence Specifications DataInput VMVSD YDK original Ship’s speed

VBW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speedVHW IEC61162-1 Ship’s speedVTG IEC61162-1 Ship’s speedGGA IEC61162-1 LatitudeGLL IEC61162-1 LatitudeHDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingHRC YDK original Heading / Rate of turnTHS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

Output HDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingROT IEC61162-1 Rate of turnHRC YDK original Heading / Rate of turnPYDKH YDK original Heading / Rate of turnTHS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

6-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6.3 Setting Dip SwitchesRemove the upper cover of the master compass, and you will find the main assembly located in the deepest part with the dip switches positioned on its left. These dip switches determine the transmis-sion rate ,the communication data format, and DAC output settings.

DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW

Bit Bit

Master compass M.MAIN BD ASSY DIP switch

Each dip switch determines the following settings:

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to operat the setting of dip switches. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this chapter.

� Dip-switch settings and functions on Mastercompass

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW1 1 reserved Set to «OFF» for operate OFF

2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 OFF7 OFF

8 OFF

DIP SW2 1 OFF2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 OFF7 OFF8 OFF

DIP SW3 1 OFF2 Setting of analog ROT 1 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog

ROT 1 output range (page 6-10).OFF

3 OFF4 Setting of analog ROT 2 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog

ROT 2 output range (page 6-10).OFF

5 OFF6 Setting of analog ROT 3 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog

ROT 3 output range (page 6-10).OFF

7 OFF

6-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW3 8 Use C. operation unit Used Not Use ONDIP SW4 1 Serial output mode during system failure Keep latest value NULL OFF

2 Setting of baud rate for repeater compass 4800 bps 9600 bps OFF3 Reserved Set to «OFF» for operate OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 System Reserved Set to «OFF» for operate OFF7 OFF8 OFF

(Table 1) Setting of analog ROT 1 / ROT 2 / ROT 3 output rangeROT 1 ROT 2 ROT 3

Output RangeDIP SW 3 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ± 30 °/minOFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ± 100 °/min

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ± 300 °/min

ON ON ON ON ON ON ± 120 °/min

� Dip-switch settings and functions on MKR056 / MKN019

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW1 1 System Reserved Set to «OFF» for operate OFF

2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 Setting of input sentence for serial

port See (Table 2) Setting of input sen-tence for serial port (page 6-10).

OFF6 OFF7 Setting of baud rate for serial port 9600 bps 4800 bps OFF8 System Reserved Set to «OFF» for operate OFF

(Table 2) Setting of input sentence for serial portDIP SW 1

Data FormatBit 5 Bit 6OFF OFF $HEHDTON OFF $HCHDT

OFF ON $GPHDT

6-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6.4 List of Initial ValuesAfter Command 36 is executed, Initial values are set as follows:

� C.Operation Unit

Items ValueExternal heading selection Port-1 NONE

Port-2 NONEPort-3 NONE

Speed input AUTO / MANUAL MANUALSetting value 0 knot

Latitude input AUTO / MANUAL MANUAL

Setting value 0 °Threshold of deviation alarm G1 / G2 00.0°

G1 / EXT 00.0°G2 / EXT 00.0°

External input format Speed Port No. P (Pulse port)Already / New –Format –

Latitude Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –

External heading 1 Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –ROT input NONE

External heading 2 Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –ROT input NONE

External heading 3 Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –ROT input NONE

6-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� Master compass

Items ValueFollow-up gain Gain 100 %Master compass alignment REL / ABS –

Correction value 0 °Baud rate of output signal PORT-1 baud rate 4800 bps

PORT-2 baud rate 4800 bpsPORT-3 baud rate 4800 bpsPORT-4 baud rate 4800 bps

Output signal format PORT-1 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat= HEHRCPeriod= 200 ms

REC 2 –REC 3 –

EXT REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-2 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat = HEHRCPeriod = 200 ms

REC 2 –REC3 –

EXT REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-3 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDGFormat = HEHDTPeriod = 1 s

REC 2 Output = ROTFormat= HEROTPeriod = 1 s

REC 3 –EXT REC 1 –

REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-4 GYRO REC 1 –REC 2 –REC3 –

Stepper signal control Maximum angular velocity 24 °/sMaximum angular acceleration 140 °/s2

6-13

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

6.5 External Product View� Master Compass

.HOLE

HOLE

M M 2 1

MAINTENANCE AREA

BOW SIDE

CABLE ENTRYSECTION A A

Unit mm

6-14

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� Control Box

HOLE

M C 2

M C 2 F

C. OPERATION UNIT

EARTH TERMINAL CABLE INLET

INHALATIONEXHAUST

PANEL CUTC. OPERATION UNIT

CABLE INLET

EXHAUST INHALATION

EARTH TERMINAL

Unit mm

6-15

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� AC Adapter

HOLEM

INHALATION

EARTH TERMINAL

CABLE INLET X HOLE

EXHAUST

INHALATION

CABLE INLET X HOLE

EXHAUST

M 1

6-16

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� Repeater Compass / Junction Box / Stand & Bracket

HOLE

. HOLE

epeater Co pass M Connection ox

M N 1

ori ontal tan22

ori ontal rac et 2 1

BASE LINE

ilting rac et21

BOW

DRAIN

Unit mm

6-17

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� Steering Repeater Compass

.HOLE

HOLE

M .

HOLE

M .

HOLE

M .

HOLE

HOLE.

M .

E EE

M F2

M F1

PANEL CUTPANEL CUT

PANEL CUT MOUNTING DIMENSION

ie Z

Unit mm

6-18

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 6.Specifications >

� C.operation unit

.HOLEC

HOLE or M

M .

HOLE

HOLEC

HOLE or M

M .

PANEL CUT

Attac e ca e Ma . m

Unit mm

� Junction Unit

HOLE

M N 1

Ma m

7-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation

7.1 InspectionImplement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to maintain the gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:

7.1.1 Daily InspectionThe inspection items are as follows.

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”. (See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

Check that the heading of each Repeater com-pass agrees with that of the Master compass. Once/departure

3Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed

and latitude by executing the command codes “21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-nomical or physical target observation. Once/day

DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter (MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage. MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24 MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4

Once/year

7.1.2 Regular MaintenancePerform the following maintenance once a year.

NOTEOrder to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.

Inspection Item Procedure1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .

2 Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) , lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.

3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

7-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this chapter.

7.2.1 Precautions During Removal� The gyrosphere should not be removed from the Master compass until at least

1.5 hours has elapsed since the power has been turned.

� Make sure that the surrounding area of the Master compass is clean, there isample lighting and prepare all required equipment and tools before beginning work. To avoid damaging the nuts and bolts, be sure to use the correct tools such as drivers and wrenches for each part.

� Be sure to do the following to ensure proper reinstallation of the gyrosphere:• Provide mating marks to the required portions before disassembly.

• Temporarily reinsert the bolts into the correct holes.

• Place the disassembled parts in the correct order on a piece of clean paper or cloth.

• If wires are to be disconnected, keep a record of the color of each wire and attach labels to them to ensure correct reconnection.

� Do not remove any part that does not need to be disassembled.

� Never disassemble the gyrosphere.

CAUTIONPrecautions in handling the gyrosphere

• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.

• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.

Precautions in handling the container

• Hold the container firmly with both hands.

• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

7-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere

� Equipment and tools to be preparedBeaker, No.2 Phillips screwdriver, minus screwdriver, syringe , a bottle for waste liquid, gyrosphere stand and container stand.

G rosp ere stanContainer stan

S rin e

Bea er

� Removal of the container from the master compass and take-out of the gyrosphere

Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.

Remove the screw from the vent hole.

Remove the cap from the center pin.Remove the cap from the center pin.

Pull out the center pin.

Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.

Loosen the nut and rotate the hook to outer side.

Remove the upper container.

Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.

Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.

CAUTIONUse the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.

NOTENotes about disposal of the used supporting liquid.

• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste disposal trader.

• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

7-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

� Procedure for removing the gyrospereRemove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

Disen a e t e connectors termina s .

Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.Loosen t e t ree containe o ts. Rotate counterc oc ise i e i tin t e container an remo e.Be care u not to et t e container it t e oor.

Container olts

Remove the screw from the vent hole.Remo e t e scre rom t e ent o e.

ent hole

Remove the cap from the center pin.Turn t e cap o t e center pin to remo e it.

7-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Pull out the center pin.Pu out t e center pin.

Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.Remo e t e rain scre .

Drain a t e supportin i ui rom t e rain o e i e o in t e container as ori onta as possi e.

A ter rainin reinsert t e scre in t e rain o e.

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.Disen a e t e connectors t o termina s .

7-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Remove the hook that fasten the upper and lower containers together.Loosen t e on nut i e pressin minus ri er unti t e oo rotates to outsi e.Loosen a on nut in t e same a .

ong nut

Remove the upper container.Li t t e upper container an remo e.Ta e care in t e irection o a oo s.

Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.Remo e t e supportin i ui rom t e unne s ape portion it a s rin e remo e a i ui s .

CAUTION Do not upset the gyroshere.

7-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.W en ta in out t e rosp ere o t e si e in a ocation it no o ine on it.

P ace t e remo e ros pere on to a rosp ere stan .

7-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere� Equipment and tools to be prepared

Prepare a gyrosphere, center pin, syringe, beaker, funnel, liquid, No.2 Phillips screwdriver,minus screwdriver, Gyrosphere stand and Container stand .

Container stan

Center pinS rin e

Bea er

G rosp ere stan

� Installing the gyrosphere and attaching the container to the master compassInstallation of the gyrosphere in the container should be carried out on a flat surface and care should be taken not to knock the container over.

CAUTIONReplace the following parts at the maintenance.

• O ring of center pin

• O ring of drain screw

• O ring of container

• Seal washer of vent hole screw

Cleaning.

Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and. top of the center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.

Confirm that the drain screw in the lower container is tight and then put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.

Pour the supporting liquid into the container.

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.

Seal the vent hole.

Connect the connector.

Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.

7-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

CAUTIONUse the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.

� Procedure for installing the gyrosphere

Cleaning.Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and top of the center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.

CAUTIONWipe the electrode of gyrosphere and container with gauze which soaked benzine for cleaning. Take care as follows at cleaning.• Do not flake off the painting of gyrosphere.• Do not bend the electrode of container.• Do not put benzine on glue of gyrosphere.• Do not use the sponge with grinding.

Gyrosphere

ower container

Upper container

Be care u o not ama e to t e e ectro e en ou ipe o t e stain it c ot .

p ease ipe rom center o t e e ectro e to outsi e irection

Si e an e ectro eo t e rosp ere

Lo er e ectro e ot e container

Fo o up e ectro e o container

Ban e ectro e o container

Center in

Top

7-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

rain screwcon irm t at an O rin is attac e .

ower container

rain

Con irm t at t ere is an O rin t e o er container.

Ho t e rosp ere as s o n in t e p oto an it t e container ti te p ace it into t e container. Ho t e sp ere on t e opposite si e o t e o ine.

Do not ti t t e rosp ere e on t e re uire imit .

A ter p acin t e rosp ere in t e container position t e container an rosp ere ori onta .　　

Gyrosphere

ring

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.Con irm t at t ere is an O rin t e o er container t en a i n t e noc pin an it ot t e upper an o er containers to eac ot er.

ole

7-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Rotate t e oo to insi e an ti ten t e onnut ri er unti t e upper container c oses a erence to o er container.

Ti ten si on nut. con irm t at t e upper container c oses a erence to o er container.

Minus screw ri er

Rotate t e oo to insi e

Pour the liquid into the container.Prepare t e supportin i ui in t e ea er.

Insert t e unne into t e o e o t e center pin a ter put o t e ent o e scre .

pour i ui s o rom t e ea er into t e unne unti it e ins to o er o rom t e ent o e. Li ui is use m in tota

ent hole

7-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.Con irm t at t ere is an O rin on t e center pin an t en insert t e center pin.

ring

Put t e cap on.

Seal the vent hole.Sea t e ent o e it scre .

Wipe o an i ui t at o er o s rom t e ent o e it t e ra .

Connect the connector.Fasten t e connectors t o termina s t at connect t e upper an o er containers.

7-13

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.Insert t e container o ts into t e an in s it o master compass an rotate c oc i e t e container.

anging slit

Container olts

Mating ar s

A i n t e matin mar s en en a in t e container.T en ti ten t e container o ts.

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.Connect t e connector.

7-14

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.4 Replacement of Lamps in the Repeater Compass

P ace t e repeater compass on a stan it t e repeater car ace o n an ra a i nment mar s on t e o er

co er an t e o .

Remo e t e ei t mountin o ts rom t e o er co er.

Raise t e o er co er to separate it rom t e o .

o t e o er co er in t is position i e rep acin t e i uminatin amp or

amps.

A i n t e a i nment mar s an t en ti ten t e ei t o ts.

Avoid disassembling the repeater compass any further. When these procedures are to be carried out aboard a ship, close attention must be paid so that reassembling is carried out correctly. If these procedures cannot be carried out aboard, contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

7.2.5 Replacing the FuseThe Control box (MKC327) and AC adapter (MKS066/MKS071) use the fuses to protect the system. If the fuse is fused, replace it.Refer the appendix-4 to confirm the fuse position.

CAUTIONTurn off the power supply when replacing the fuse.

The capacity of fuse depends on system configuration. Select the fuse of appropriate capacity.

7-15

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.6 Confirmation of System OperationCMZ900 system have the command to confirm the system operation.

� Lamp testIt is possible to check the display and buzzer sound by operating the keys of the operation unit.See section 3.2.2

� Repeater signal outputIt is possible to output the repeater signals, serial signals and analog signals.See section 4.3.4

� Analog signal outputIt is possible to output the arbitrary analog voltage.See section 4.3.2

7.2.7 Preparation of Supporting LiquidApproximately 650 mL of supporting liquid are used in the Master compass unit, and further 1 L of supporting liquid are provided for spare. Contact Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for further supplies. Supporting liquid should always be supplied by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd., but in unavoidable circumstances, you may prepare supporting liquid as follows:Put the each material in distilled water at the specified rate. Stir the mixture until the benzoic acid dissolves. If the benzoic acid does not melt easily, heat the mixture at less than 90 degrees. At then use the protection tool so as not to inhale.

Distilled water 1.8 LGlycerin 145 mLBenzoic acid 3.2 g

NOTEIf the specific gravity of the prepared liquid deviates from the value shown below, add glycerin or distilled water to make fine adjustment.

Temperature Specific Gravity15 °C 1.0230 ± 0.00120 °C 1.0220 ± 0.00125 °C 1.0208 ± 0.00130 °C 1.0193 ± 0.001

7-16

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.3 Precautions During InstallationExercise care with the following items when installing a gyrocompass.

7.3.1 Vibration MeasuresThe floors on which the Master compass and the horizontal stands are installed, and the walls on which the remote unit, horizontal brackets, tilted brackets, course recorder, digital Repeater com-pass, etc. are installed, should be reinforced against vibrations from the hull.

7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s LinesInstall the Master compass, Repeater compasses for the horizontal stand and Repeater com-passes for the horizontal bracket so that their lubber’s lines are parallel with ship’s fore-and-aft line. Since the accuracy of the parallelism of these lines is the basis of heading measurement, adjust them to within an accuracy of ± 0.5 °.

7.3.3 Service AreaEnsure that the dimensions of the running, operating and maintenance area of the Master compass are as specified below.

mmor more

Front

A-1

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table

1.1 Speed ErrorThe speed error is an error generated when a ship in which a gyrocompass is installed sails a course other than east or west. Its value is determined depending on the ship’s speed, course, and latitude. (It is not related to the kind or type of gyrocompass.)

The north-seeking tendency of a gyrocompass is based on the earth’s rotation. When a ship sails, the resultant motion of the ship’s motion and the earth’s rotation acts on the north-seeking ten-dency of the gyro. If the course of the ship deviates towards the north or south, the direction of the resultant motion deviates north or south and thus an error occurs because the north-seeking force of the gyro acts perpendicular to this resultant motion. That is, the speed error is the angle of the difference between this resultant motion and the east-west direction.

1.2 Determining Speed Error

In the figure above, AC = V cos θ = K cos ϕ • sin δSince δ is a small value,

sinδ = δ (radian) = 1 / 57.3 δ (unit: degree)From these equations, δ = 57.3 V cos θ / 900 cos ϕIf we assume, for example, that the ship is at the equator (ϕ = 0), the gyrocompass course is N (θ = 0), and the ship’s speed is 30 knot, then

δ = 57.3 × 30 / 900 = 1.91 degrees = 1 ° 54 ’When the value of θ is between 270 ° to 90 °, the compass indication increases. Therefore, the ship’s true course is as shown below. 0 ° — 1 ° 54 ’ = 358 ° 6 ’As seen above, if the compass course deviates towards the north, the true course can be obtained by subtracting the speed error from the compass course, and if the course deviates towards the south, the true course is obtained by adding the speed error to the compass course.Next we will describe how to determine the speed error depending on ship’s speed, course and latitude, using the following two procedures. The true course can be determined by referring to the following table and chart.

Bθδ

δC θ

AΚcosψ

ψ: LatitudeK: Speed of the earth’s rotation at

the equator (About 900 knot)V: Ship’s speed (knot)θ: Gyrocompass courseδ: Speed error

Bθδ

δC θ

AΚcosψ

ψ: LatitudeK: Speed of the earth’s rotation at

the equator (About 900 knot)V: Ship’s speed (knot)θ: Gyrocompass courseδ: Speed error

A-2

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(1) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration table (Table-1)Refer to the speed error calibration table (Table-1) to determine the correction value and then cor-rect the course either by subtracting the correction value if the course has deviated towards the north or by adding the correction value if the course has deviated towards the south. For example, assume that the ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 30 ° and the speed at 16 knots. The correction value under these conditions is shown as 1.1 in the table. Since the ship is sailing north, the true course of the ship is 30 ° — 1.1 ° = 28.9 °. Similarly, assume that the ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 150° and the speed at 16 knots. In this case, the ship is sailing south, and so the true course is 150 ° + 1.1 ° = 151.1 °.

(2) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration chart (Chart-1)

� Locate the ship’s speed V on the horizontal axis.

� Draw a vertical straight line from the position of the ship’s speed and determine the intersection with the line of gyrocompass course angle θ where the angle θ is the deviation towards the north if the ship is sailing north and towards the south if the ship is sailing south.

� Next, draw a straight line that crosses that intersection and is parallel to the horizontal axis, and determine the intersection with the line of current latitude ϕ of the ship.

� The speed error can now be read from this second intersection. The speed error thus obtained must be read as a negative value if the ship is sailing north and positive if the ship is sailing south.

Example:Assume that the ship is sailing at a speed of 12 knots at the point of north latitude of 40 ° and the gyrocompass course reads 320 °.The course of 320 ° indicates that the course deviates by 40 ° from the north towards the west. Draw a vertical straight line from point (a), at 12 knots on the horizontal axis, and determine the intersection with the line of θ = 40 °, (b). Draw a horizontal straight line that crosses point (b) and determine another intersection with the line of ϕ = 40 °, (c). The speed error can now be read from this second intersection (c), which is 0.77. This gives the true course of the ship as 319.23 °.

A-3

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Table-1 Speed Error Calibration TableDetermine the true heading by correcting the compass course using this table.

Lati-tude

Course(degrees) Speed (knot)Northward Southward 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40

0°~

20°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.10.10.0

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

0.80.80.60.50.40.20.0

1.01.00.90.70.50.30.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.40.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

1.71.71.51.20.90.50.0

2.12.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.60.0

30°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.20.10.0

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

0.90.90.70.60.50.30.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.51.41.21.00.80.40.0

1.71.61.51.20.90.40.0

2.02.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.32.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.32.52.21.50.70.0

40°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.30.20.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.30.20.0

1.01.00.80.70.60.30.0

1.31.21.10.90.70.30.0

1.71.51.41.20.90.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.82.62.21.50.70.0

3.33.22.82.31.80.80.0

45°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.30.30.30.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.11.00.90.80.50.30.0

1.41.41.21.00.70.40.0

1.81.71.61.20.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.51.10.60.0

2.52.42.11.71.20.60.0

2.82.82.52.01.50.70.0

3.23.22.82.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.22.51.80.90.0

50°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.30.30.20.10.0

0.80.80.70.60.40.20.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.61.51.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.81.61.41.00.50.0

2.42.22.01.71.20.60.0

2.82.62.32.01.40.70.0

3.23.02.62.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.80.90.0

4.03.83.42.82.01.00.0

55°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.40.30.20.10.0

0.90.90.80.60.40.20.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.30.0

1.81.71.51.30.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.61.10.60.0

2.72.62.31.91.30.70.0

3.23.02.72.31.50.80.0

3.53.43.22.51.70.90.0

4.03.83.52.82.01.00.0

4.44.33.83.12.21.20.0

60°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

1.00.90.80.70.50.30.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.60.0

2.52.42.11.81.30.70.0

3.12.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.81.00.0

4.24.03.52.82.01.10.0

4.64.54.03.22.31.20.0

5.04.84.33.52.51.30.0

65°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

1.21.21.00.90.60.30.0

1.81.71.61.30.90.50.0

2.42.32.11.71.20.60.0

3.02.92.62.11.50.80.0

3.63.53.12.61.80.90.0

4.24.13.63.02.21.10.0

4.84.64.23.42.41.30.0

5.55.24.63.82.71.40.0

6.15.85.24.33.01.50.0

70°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.51.51.31.10.70.40.0

2.22.21.91.61.10.60.0

3.02.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.73.63.22.71.91.00.0

4.54.33.93.22.21.20.0

5.25.04.53.72.61.30.0

6.05.85.24.23.01.50.0

6.86.55.84.63.31.60.0

7.57.26.55.23.61.90.0

A-4

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Chart-1 Speed Error Calibration Chart

A-5

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass

2.1 GyroThe gyro is supported in a freely rotating manner around its longitudinal axis and transverse axis by supports and the center of gravity of the gyro and its supports is positioned at the intersection of both spinning axes, and the gyro is turned at a high speed (Figure 1). The direction of the gyro axes does not change even if the stand of the gyro is tilted or rotated. This is because the magnitude and direction of inertia of rotation (angular momentum) are maintained provided that neither friction nor external forces affect the rotating action. This is a characteristic of a gyro.

Fi ure Fi ure

Hanging a weight from tip (A) of the spinning axis of the gyro (Figure 2), slightly lowers side (A) and this affects the spin of the gyro. The weight causes the gyro to spin around the BB’ axis, which creates a torque around the transverse axis. This causes the gyro to spin in the direction of the arrow, which generates a torque around the BB’ axis that supports the gravitational force of the weight. This phenomenon is called precession and is another typical characteristic of a gyro. Pro-vided there is no friction at each axis, the gyro angular momentum (moment of inertia × rotating speed), applied torque, and resulting precession speed have the following relations:

(1) Quantitative: Angular momentum × precession speed = torque(2) Direction: Vectors are shown in Figure 3.

A-6

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

2.2 North-seeking Tendency of GyrocompassSuppose that a weight is hanging under the supports as shown in Figure 3 such that the center of gravity for the entire gyro system, supports and weight is positioned directly under the intersection of two axes. If friction on both longitudinal and transverse supports is negligible at this time, the end of the longitudinal axis A oscillates up and down and right and left in an elliptical orbit due to the gravitational force and spinning action of the earth.

The spin of the ellipse orientates around north. By attaching an adequate damping device, the amplitude of oscillation gradually decreases and the longitudinal axis stabilizes in the northern orientation. This is the gyrocompass. This north-seeking tendency is further detailed below.Figure 4 shows the earth’s spin. The components of the angular velocity of the spin, ω, at point p on latitude ϕ can be expressed as:ω sin ϕ (spinning motion around the vertical axis)ω cos ϕ (tilting motion along the horizontal meridian)

Precession spee

An u ar momentum

Tor ue

Fi ure

Wei t

ω cos φ

ω sin φ φ

Angular velocity of spin of earth

Equator

Figure 4

If the gyro shown in Figure 3 is placed on point p with A facing east and B facing west and with the A-B axis horizontal (Figure 5), the orientation of the gyro re-mains the same. However, since the inclination at this point on the earth remains the same as time elapses, the end-point A of the A-B axis rises and the end-point B goes down relative to the horizontal plane. Then, precession is carried out as the weight generates a torque to return the A-B axis to the horizontal position. When end-point A arrives at the meridian with the gyro tilted, the tilt is at its maximum and end-point A contin-ues to turn towards the west. When end-point A enters on the west side of the meridian, the inclination starts acting so as to lower A. The torque caused by the weight gradually decreases and precession stops when end-point A reaches the west end. Then, like-wise, end-point A goes down and begins pointing to-wards north. In such a manner, the orientation of the gyro spins around with north at its center in an elliptical motion as shown in Figure 6.

B ω cos φ

ω sin φ

West

North

SouthEast

East

Down

Figure 5

Figure 6

Horizon

B ω cos φ

ω sin φ

West

North

SouthEast

East

Down

Figure 5

Figure 6

Horizon

A-7

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

In a gyrocompass, this elliptical motion of the gyro is reduced and the orientation of the gyro stops at north. When the gyro axis is aligned with the meridian, end-point A stabilizes along the horizon-tal plane; however, when end-point A deviates either to the east or to the west, it lowers or rises away from the horizontal plane and starts moving towards north due to precession.

When the gyro axis is stable in a northern orientation, the precession force offsets the component, ω cos ϕ (spinning motion), of the earth’s spin.

The above describes the north-seeking principle. However, in reality, a gyro experiences rolling and pitching and other undesired influences. A single gyro cannot offset all these influences, and hence two gyros are linked together by a special mechanism to actively prevent rolling and pitching errors. This is performed by causing precession in each gyro as soon as the gyros are affected by an external force and thus canceling the external force just as with the aforementioned occurrence of a force offsetting the gravitational force of a weight. In this case, the resultant angular momentum of two gyros and the north-seeking tendency remain unchanged. Since the north-seeking force of a gyro is very small, the design of the gyro must be such that the frictions in the longitudinal and transverse axes are comparatively negligible, so as not to affect the north-seeking tendency.

2.3 Gyrocompass Errors2.3.1 Speed Error

Refer to Appendix-1, “Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table.”

2.3.2 Acceleration ErrorIf there is a change in ship’s speed or course, a torque occurs on the gyrosphere because the center of gravity of the gyrosphere falls below the center of buoyancy. This causes an error in the north-seeking reading of the gyrosphere. This error varies with the position of the center of gravity while the speed error also varies with the changes in the ship’s course and speed. These errors in the reading can offset each other by adjustment of the position of the center of gravity. The optimum design of the center of gravity of the gyrosphere in the CMZ900 prevents the acceleration error from occurring. (As a result, the oscillation cycle of a gyrosphere when the damper is removed is about 85 minutes.)

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching ErrorIf the gyrosphere is continuously subjected to vibration from the ship’s rolling and pitching and if the vibration cycles along the east-west axis and north-south axis of the gyrosphere greatly differ, this difference of vibration cycle between two axes causes an error. To compensate for this, two gyros are provided to reduce the differences between the vibration cycles along the north-south axis and east-west axis, thus preventing the rolling and pitching error. In addition, a damper mounted to the suspending mechanism damps vibration so as to gain stable reading.

A-8

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-3 Block Diagram

CONT

ROL

BOX

MKC

or D

C BA

CK U

P SY

STEM

or N

ONE

BAC

K UP

SYS

TEM

No.

Mas

ter C

ompa

ssNo

. M

aste

r Com

pass

AC IN

PUT

NO.

DC IN

PUT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y NO

. M

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y NO

. M

POW

ER S

UPPL

AC O

POW

ER S

UPPL

AC O

POW

ER S

UPPL

AC O

POW

ER S

UPPL

AC O

POUT

NOUT

POUT

NOUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

NO.

DC IN

PUT

BATT

.INPU

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y CO

M D

COUT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y CO

M D

COUT

SWSW

C.O

PERA

TIO

N UN

ITM

RDRA

RDRB

SDRA

SDRB

BSPI

NBS

NIN

RDA

RDB

RDA

RDB

SELO

FSE

LOFC

SGSDEA

SDEB

RUN

FAIL

PFO

DERUNC

SG EXT

G G COM

FAIL

PFO

PFI

PFIC

DEC

RDRA

RDRB

SDRA

SDRB

FAIL

RUN

FAIL

PFO

RUNC

SG PFO

PFI

PFIC

FAIL

LPP

LPN

/BSC

BRG

SEL

NO.

NOC

NORM

GND SG

RDBA

RDBB

TB TB

BSTO

PBS

TOPC

TB TB

No.

er a

i con

tact

out

put

No.

Run

nin

con

tact

out

put

No.

Ser

ia s

ina

I/O

No.

Fai

con

tact

out

put

Buer

sto

p Co

ntac

t inp

Seria

na in

put

LOG

Unse

ecte

insi

na o

utpu

Deia

tion

cont

act o

utpu

Stat

us C

onta

ct o

utpu

Sst

em F

ai C

ont.o

utpu

Puse

inpu

t S

ips

spee

MEM

BRAN

E SW

RA/R

C.M

AIN

BD A

SSY

C.DI

SP B

D AS

SYB

CABL

E AS

Seria

na in

put

Seria

na in

put

Gro

ect

oc s

tatu

s in

put

Buer

sto

p co

ntac

t si

na o

utpu

Bri

e se

ect s

tatu

s in

put

B BG

CNCN

SGSD

PIB

SDPO

SDPI

ASD

POB

No.

er a

i con

tact

inpu

No.

er a

i con

tact

out

put

No.

Run

nin

con

tact

out

put

No.

Ser

ia s

ina

I/O

No.

Fai

con

tact

out

put

No.

er a

i con

tact

inpu

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

Seria

out

put

Repe

ater

com

pass

Step

per s

ina

outpu

REF

SS SS SS COM

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

ND REF

SS SS SS COM

REF

SS SS SS COM

REF

SS SS SS COM

TB TBTB TB

Seria

out

put

peat

er co

mpa

Seria

out

put

peat

er co

mpa

Seria

out

put

peat

er co

mpa

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Step

per s

ina

outpu

Step

per s

ina

outpu

Step

per s

ina

outpu

Seria input

Anao inputHDG / UD

Anao inputROTAnao inputROTAnao inputROT

Seria output

Anao outputHDG / UD

Anao outputROTAnao outputROTAnao outputROT

Repeatercompass

Steppersina input

Seria input

Anao inputHDG / UD

Anao inputROTAnao inputROTAnao inputROT

Repeatercompass

Steppersina input

F F F F F

F F

GND

GND U

B BGND

CABL

E AS

SYXB

CHAN

OER

ASSY

RDARDBSG

HDG

RDARDB

SGRDARDBSG

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

RDARDBSG

HDG

RDARDBSG

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

REFSSSSSS

RDRARDRB

COM

REFSSSSSS

RDRARDRB

COM

BUFFER

BUFFERZEROGAIN

SDASDBSG

HDG

SDASDBSG

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

ACC

A A A

DCBa

c U

FUSE

Rat

None

Bac

A AF

Seria

Ana

o s

ina

Repe

ater

Seria

sina

Ste

pper

SEL

CCCC

Pot

o Re

aSE

LSA

SEL

CCCC

SEL

REF

F F

REF

CN CN CN

STA

CN CN CNDC

POW

ER S

UPPL

Yor

REPE

ATER

DC/D

CNT

out

DC/D

CNT

out

P.FA

ILDE

P.FA

ILDE

CNCN

DUAL

BDAS

SYR

F F

CN CN

DC/D

R.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY N

S.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY W

REF

CCCC

SEL

ASE

LSA

SELE

CTLA

TCH

CCCC

CCSE

SEL

CCCC

SEL

NORM

CCCC

G GNO

RSeec

t SW

DC/D

CCSE

SEL

SACC

CC /

CCCC

CC /

RLP.

FAIL

DET.

P.FA

ILDE

F F

CCCC

POW

ER F

AIL

STAT

USG

ENER

ATO

NORM

STA

PF PF

C.TERMINAL BD ASSYZ

3.1 MKC327 Block Diagram

A-9

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

A A

DCBu

c U

FUSE

Rat

None

Buc

Up A

RDA

RDB

SG HDG

RDA

RDB

SG RDA

RDB

SG UD

ROT

COM

REF

SS SS SS

RDRA

RDRB

SG COMTB TB TB TB

CHAN

OER

BDAS

SYT

DC/D

TP TP TP

DC/D

TP TP

TPG

PSPSPSPSTP

TPG

POUT

NOUT

POUT

NOUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

SWSW

SWF F F F F

GND

GND U

B BGND

ACC

OUT

GND

OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND

FF F F F F F F

R.TE

RMIN

AL B

D AS

SYN

DC/D

PSCC

TPTP

TP TPG

S.T

ERM

INAL

ASSY

CN CNCNRE

FCO

REF

COM

REF

COM

REF

COM

F F F F

TB TB

FCN

C.TE

RMIN

AL B

D AS

DCN

DC/D

MKR

TP TP TPGTP

TPG

GND

CCDS DS

GND

CC DSDS

CCTP

GND

SDASDB

HDG

SDASDB

SGSDASDB

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

TPTP

SERI

ANA

LOG

SIG

NAL

OUT

PUT

AC/D

CAC

INPU

T to

AC /

UP NG

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

AC A

DAPT

ER M

DC IN

PUT

AC IN

PUT

/ H

DC IN

PUT

UP NNF

GND

AC/D

P N

UP NU

BACK

ASSY

TB TB

F FF F F F F F F F F F

CONT

ROL

BOX

MKC

NFB NF

P NP N

ROT

INDI

CATO

MKR

ROT

INDI

CATO

MKR

ROT

INDI

CATO

R M

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

NO.

MAS

TER

MPA

SSM

NO.

MAS

TER

MPA

SSM

NFB NF

P NP N

SERI

AL D

ISTR

IBUT

MHB

P N

SWTP TP

DC/D

CCTP TP

TBP N P N P N P N P N P N

F F F F F F

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

REF

F F

P.Fa

iDe

tect

P.Fa

iDe

tect

SW SW

CC CC

TPTP

in in

CNT

TPTP

DC/D

CN CN CN

TPTP FL

TP P

in in

CNT

TPTP

DC/D

DUAL

BD A

SSY

P.Fa

iDe

tect

P.Fa

iDe

tect

CC CC

DSRE

REF

CC DS

GND

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

BU BUG

GND

RDA

RDB

SG HDG

RDA

RDB

SG RDA

RDB

SG UD

ROT

COM

REF

SS SS SS

RDRA

RDRB

SG COM

BUG

DUAL

ADAP

TER

AC/D

UNF

P N

TBF F F F

F F

P NNF

P N U U

N NC

GND

N NC

RLNO NO

CNO NO

CUO

UTO

BU GND

GND

BUG

AC/D

UNF

P N

TBF F F F

P NNF

P N U

N NC

GND

N NC

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

BU GND

GND

BUG

3.2 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-10

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Seria output Repeater compass

3.3 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (R.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� R.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VN) Test points and LED arrangement chartsTGP

TPDS

A-11

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Steppersi naoutput

3.4 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (S.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� S.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VW) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

TGP

A-12

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

CHAN

OER

ASSY

Sta

tus

Con

tro

Loic

NORM

GND

NO NO NOC

C.T

ERM

INAL

BDAS

SY Z

STSTP

Gro

ectL

oic

Seec

tInp

utLa

Poer

Res

CNSW

G GNOR

NORM

SEL

PC PC

SS COM

REF

SS SS

DS DS

SS COM

REF

SS SS

SEL

RLCC

RL RLCN

CNS.TE

RMIN

ALBD

ASSY W

No.

Mas

terC

ompa

ssSt

eppe

rsi

nain

put

No.

Mas

terC

ompa

ssSt

eppe

rsi

nain

put

CCCC

SEL

RST

GSE

MG MG

NORM

SEL

Sta

tus

Con

tro

Loic

Don

t C

are

SS SSDSDS

DUAL

PSBD

ASSY R

REF

SWSW

PCCC

SEL

GPr

iorit

C.OP

E SEL

SEL

CCRL

SEL

ACC

SEL

S SEL

SEL

AMG

DSDS

SEL

DSDS

CCCC

NORM

ALC/

OSW

RLRL

MG MG

Poer

Fai

Gen

erat

HOS

SSR

NORM

ST ST

DSSSR

SAT

CCCC

TPCC

Poer

Fai

Det

ect

CCTP

PFF

Poer

Fai

Det

ect

CCTP

PFF

Sta

tus

SW NOR

G G G G

G ai

none ai

G ai

none

NORM H L L H H

Poer

Supp

NORM

PFPF

STA SSSSSSRE

FREF

REF

PF PF

Gro

ect

Loic

H H L H H L

SEL

ASE

SEL

Not

eSE

LSA

HL L H

NOR

G G

SEL

CC CC

G a

oer

Sup

G P

oer

Sup

pno

G P

oer

Sup

pno

TP TP TPTP

TP TP

3.5 (1) MKC327 Circuit Diagram (CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY I/F)

A-13

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.5 (2) MKC327 Circuit Diagram (CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY I/F)

A-14

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.5 (3) MKC327 Circuit Diagram (CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY I/F)

A-15

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY LED, VR and Switch arrangement charts

DS DS DS DS SWDS DSDS

A-16

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY Test points arrangement charts

TPG

TP TP TP

TPTPTP

TPG

TPTP TP

A-17

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

C.O

PERA

TIO

NIT

MKR

MEM

BRAN

E SW

RA/

C.M

AIN

ASSY

C.D

ISP

BDAS

SYB

CAB

LEAS

A/W

T/W

U/W

BUZZ

C.T

ERM

INAL

BDAS

SYZ

UNC

TIO

NIT

MKN

Nor

tis

oar

isin

ein

MKC

orM

KC.

RED

BLAC

3.6 MKR040&MKN018 Block Diagram

A-18

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

C.O

TIO

N U

NIT

C.M

AIN

C.T

MIN

C.D

ISP

3.7 MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-19

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (1) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-20

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (2) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-21

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (3) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-22

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (4) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-23

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (5) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-24

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� C.DISP BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points arrangement charts

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) Test points arrangement charts

TPTP TP

TPTP

TP TP

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) LED arrangement charts

LEDLEDLEDLEDLED

LEDLEDLEDLEDLEDLED

A-25

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� C.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VZ) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

PP P P P

TP PPTPG P

TPG

A-26

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

CAS

M. P

S BD

ASS

CAS

NTA

INER

ASS

W/D

OPE

RAT

ION

IT A

SSY

MKR

SG SGP NR

BSD

SDR

SDB

SDA

SG SDB

SGSDB

SDA

SG REF

SS SS SS CO

MSG

PS PSG

G/M

FC N NC

DSD

SDR

BSG

SDR

ASD

SDR

ASD

BSPI

NBS

NIN

G UD

TBTB

P NP N

M.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY WL

M. P

INBD

ASS

SLIP

RIN

M. M

AIN

BD A

SSY

PHO

T SE

NSO

RAS

SY U

TRAN

S AS

SYTC

SW U

NIT

MKR

I/F A

SSY

SLI/F

ARD

ASSY SG

A/U

FAN

TOR

ASS

Ana

o H

T ou

tput

Ana

o R

outp

Ana

o R

outp

Ana

o R

outp

CAS

ESe

ria

ata

outp

CAS

Step

per s

ina

out

put

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

Seria

a ou

tput

INPU

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CNCN CN

CNCN

FAN

RED

BLK

CN CN

CNCN

STEP

OTO

R A

SSY

No.

MAS

TER

MPA

SS M

Seria

a ou

tput

CAS

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

CAS

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

MKR

I/F

Seria

a in

put

peC

ASE

3.9 MKM026 Block Diagram

A-27

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

TBRE

FCO

PS PSG

ISE

FILT

SWIT

CHUN

ITM

F F

P N

N NC

ENT

LIM

ITTE

RFI

LTER

in in

SG CNT

FILT

ERin in

SG CNTPS PS

in inGN

PSTP

TRM

CTL

TP TPC

in inTR

CTL

TP TP CO

in inTR

CTL

TP TP SS

in GND

OUT

DC/D

CIN

ERTE

. POSO

TRAN

SAS

SYTC

CNCN

TPAC

ACTP

TPI

TP TP

CN CN

RTP

PFAI

ACO

SLIP

LIN

M.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY

WK/

FAN

TOR

ASSY

M.P

SBD

ASSY

M.P

ASSY

TP TP

ACO

TP TP

FILT

ERM.

OPER

ATIO

NIT

MKR

M.M

AIN

BDAS

SYW

STEP

OTO

RIBE

TPCN

Sre

3.10 MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-28

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

U MPU

U U

CNU

CCCC

BUS

LIN

OTO

RDR

IER

CCU

OUT

PHO

TOSE

NSO

Wite

Yeo

OUT

acOU

Gree

nOU

ReOU

Bue

STEP

OTO

TP TP∼DG

.TP

ACON I

PFAIL

M.PS ASSYWH

M.M

AIN

M.P

3.11 (1) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-29

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (2) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-30

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (3) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-31

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (4) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-32

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� M.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points and LED arrangement charts

TP A

CTP

TPTP

LED

TP D

TP TP TP TP D

TP D

LED

TPLE

TP TP TPTP

LED

A-33

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.12 MKS066 Block Diagr

A-34

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.13 MKS071 Block Diagram

A-35

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

SDA

SDB

/DC

ccTP

STEP

OTO

TRO

STEP

OTO

ERR

orue

aus

tmen

TBO

UTB

TAO

UTA

Zero

AD.

Sitc

Dim

mer

Zero

LED

Gre

ErrL

EDR

CPU

FAIL

cccc

RPT

.CPU

ASS

YSN

UTA

DIM

ZER

OZE

BTBT

EKAC

RPT

.TB

ASSY

P.H

.ASS

YTB

STEP

PING

TOR

Yeo

Wite

Gre

enR

Bac

mou

ntt

peW

DFA

ILSI

3.14 MKR056 Block Diagram

A-36

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

SDA

SDB

UTA

DIM

ZER

OZE

BTBT

EKAC

RPT

.TB

ASSY

P.H

.ASS

YTB

STEP

OTO

Bac

Gre

enR

Gra

Purp

eYe

Wite

Ora

Yeo

Wite

Gre

enR

Bac

or P

u t

peP

RNK

OBN

OITCE

EPEA

TER

MPA

SSM

/DC

ccTP

STEP

OTO

TRO

STEP

OTO

ERR

orue

aus

tmen

TBO

UTB

TAO

UTA

Zero

AD.

Sitc

Dim

mer

Zero

LED

Gre

ErrL

EDR

CPU

FAIL

cccc

RPT

.CPU

ASS

YSN

DFA

ILSI

3.15 MKR050&MKN019 Block Diagram

A-37

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-4 Components List

4.1 Master Compass(1) MKM026-1,4

A-38

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 24 SCREW V8813CZ4 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB

5 BELT 5T117G008-01 26 O RING (for CENTER PIN)

V8005BE

6 STEPPING MORTER ASSY

V8114UR 27 CENTER PIN V8123DA

7 M.PWM INV BD ASSY V8123WE 28 O RING (for CONTAINER)

V8810QZ

8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 29 LONG NUT V8123CS9 SPACER V8114LR 30 HOOK ASSY V8123CL10 SPACER V8114LS 31 SEAL WASHER V8810NE11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 32 SCREW Y9303LU12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 33 TERMINAL (TB3) V8114VG13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 34 CABLE ASSY V8114UA14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 35 CABLE ASSY V8114UU15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL 36 CABLE ASSY V8123GX16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 37 SLIDE 1J124B038-0417 CONTAINER V8123DP 38 PLATE 1J355C497-0118 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ 39 BRACKET V8210NH19 GYRO SPHERE MKT007 40 BASE V8801KV20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH 41 SPACER V8114EZ21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE 42 BUSH 1J371D699-01

A-39

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(2) MKM026-2,3

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 17 CONTAINER V8123DP2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 18 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 19 GYRO SPHERE MKT0074 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH5 BELT 5T117G008-01 21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE6 STEPPING MORTER ASSY V8114UR 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF7 M.PWM BD ASSY V8123WE 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 24 SCREW V8813CZ9 SPACER V8114LR 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB10 SPACER V8114LS 26 R-STOPPER V8123HL11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 27 CUSHION V8123HN12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 28 F-STOPPER V8123HK13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 29 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 30 CABLE ASSY V8114UK15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL 31 CABLE ASSY

(for ANALOG output)V8114VD

16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 32 CABLE ASSY (for FAN) V8123GY

A-40

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.2 Control Box(1) MKC327-F,W

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 10 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XC 11 TERMINAL V8817CB5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 12 CABLE ASSY V8116VA6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 13 MKR040 SEE APPENDIX 4.87 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 14 CLEAR COVER V8123LV

A-41

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(2) MKC327-S

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 13 SCREW V8813CZ2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 14 R-STOPPER V8123HL3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 15 CUSHION V8123HN4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XN 16 F-STOPPER V8123HK5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 17 DISTRIBUTION BD

ASSY (MHB306)V8152AC

6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 18 TRANSFORMER (PS101) 1G164A044-017 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 19 DIODE MODULE(PS101) A1207HL8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR 20 AL CAPACITOR(PS101) A1299CA9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ 21 TERMINAL (PS101) 1G171Z152-0510 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT 22 FUSE (2A)(PS101) A1031EF11 FILTER KIT V8817BF 23 CONNECTION TOOL

(MHB306)V8810QH

12 FAN ASSY V8123GZ

A-42

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050)

NO PARTS NAME PART NO.1 LAMP V8811AQ2 MOTOR 5T165A165-013 WINDOW V8114HP4 PACKING 1G334C027-015 PACKING 1G116A008-016 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX7 GASKET 1G333C041-018 CABLE ASSY V8114UW9 CABLE ASSY V8114UV10 PACKING 1G33E192-01

A-43

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.4 Junction Box (MKN019)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 PACKING V8114JP2 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN3 TERMINAL BOARD ASSY V8114SQ4 VARIABLE RESISTOR 5T162B015-025 O-RING 5T101Z005-046 KNOB 5T124A096-017 CAP 5T114A030-018 TOGGLE SWITCH V8817DE9 W.P. CAP V8817DF10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-0111 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T166F082-0212 SOCKET M8096JC

A-44

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)

DIMMERRUN SYNC

FAIL

A B

A A B B

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FRONT PANEL V8118BA(□192)V8118BC(□144) 13 COLLAR V8118BS

2 SCALE (36X) V8219FV 14 BUTTON 5T124A104-023 SCALE (1X) V8118DE 15 O RING 5T101Z005-094 GEAR V8114HV 16 RESISTOR (VR) 5T162A167-01

5 GEAR V8114HL 17 KNOB 5T124A043-02

6 GEAR 1G422A549-01 18 COLLAR 5T108F032-077 GEAR V8114HN 19 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX8 GEAR V8114RR 20 RPT TB ASSY V8114SQ9 MOTOR 5T165A165-01 21 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN

10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-03 22 LAMP V8811AQ

11 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T162F082-04 23 SOCKET A1178VF

12 SWITCH 5T154A272-01

A-45

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.6 AC Adapter (MKS066)

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF 13 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF

2 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF 14 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF3 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 15 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 16 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF5 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF 17 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF6 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF 18 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF7 SWITCH 5T154A123-01 19 SWITCH 5T154A123-018 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD 20 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD9 TERMINAL BOARD V8116TA 21 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-0110 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-01 22 NOISE FILTER A1118EN11 NOISE FILTER A1118EN 23 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01

12 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-46

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 SWITCH 5T154A123-012 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF3 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF5 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF6 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF7 POWER SUPPLY V8817CC8 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD9 TERMINAL BLOCK V8817EE10 NOISE FILTER (for AC) 5T614E039-0511 NOISE FILTER (for DC) V8817BL12 NOISE FILTER (for AC) V8817BH

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-47

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.8 Junction Unit (MKN018)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ

4.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040)

RED

BLACK

GYRO GYRO

GYROGYRO

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

A-48

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format

5.1 Basic Format The basic serial signal format is as follows.All transmitted and received data shall be interpreted as ASCII characters.

CR LF

CR LFSUM SUM∗n

n No C ec sum

Use C ec sum

Data ie Data ie

Data ie n

(1) “$”: Start of sentence.(2) Address field: This field serves to define the sentence. The first two characters are the talker identifier. The other three characters are the data identifier.

(3) Data field: This field is described with regular format data.

Each data is delimited by «,».

(4) Check-sum field : Check-sum value.

(5) <CR><LF> Terminator: End of sentence.

A-49

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

5.2 Existing FormatCMZ900 system has several regular data format to communicate with external units.

Regular Data Format

Data Type Input OutputSpeed (SPD) VMVSD VBW VHW VTG –Latitude (POS) GGA GLL –Heading (HDG) HDT HDG HDM HRC THS HDT HDG HDM THSRate of turn (ROT) ROT HRC ROTHeading / Rate of turn (HDG/ROT) HRC HRC PYDKH

� VMVSD

CR LFM S D /

−/ . not . Nautica Mi e

O set rom C aracter

Hea er

Ta er IDData ID

Y Spee Cruisin istance

C ec sum i enti ierC ec sum

Terminator

� VBW

B W

. . CR LF

. . A . . A

A A

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

C ec sumC ec sum i enti ier

Terminator

Lon itu inaater spee

Trans erseater spee

Lon itu inaroun spee

Trans erseroun spee

StatusWater speeA ata a i

ata in a i

StatusGroun speeA ata a i

ata in a i

Stern trans erseater spee not

StatusStern ater spee A ata a i

ata in a i

StatusStern roun spee A ata a i

ata in a i

Stern trans erseroun spee not

� VHW

H W , . .

CR LF

. T . M N KData ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

C ec sum i enti ier

C ec sum

Terminator

True ea in Ma netic ea in Water spee not Water spee m/ our

A-50

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� VTG

T G . .

CR LF

. T . M N K

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDTrue course ma e oo o er roun

Ma netic course ma eoo o er roun

Groun spee not Groun spee m/ our

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ierStatusA Autonomous mo eE Estimate ea rec onin mo eM Manua Input Mo eS Simu ate Mo eN Data Not a i

� GGA

mmss.ss . .G G A a a

. . M . M .

CR LF

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID UTC o position Latitu e N/S Lon itu e E/W

Num er o sate ites in use

Hori ontai ution o

precision

Antenna a titu e

Units o antenna a titu e m

Geoi a ei t

Units o eoi a ei t m

A e o Di erentiaGPS ata

Di erentia re erence station ID

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

GPS ua it In icator Fi not a ai a e GPS i Di erentia GPS i PPS i Rea Time Kinematic F oat RTK Estimate ea rec onin mo e Manua input mo e Simu ation mo e

� GLL

mmss.ss

. .G L L a a

A a CR LF

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Latitu eN/S

Lon itu eE/W

UTC o position Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

FAA Mo e In icator A Autonomous mo e D Di erentia mo e E Estimate ea rec onin mo e M Manua input mo e S Simu ate mo e N Data not a i

StatusA Data a i FAA Mo e A D

Data in a i FAA Mo e E M S N

A-51

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� HDT

H D T T CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDTrue ea inT True

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� HDG

H D G a

CR LF

. . a.

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

Ma netic sensorea in

Ma netice iation e reesirection E / W

Ma neticariation e reesirection E / W

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

Data ie num erC aracter

� HDM

H D M M CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDMa neticHea in

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� THS

T H S A CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Hea in

StatusA Autonomous mo eE Estimate ea rec onin mo eM Manua input mo eS Simu ate mo e

Data not a i

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

A-52

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� ROT

R O T A CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Rate o turn e rees/minute means o turns to port

Status A ata a i ata in a i

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� HRC

H H CR LFC R C /

O set rom C aracter

Hea er

Ta er IDData ID

Hea in

Rate o turn

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

. e rees

/ . e rees/secon

� PYDKH

P D CR LFY K H . .Data ie Num er

C aracter

Ta er ID

Hea er

Data ID

Hea in e rees Rate o turn / .

e rees/minute

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

E terna GPS Compass

　 G ro No.G ro No.E terna G roE terna Ma

Instrument i enti ier

5.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass� HEHDT (for Repeater compass)

The heading signal for repeater compass has two digits after the decimal point.

H H CR LFE D T . / T

TerminatorC ec sumC ec sum I enti ier

Hea in

Data ID

Ta er ID

Hea er

C aracterO set rom

. e rees

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

Revision Information� Title : CMZ 900D Gyrocompass User’s Manual� Manual No. : IM80B10M-17E

Dec, 2007 1st EditionApr, 2009 2nd EditionSep, 2009 3rd Edition

� InquiriesFor inquiries about the content of this manual, please visit the following URL. Also visit the Yokogawa Denshikiki website at the following address for information on this product.URL for inquiries: Yokogawa Denshikiki website: http://www.yokogawa.com/YDK/contact.htm

� Written by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd. � Published by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd. 5-23-13 Sendagaya, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-0051, JAPAN

Blank Page

Источник

Yokogawa CMZ900 с РРРновинкаСертификат РРР

Описание
Характеристики

Конфигурация системы CMZ900 позволяет адаптировать ее под требования любого пользователя, независимо от тоннажа судна. Доступны 3 типа конфигурации серии CMZ900:

CMZ900B: одноблочный, предназначен для небольших судов
CMZ900S: одноблочный, предназначен для любых типов судов торгового флота
CMZ900D: 2х-блочный, обеспечивает повышенную надежность
Данные о скорости поворота судна (ROT) выводятся в высокоскоростном формате IEC 61162-2
Уникальная противовибрационная система, использующая свойство вязкого масла демпфировать внешние факторы, значительно уменьшает влияние вибрации и внешних сотрясений
Небольшой и легкий контейнер улучшает скорость отработки следящей системы
Гирокомпас работает очень мягко и без запаздывания, это очень удобно для небольших высокоскоростных судов
Компактный дизайн: основной прибор и блок управления (для моделей CMZ900S и CMZ900D) могут быть смонтированы внутри стойки авторулевого
Время перезапуска может быть установлено от 1 до 99 часов
Ручная коррекция скоростной девиации
Автоматическая коррекция скоростной девиации, при поступлении данных скорости судна от лага и позиции от GPS или другого устройства (для моделей CMZ900S и CMZ900D). В случае отсутствия позиции от GPS ее значение рассчитывается из показаний курса и скорости
Внешний сигнал курса от других приборов (магнитного компаса, GPS-компаса и т.д.) может передаваться на репитеры или другое оборудование как дублирующий (для моделей CMZ900S и CMZ900D)
Встроенный монитор определяет разницу между показаниями основного прибора и внешних датчиков курса (для моделей CMZ900S и CMZ900D)
Механический переключатель, как и программно управляемый переключатель позволит выбрать, какой основной прибор гирокомпаса будет использоваться (для модели CMZ900D)
Простое обслуживание
В гиросфере использованы титановые капсула и электроды, в результате чистоты внутри контейнера межсервисный интервал весьма продолжительный
В случае необходимости гиросфера может заменена силами экипажа

Производитель	Yokogawa Denshikiki Co Ltd.
Время приведения в меридиан	2 часа
Максимальная скорость отработки следящей системы	30°/с
Погрешность, вызванная быстрым изменением курса	Не более 0,1°
Питание	100 / 110 / 115 / 220 В переменного тока 50/60 Гц; 24 В постоянного тока
Точность	Статическая: ±0,25°/с (Latitude); динамическая: ±0,7°/с (Latitude)
Диапазон рабочих температур	-10° ~ 55°C
Допустимый угол	±40° (крен и тангаж)

Инструкция Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Инструкция — Инструкция Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Инструкция — Инструкция гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Инструкция — Инструкция Yokogawa CMZ900 Инструкция — Инструкция YOKOGAWA CMZ900 Инструкция — Омск Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Омск — Омск Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Омск — Омск гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Омск — Омск Yokogawa CMZ900 Омск — Омск YOKOGAWA CMZ900 Омск — Купить Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Купить — Купить Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Купить — Купить гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Купить — Купить Yokogawa CMZ900 Купить — Купить YOKOGAWA CMZ900 Купить — Буклет Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Буклет — Буклет Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Буклет — Буклет гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Буклет — Буклет Yokogawa CMZ900 Буклет — Буклет YOKOGAWA CMZ900 Буклет — Цена Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Цена — Цена Гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Цена — Цена гирокомпас Yokogawa CMZ900 Цена — Цена Yokogawa CMZ900 Цена — Цена YOKOGAWA CMZ900 Цена в Москве, Санкт-Петербурге, Новосибирске, Екатеринбурге, Нижнем Новгороде, Казани, Челябинске, Омске, Самаре, Ростове-на-Дону, Уфе, Красноярске, Перми, Воронеже, Волгограде, Алма-Ате, Астане, Шымкенте, Караганде, Актобе, Таразе, Павлодаре, Усть-Каменогорске, Семее, Костанае, Атырау, Кызылорде, Уральске, Петропавловске, Актау, Темиртау, Туркестане, Кокшетау, Талдыкоргане, Экибастузе, Рудном или любом другом городе России и Казахстана

Контакты

Аккредитованный партнёр серебрянного уровня Motorola

Авторизованный дилер Vertex Standard на территории Сибирского федерального округа.

Авторизованный сервисный центр и региональный дилер компании Samyung ENC Co., Ltd.

Официальный дилер

Авторизированный дилер

Официальный дилер оборудования радиосвязи стандарта TETRA на территории РФ и стран СНГ

Официальный дилер

Источник

GYROCOMPASSCMZ 900 series

Bulletin 80B10M09E3rd Edition
A gyrocompass detects the true north by means of a fast-spinning
rotor, which is suspended with nofriction and is influenced by
gravity and rotation of the Earth. A gyrocompass consequently
indicates aship’s heading.CMZ900 series has been type approved in
accordance with International Maritime Organization (IMO)standards,
resolution A.424(XI).

-Accuracy:Static:0.25 x sec Lat.Dynamic:0.75 x sec Lat.

-Settling time:Within 5 hours-Follow up accuracy:0.1 or
less-Max. follow up speed:30/sec-Permissible roll and pitch
angle:40-Permissible ambient temperature:

Operation:-10C to +55C

FEATURES

PERFORMANCESPECIFICATIONS

Easy maintenance

CMZ900 GYROCOMPASSis highly reliable and long life.

CONTROL BOX(MKC326/327) MASTER COMPASS

(MKM026)

-A modular design saves the space. MASTER COMPASS can be
integrated inthe autopilot steering stand.-Manual and automatic
speed error correction-External heading sensor can back up the
heading outputs.-Serial data output IEC61162-2 (high-speed
transmission)-A unique anti-vibration mechanism enhanced by the
velocity dampingeffect of high viscous oil, provides superior
damping of vibration and decouplingof shock at sea.-A small and
lightweight container enhances the follow up speed. Thegyrocompass
reading changes smoothly and does not lag when a small shiprapidly
changes course.-Easy maintenance and long maintenance periods

Titanium capsule and electrodes are employed for
GYROSPHERE.Purity is maintained inside of the container, and
maintenance interval isthen longer-dated.The container is divided
into two pieces at bottom when overhauled.Ship’s crew can replace
GYROSPHERE in case of emergency.

Titanium capsuleand electrodes(lower hemisphere)

GYROSPHERE(MKT007)

Anti-vibration mechanism (top)and Container (bottom)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONSThree types of system configuration are
provided on CMZ900 series as perspecification requirements of
functionality, the amount of signal outputs
andredundancy.CMZ900B:Single-unit model, suitable for small
vesselsCMZ900S:Single-unit model, suitable for all types of
merchant vesselsCMZ900D:Dual-unit model for extra reliability

Basic configuration of each type of CMZ900 series is illustrated
below.Viewing enhancement of the system capability, optional
instruments areavailable in order to increase the signal outputs of
the gyrocompass. Othernavigation equipment such as repeater
compasses, course recorder areavailable as a part of the
system.MASTER COMPASS (MKM026) runs on 24 VDC power supply. It
iseasily adopted to the power supply requirements, and all signal
outputs canthen be maintained during AC power interruption if 24
VDC is provided.Serial data output IEC61162-1 or -2 (high-speed
transmission) isselective, and contains the ship’s heading and rate
of turn (ROT) information.

GYROSPHERE(MKT007)

is incorporated in MASTER COMPASS.

MASTER COMPASS(MKM026)

MASTER COMPASS(MKM026)

MASTER COMPASS(MKM026)

MASTER COMPASS(MKM026)

Serial data(IEC61162-1/2 )

Analog outputs(Rate of turn,Course recorder )

CONTROL BOX(MKC326)

CONTROL BOX(MKC327)

Repeater compassesSteppersSerial data(IEC61162-1/2 )

Analog outputs(Rate of turn,Course recorder )Running statusand
Alarms

DUAL AC ADAPTER(MKS066)

Identical inputswith CMZ900S

Repeater compassesSteppers

Running statusand Alarms

Buzzer stopExternalheading data(IEC61162-1 )

Repeater compassesSteppersSerial data(IEC61162-1/2 )

Analog outputs(Rate of turn,Course recorder )Alarms

AC ADAPTER(MKR027)

Buzzer stopExternalheading data(IEC61162-1 )Ship’s speedand
Latitude datafor the automaticspeed error correction(IEC61162-1
)

C. OPERATION UNIT(MKR040)

is optionally used when the automatic speederror correction is
required on CMZ900B.

CMZ900B type CMZ900S type CMZ900D type

Power supply100/110/115/220 VAC50/60 Hz single-phase24 VDC for
back-up

Power supply100/110/115/220 VAC50/60 Hz single-phase24 VDC for
back-up

Power supply100/110/115/220 VAC50/60 Hz single-phase24 VDC for
back-up
MASTER COMPASS(MKM 026) MASS: 43 kg

CONTROL BOX(MKC 326) MASS: 17 kg

CONTROL BOX(MKC 327) MASS: 16 kg

AC ADAPTER(MKR 027) MASS: 10.5 kg

DUAL AC ADAPTER(MKS 066) MASS: 20 kg

420 420

502 12

6

331

260

0.5

420

520

470

136

624

00.

5

520

426

470

1

420

520

470

1

2600.5

200

4-13HOLE

2-14HOLE 2-14HOLE297175

50 1436

636

6

CABLE INLET(60140) CABLE INLET(80200)

CABLE INLET(30110)

CABLE INLET(50100)

50 14

2271

4-12HOLE300

130

50 14 1066

2750.52-14HOLE301

2002251

2972002271

40

A A

CABLE INLET

HOLE

A A

OUTLINE DIMENSIONS

Subject to alteration due to technical developments without
notice

Represented by :

URL : http://www.yokogawa.com/ydk/

2008.02 (KP)

Marine Equipment Business DivisionAddress : Minami Shinjuku
Hoshino Bldg. 5-23-13 Sendagaya, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo, 151-0051
JAPAN

International Sales Dept. Phone : (81) 3-3225-5383 FAX : (81)
3-3225-5325Service Dept. Phone : (81) 3-3225-5392 FAX : (81)
3-3225-5325Domestic Sales Dept. Phone : (81) 3-3225-5382 FAX : (81)
3-3225-5325

Osaka Branch Phone : (81) 6-6368-7102 FAX : (81)
6-6368-7108Imabari Branch Phone : (81) 898-22-4559 FAX : (81)
898-33-2005Fukuoka Branch Phone : (81) 92-272-0954 FAX : (81)
92-272-0955

Caution : Please read the manual before using this product.

Dimensions in mm Flush mounting type of CONTROL BOX and DUAL AC
ADAPTER are available.

Источник

CMZ900 — гирокомпас от японского производителя Yokogawa Denshikiki Co Ltd., сертифицированный Российским Речным Регистром (CMZ900B) и Российским морским регистром судоходства (CMZ900 B, S, D). Данная система предназначена для определения курса судна относительно географического (истинного) севера.

Конфигурация гирокомпаса CMZ900 может быть легко адаптирована под спецификацию любого судна. Версия CMZ900B предназначена для использования на маломерных судах; CMZ900S — на всех типах торговых судов; конфигурация CMZ900D представляет собой высоконадежную двойную (двухблочную) систему.

Причины купить CMZ-900:

Сертификаты регистров: РМРС и РРР
Компактное исполнение, экономящее место на судне
Конфигурации для судов разных типов
Уникальная антивибрационная система, значительно сокращающая воздействие вибрации и внешних сотрясений
Возможность монтажа внутри стойки авторулевого (конфигурации S и D)
Возможность установить время перезапуска от 1 ч до 99 ч
Простота использования и обслуживания
Ручная коррекция скоростной девиации
Широкий выбор дополнительного оборудования для адаптации системы под требования каждого конкретного Заказчика

Чтобы купить гирокомпас CMZ900 или уточнить стоимость оборудования, обращайтесь к менеджерам нашего магазина по телефонам, указанным на сайте.

Цена, характеристики, внешний вид и комплектация товара могут быть изменены без предварительного уведомления.

Источник

CMZ 900B/900SGyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM 80B10M-16E

IM 80B10M-16E3rd Edition

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

CONTENTSForeword ……………………………………………………………………………………………………v1. Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………. 1-1

1.1 Features of CMZ900 ………………………………………………………………………………1-11.2 Gyrocompass System …………………………………………………………………………..1-31.3 Device Composition Type ……………………………………………………………………..1-41.4 Connection with External Devices …………………………………………………………1-5

1.4.1 Input Signal …………………………………………………………………………….1-5

1.4.2 Output Signal ………………………………………………………………………….1-5

1.5 Outline of Operation ……………………………………………………………………………..1-61.5.1 Startup and Stoppage ………………………………………………………………1-6

1.5.2 Operation Unit …………………………………………………………………………1-6

1.5.3 Normal Display ………………………………………………………………………..1-7

1.5.4 Output Heading Selection …………………………………………………………1-8

1.5.5 Command Function …………………………………………………………………1-8

1.6 Outline of Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………….1-101.6.1 The Display when Alarm is Generated ……………………………………..1-10

1.6.2 Buzzer Stop…………………………………………………………………………..1-10

�� …………………………………………………1-10

1.7 Maintenance and Inspection ………………………………………………………………. 1-111.7.1 Daily Inspection …………………………………………………………………….. 1-11

1.7.2 Regular Maintenance …………………………………………………………….. 1-11

�� ………………………………………………………………………………1-12

2. Hardware ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2-12.1 Component Models ………………………………………………………………………………2-12.2 Component Names and Functions ………………………………………………………..2-4

2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026] …………………………………………………….2-4

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC326] (S-Type) ………………………………………………2-5

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKR027/MKS070] (B-Type Option) ………………………. 2-5

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050] ………………………………………………….2-6

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019] ……………………………………………………………2-7

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056] …………………………………….. 2-7

2.2.7 Annunciator [MKR028] (B-Type Option) ……………………………………. 2-8

2.2.8 C.operation Unit [MKR040] (B-Type Option ) ……………………………… 2-8

3. Operation ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3-1

CMZ900B/900SGyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

3.1 Startup and Stoppage ……………………………………………………………………………3-1�� ……………………………………. 3-1

3.1.2 Startup Sequence ……………………………………………………………………3-2

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start ……………………………………………………………3-3

3.2 Operation Unit ………………………………………………………………………………………3-53.2.1 �� !�� »��#�� …………………. 3-6

��$�$� �� %�� »��#�� ………. 3-8

3.3 Display of Normal State ……………………………………………………………………….3-103.4 Command Mode ………………………………………………………………………………….3-12

��&�� #�� ………………………………..3-12

3.4.2 Command Code List ………………………………………………………………3-13

3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode ……………………………………………3-15

��&�&�� ’ �� …………………………………….3-18

4. Function Explanation and Operation Method ……………………………………. 4-14.1 Display Functions …………………………………………………………………………………4-1

4.1.1 Displaying Heading ………………………………………………………………….4-2

4.1.2 Displaying Heading Deviation ……………………………………………………4-3

&�� *�� +��; �� …………………………………………………………….4-4

4.1.4 Displaying Running Time ………………………………………………………….4-5

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and Adjust ………………………….. 4-6

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase Current ……………………………………….4-7

&��<� *�� +��= �>��= ��+�’�� …………………………………………….4-8

&��?� *�� +��*�@� ��’�� ……………………………………………………4-9

&��Q� *�� +��V ��’��W�� ……………………………………….4-10

4.2 Setting Functions ………………………………………………………………………………..4-134.2.1 External Heading Input Selection …………………………………………….4-14

&�$�$� �� …………………………………4-15

&�$�� X �� ………………………………4-16

&�$�&� �� % �� …………………………………4-17

&�$�Y� % � ��% �� ……………………………………..4-19

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up Gain …………………………….4-21

4.2.7 *�� +��Z;�� % �� ……………..4-22

&�$�?� *�� +��Z;�� !�� ……………….4-23

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm Setting…………………………………………………………..4-24

4.2.10 Startup Timer Setting ……………………………………………………………..4-25

4.3 Maintenance Functions ……………………………………………………………………….4-32&�� % �� #�� ………………………………………4-33

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC Signals …………………………………………..4-34

&�� % � ��*��@��% ��*�� ……………………………………………4-36

&��&� % � ��*��@��;�� ………………………………………..4-37

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running Time ……………………………………….4-38

4.3.6 Resetting Log ………………………………………………………………………..4-39

iii

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

4.3.7 Initializing Backup Memory ……………………………………………………..4-40

&��?� ��% �� »�� ………………….4-41

4.3.9 Displaying Log ………………………………………………………………………4-44

4.4 Generation Function ……………………………………………………………………………4-53&�&�� \�� #�� …………………………………………4-54

&�&�$� ��#��V^�� …………………..4-55

&�&�� _�� …………………………4-56

&�&�&� ��#�� _�� ………………………………………………….4-57

&�&�Y� ��#�� »�� …………………………………………………….4-62

4.4.6 Miscellaneous Function ………………………………………………………….4-68

4.5 Heading Signal Selection …………………………………………………………………….4-77&�Y�� W��̀ � �� @�� ………………………………………….4-77

4.5.2 Heading Changeover Method …………………………………………………4-78

5. Troubleshooting …………………………………………………………………………… 5-1�� ……………………………………………………………….5-15.2 Alarm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………5-2

Y�$�� *�� +�V�� W��\�� ……………………………….. 5-2

Y�$�$� �� # �� ……………………………………………………..5-3

Y�$�� ……………………………………………………………….5-3

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures ……………………………… 5-4

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures ……………………. 5-8Y�� *�� +�V�� W��\�� ;��

5-8

Y��$� ��;�� »�� ………………….. 5-9

�� ………………………………………………………………………………. 6-1�� ……………………………………………………………6-1

6.1.1 Power Supply ………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.2 Input Signal …………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.3 Output Signal ………………………………………………………………………….6-1

6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy ……………………………………………………….6-2

��Y� �@�� b�� f ……….. 6-2

�� {�� »��Z_�� ……………… 6-3

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data Sentence ………………………………………………………..6-86.3 Setting Dip Switches …………………………………………………………………………….6-96.4 List of Initial Values ……………………………………………………………………………..6-126.5 External Product View …………………………………………………………………………6-14

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation ……………………………………………………7-17.1 Inspection …………………………………………………………………………………………….7-1

7.1.1 Daily Inspection ……………………………………………………………………….7-1

7.1.2 Regular Maintenance ……………………………………………………………….7-1

7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere …………………………………………………………….7-27.2.1 Precautions During Removal …………………………………………………….7-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere ………………………………………………………..7-3

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere ………………………………………………………….7-8

<�$�&� ;�� X ��;�� …………………….7-14

7.2.5 Replacing the Fuse ………………………………………………………………..7-14

<�$�� +��_�� …………………………………………..7-15

<�$�<� �� X�|�� ……………………………………………..7-15

7.3 Precautions During Installation …………………………………………………………..7-16<�� ‘�W� ��%� �� ………………………………………………………………..7-16

<��$� � � ��X�WW��}��X�� …………………………………………………..7-16

7.3.3 Service Area ………………………………………………………………………….7-16

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table ………………..A-11.1 Speed Error …………………………………………………………………………………………. A-11.2 Determining Speed Error …………………………………………………………………….. A-1

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass ……………………………………………………A-52.1 Gyro ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. A-52.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass …………………………………………… A-62.3 Gyrocompass Errors …………………………………………………………………………… A-7

2.3.1 Speed Error …………………………………………………………………………….A-7

2.3.2 Acceleration Error ……………………………………………………………………A-7

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error …………………………………………………………A-7

Appendix-3 Block Diagram ……………………………………………………………………..A-8Appendix-4 Components List ………………………………………………………………..A-33

4.1 Master Compass ……………………………………………………………………………….. A-33(1) MKM026-1,4 …………………………………………………………………………A-33

(2) MKM026-2,3 ………………………………………………………………………..A-35

4.2 Control Box ……………………………………………………………………………………….. A-36(1) MKC326-F,W ………………………………………………………………………..A-36

(2) MKC326-S ……………………………………………………………………………A-37

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050) ……………………………………………………………. A-384.4 Junction Box (MKN019) …………………………………………………………………….. A-394.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056) ………………………………………………. A-404.6 AC Adapter (MKR027) ……………………………………………………………………….. A-414.7 AC Adapter (MKS070) ……………………………………………………………………….. A-424.8 Annunciator (MKR028) ……………………………………………………………………… A-434.9 Junction Unit (MKN018) ……………………………………………………………………. A-434.10 C.Operation Unit (MKR040) ……………………………………………………………….. A-44

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format …………………………………………………………..A-455.1 Basic Format ……………………………………………………………………………………. A-455.2 Existing Format …………………………………………………………………………………. A-465.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass ………………………………………………. A-49

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

ForewordThank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass.

� About this manual�� W�� W+��

�� ;� �� +� �� @�� W��

�� +�� @�� !��}��% � ��W��>�� +��

�� {�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� V��

�� +�� +�� V��>�� V �*��>�>��X��+��W��

�� W�� V��

�� @��+�� W�� +��`�V�@��+�� @�� +�|�� +�� +�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

� Trademarks�� W� �� >�� V �*��>�>��X��}��

�� >�� >��>�� V �*��>�>��X��

�� #�� %� ��+�W�� +��@�� -mark names or registered trademark names.

�� +� �� >�� -� �>��@��

� Safety precautions

� Notes about environmental condition for using ��%�Q��\+�� >��@�� |��-�� W�� <�� W�� W�� @ �� V��

� Notes about installation�� V�� @ �� V��

�� «�� V��W�� +�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��Co., Ltd..

� Notes about preparation before using;� �� +� �� @�� W��

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Notes about using other than usage�� +�� @��*��

� Notes about maintenance and inspection�� ;�� >��+��

�� *�� @��V��@��

�� +�� @�� V��V�� -al is needed.

� Notes about abnormal circumstances�� W�� W��

��V��+�� V�� Y��»��W�� +�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

�� *��>��+�� >�V�V��+�� W��

�� +�� @�� +��

�� W��W��@�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��W�+�� V��>�

� Notes about disposal of the products・ �� V�� W+�� +�

・ ��W ��+��=�� W��W ��+�V�� *��W ��+� �� V ��V��

� Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid�� |�� |�� V ��

disposal trader.

�� _�� +�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

� Precautions related to the protection, safety, and alteration of the product�� V�� +��+�W��

«Handle with care.» To avoid injury and damage to the instrument, �� {��

�;��>��>�

Protective ground terminal

�`�� @��+�� W+�� V��+�W��

vii

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

�� #�� +��W+��W��V�� +�� V��@��+�� >�� +�� @�� +�� +�W�� »�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� |� ��+�� +��

�� Z�� +�� @�� |��-�� +�� Z�� +��^�� ^� �� product and the control system, the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment.

�� «��+�� W�� >�� W+��>�� V �*��>�>��X��

�� *��+��V��@��>�� V �*��>�>��Co., Ltd. .

� Exemption from responsibility�� >�� V �*��>�>��Co., Ltd. makes no warranties regarding the product except those

�� ;;�� @�� +�

�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� W��+�� +�� +�� +�� W+�� +�� W��

� How to use this manual��V�� >��

Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument. ��+�W�� }�� +�W�� -�� }�� +��»�� +�W��V��V��;�»�\��!�»_��

WARNING� �� +�� -� �� W�� >��@��

CAUTIONCalls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the ��}�� W�� >��@��

NOTE� ��

viii

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Important cautions

WARNING Risk of Electric Shock

��V��W�� +�� +�V��

CAUTION

*�� {��}��V�� +�� +��+��Precautions in handling the gyrosphere

�� `��+��+�V��W�� W�� +��>��

�� *��+��*��+�� +�� mechanism or lead to personal injury.

�� *�� W��+��

Precautions in handling the container

�� `�� +�V��W��

�� *��*��+�� +�� lead to personal injury.

Polishing of the slip ring is prohibited

�� +�� W+�V��V��+��

� About the replacement parts for repair・ �� +� ��

・ �� +��

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Foreword >

� Handling precautions

� Startup of gyrocompassb�f�� +�� Y��W��}��

b$f�� % �� _��V��|�� +�W��

� Handling in cold districts��% �� +�� V��|�� +��-� ��W�� V�� W�� ^��W�� V�W��V�

b�f�»�� V�� V�� +��

� �� % �� W� >��>��@��

b$f�»�� b �V��>��f�

Drain the liquid completely.

� External heading out put�{�� V��% �� @�� V��% �� b%�%�$�f�� {��

NOTE��{�� »��{�� -��+�� {�� W��

� Heading changeover �� +�� V��+�� {�� V�� >�+�� »��V��W��V��

· Master compass is standing by to start.· The other sensor which is scheduled to switch is abnormal.· Exchanging the signal is prohibited.

CAUTION�� {��V�� W��V��+�� {�� +� ��

NOTE��{�� +��;�*�;��*»�� W��+��

Blank Page

1-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.1 Features of CMZ900� High north-seeking accuracy

`��^��>�� +�� @��W�� V�� +�� +�� V��|��V��@��-W �� »� ��V��+��^�� V��>�V�� + V��

� Excellent vibration resistance and shock resistance��|�� ^@�W� �� W+��@��+�� @��@�� @�W� �� >� ��

� Improvement of follow-up performance�� W��V^�� W�� @��

� Digitalization of Master compass heading�� +��V�� W��»�� +�� heading.

� Automatic speed-error correcting function��^�� +�W+��}�� -��@��+�� \��>�� V�� }�� »� �=^�+��+��

� Functions for various displays and settings’ ��+��+�� W�� +�� % �� -eration unit and remote unit.

� Preparation of outputs corresponding to every requirement»� �� ;�� signal output, digital signal output (IEC61162-1/-2), analog heading, quadrant, and angular turning velocity signal output are equipped as standard.

� Onboard battery drive�� W+��W� ��W ��+�� @ �� W��

1-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

� Built-in startup timer�� W��QQ��

� Heading output using external azimuth sensor signal!�� {�� b\�� f�� W��{�� @�� ;��

1-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.2 Gyrocompass System��%�Q��\+�� }�� +��V��Master compass.The heading signal is displayed on operation unit, and is output to Repeater compass or external units.»�� +��+�� V��W��W��V�� #�»X�X�*�V��W��>��+�� +��V��

� Master compass��% �� }�� These signals are output to any units. The M.operation unit is included in this Master compass.

� Repeater compass / Steering repeater compass��;�� @�� % �� }��heading.

� Control box��W�{��% �� {�� @��@�� heading signals. This unit is used with S-Type.

� Operation unit�� +�� V��>�� _��C.operation unit and the other is M. Operation Unit. C.Operation unit is standard device in Type-S and optional device in Type-B.

�� $�� +��

1-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.3 Device Composition Type�%�Q�� +��+�� +�� +��W�� $�

� CMZ900B=^�+��% �� ;�� +��V�� W+� �� The automatic speed error correction is achieved using C.operation unit (option) and Junction unit b��f��W �>��V��+�� @�� b��f�

� CMZ900S�^�+��% �� W�{��;�� +��V�� W+�� +��|��W�{��-� ��+� �� {��V�� %�Q��=��+�� +�� W��@��{��

� CMZ900D (Not explain in this manual)*^�+��V��% �� W�{�� ;�� -� �� +��V�� W+� ��+�� V +��W��@��W+�� »��+��W��{�� W+�� b��V ��f��V��b� ��V ��f�� @��@�� W��+��+��

1-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.4 Connection with External Devices�%�Q��\+�� }�� external devices. The heading signal or external input signal is output to external devices such as Autopilot, Radar, Course Recorder and more.

1.4.1 Input Signal��V�� W��{�� @��+��

Input signal External devices Signal format��}�� E.M.Log, Doppler Log, GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial , PulseLatitude signal GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial`� ��Z�; �� Magnet compass , GPS compass, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial

�� W�� &��

1.4.2 Output Signal��V�� W��{�� @��+��

Output signal External devices Signal formatRepeater compass heading signal Repeater compass IEC61162-1 SerialStepper heading signal Radar, etc. 3Bit gray code

�� Z�; �� Autopilot, Universal data display, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial� �� Z�; �� Course recorder, ROT Indicator, etc. � ��b��Y’f

�� W�� &��

1-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5 Outline of Operation��W�� +��

1.5.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-�� +�� V��>�� _��is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S/D and optional device in Type-B. ��$��

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Control box

C.operation unit

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT� �

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

1-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5.3 Normal Display��+�� W�� %�� W+�� +�� >�� W+�� +�� %��

� Normal display on C.operation unitThe heading and system status are displayed on screen.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

Heading display

System status display

Input method

Input value

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

Heading display

1-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.5.4 Output Heading Selection»��%�Q��{�� @��W��+�� {�� heading.To select the heading, push the heading selection key.

1.5.5 Command Function�� %�Q�� ^��@ �� +Z��%�Q��\+�� W��b�� f�� W�� @��@ ��%�@�� &��

� List of Command Function

Clas-��

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Display Function

� � Compass heading display � 3-11� – True heading and system status display

10 � – �� @ ��display � 4-2

11 � – Heading deviation display � 4-312 � – Turn rate display � 4-4

13� � Gyro sphere running time display � 4-5� – �� +

14 � – Dimmer rank display � 4-615 � � Gyro-sphere phase current display � 4-716 � � = �>��W ��+�@�� + � 4-817 � – Deviation voltage display � 4-9

19 � � ��V ��@��W�� + � 4-10

Setting Function

20 � – External heading input selection � 4-1421 � � �� 4-1522 � � X �� 4-1623 � � �� % �� × 4-1724 � � % � �� % �� × 4-1925 � � ��% �� V^�� 4-21

26 � � *�� +��Z�� % �� alarm � 4-22

27 � – *�� +��Z�� alarm � 4-23

28 � – Deviation alarm setting � 4-2429 � � Startup timer setting � 4-25

1-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

Clas-��

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Maintenance Function

30 � � �� 4-3331 � � Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3432 � � % � ��@��% �� 4-3633 � � % � ��@��;�� 4-3734 � � Resetting gyrosphere running time � 4-3835 � � Resetting log � 4-3936 � � «�� W �>��+ � 4-4037 � � Correcting Master compass installation error � 4-4139 � � Log display � 4-43

Generation Function

40 � � �� 4-54

41 � �� V^�� 4-55

42 � – �� 4-56

43 � – �� 4-57

45 � – �� 4-62

49 � – %�� 4-68

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

1-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.6 Outline of Alarm»�� W�� +��

1.6.1 The Display when Alarm is Generated�� W�� X�*�W��>�� +��

�� W+�� >�+�

1.6.2 Buzzer Stop��W��^��>�+��W��

�� !�� W�� >��V�� W�� Y�

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

1-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

1.7 Maintenance and Inspection»��V�� +�� +�� V��>��

1.7.1 Daily Inspection

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

��Y��W+��{�� Y��(See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

��>�� ;�� -� �� V�� % �� Once/departure

3��}��@ �� >�� }��

�� W+��{�� $�� $$��b��&�$�$� ��&�$��f

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-�� +�� W��@ �� Once/day

DC Battery input ��>�� *��@�� (MKR027/MKS070)are regulated voltage.%�;�$<�� b�^�fMKS070:TB1 3-4

Once/year

NOTE��>�� ;�� V��}��»�� ^��% �� V�� V��;�� compass card reading.

1.7.2 Regular Maintenance��V�� +� ��

NOTE_��@��*�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

Inspection Item Procedure

1 Gyrosphere �� V�� W ��

2 Container �� b�{�� V�� f��V��W ��V^��

3 Supporting Liquid Replace4 �� b;�� V�� > W��+��+�f

(Note) For disassembling and assembling procedures, see Section 7.2.

1-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 1.Overview >

�� W��

Compass heading �� W+��

True heading �� W� ��W+��W�� @ ��

Value of speed-error correction �� }��

Output headingA heading output to external connected device (such as repeater compasses).��+�� {�� W��selected.

Gyro heading True heading

External sensor heading �� W��{�� b�� magnet compass/GPS compass and the like)

2-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2. Hardware2.1 Component Models

�%�Q��=ZQ�� V��

�� »#$%%��&��’��

INMARSATRADARGPS . . .etc

AUTO PILOTIBSINS . . .etc

(MKR050) (MKR056)

(KX223A)(KX201A) (KX213)

(MKN019)

(MKR101A/181A) (MKR302)

(MKM026)(MKC326)

(MKR040)

Junction Box

Horizontal Bracket Tilting Bracket Horizontal Stand

Repeater Compass Steering Repeater Compass

Serial signal for Repeater compass

Course Recorder Rate of Turn

Stepper Signal

Serial Signal(IEC 1162-1)

Analog (0V to 5V)

Master Compass

Power Supply (24V DC)

Power Supply (100 to 220 V AC , 50/60 Hz)

Control Box

(Device to be connected)

C.operation unit

2-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

�� »#$%%*��&��’��

INMARSATRADARGPS . . .etc

AUTO PILOTIBSINS . . .etc

(MKR050) (MKR056)

(KX223A)(KX201A) (KX213)

(MKN019)

(MKR101A/181A) (MKR302)

(MKM026) (MKR040)

(MKR027/MKS070)

(MKR028)

(MKN018)

Junction Box

Horizontal Bracket Tilting Bracket Horizontal Stand

Repeater Compass Steering Repeater Compass

Serial signal for repeater compass

Course Recorder Rate of Turn

Stepper Signal

Serial Signal(IEC 1162-1)

Analog (0V to 5V)

Master Compass

Power Supply (24V DC)

Power Supply

(24V DC)

Power Supply (100 to 220 V AC , 50/60 Hz)

(OPTION)

AC Adapter

Annunciator

C.Operation Unit

(Device to be connected)

Junction Unit

2-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

� Component models

MKM026-1 MKT007

CMZ 900B/900S

MKM026-2

MKM026-4

MKC326-F

MKC326-S

MKC326-W

MKR050-G KX223A

MKN019-G KX201A

KX213

MKR050-P KX223A

MKN019-P KX201A

KX213

MKR056

MKR027/MKS070

MKR028

MKR040

MKR026

MKR025

MKR026

MKR025

MKN018

Gyrocompass

Master compass

Control box

Repeater compass

Steering repeater compass

C.operation unit

AC Adapter

Annunciator unit

Stand alone type

Pilot stand type

Console type

Flush mount type

Pilot stand type

Wall mount type

Gland type

Plug type

Junction box

Horizontal stand

Horizontal bracket

Tilting bracket

Gyrosphere

B-TypeOption

S-Type

Switch unit

M.operation unit

Junction unit

(S-Type : Standard / B-type : Option)

Junction box

2-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2 Component Names and Functions2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026]

Master compass detects ship’s heading.

� Master compass stand alone typeThis Master compass is stand alone type which includes components to exclusive case.

Switch unit

M.operation unit

Container with Gyrosphere

��$�$�� %��

� Pilot stand typeThis type includes gyrocompass units into stand.

Autopilot stand

C.operation unit

M.operation unit

Container

Gyrosphere

Main power switch

��$��

� Console type��+��W��W��+��% �� V��

2-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC326] (S-Type)��W�{��W�� V�� @�� W�{��|�� @�� |��V��V�� W�{�

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Front cover

Front View

Inside view

C.Operation Unit

FuseMain Power Switch

External OutputPower Switch

Terminal Board

��W�{�� >��V�� V ��+��+�� W��^�� +��$��

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKR027/MKS070] (B-Type Option)This unit supplies DC power to Master compass.

MKR027 MKS070

Front cover

Fuse

Power Switch

Terminal Board

Inside view Inside view

2-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]��;�� @�� % �� heading.

Pointer

Scale (360 degrees/round)

Scale (10 degrees/round)

Top view

Side View

Shadow pin mounting hole

Horizontal stand

Horizontal bracket

Tilting bracket

Junction box

Terminal lug

Connector

NOTE»�� ;�� >� �� Y�

2-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019]��@�� V��% �� @��;�� It is used to adjust dimmer.

Fail indicator LED (red)This LED is lit or blinks when an error is detected.Normally it is off.

Run indicator LED (green)This LED blinks when zero adjustment is being carried out. Normally it is lit.

Zero adjustment switchUsed when there has been a shift in the value indicated by the Repeater compass.

Dimmer controlTurning this dial adjusts the illumination of the compass card,and run indicator LED.

Gland or ConnectorConnect to Repeater compass.

GlandConnect to Master compass or control box.

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]

DIMMER

FAIL

RUN SYNC

Pointer

Scale (10 degrees/round)

Scale (360 degrees/round)

Dimmer controlTurning this dial adjusts the illumination of the compasscard, and run indicator LED.

Fail indicator LED

Run indicator LED

Zero adjustment switch

2-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 2.Hardware >

2.2.7 Annunciator [MKR028] (B-Type Option)�� V�� V��W�� W��>��X�*�

Buzzer stop key

2.2.8 C.operation Unit [MKR040] (B-Type Option )C.operatioun unit is used to control and operate gyrocompass.��|�� +��%�Q�� |�� +��%�Q��=�

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

��$��

3-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3. Operation�� W�� %�Q��\+�� +��

3.1 Startup and StoppageNOTE

� �� +�� Y��W��

3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and Stoppage��V��+��+��

� The operation on the Control box and Autopilot stand.��+�� W+�� V��V��W�{�� V��V�� W�{�� For startup, locate the toggle switch to ON side. For stoppage, locate the toggle switch to OFF side.

Inside of the Control box

Main power switch

External outputpower switch

� The operation on the Master compass��V��V�� % �� For startup, press the switch to ON side. For stoppage, press the switch to OFF side.

Master compass

Power switch

3-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.1.2 Startup Sequence��V�� +�� W��

Power On(Main switch is turned on)

Repeater compass power ONStepper ROT power ON

Zero adjustment of Master compass

the Master compass is followed gyrosphere heading

Zero adjustment of Repeater compass

Output singal are started

The Repeater compass and stepper signal heading followed to Master compass heading

The gyrosphere heading is settled and the system outputs true heading

about 5 hours

about 20 minutes

about 1 minute

Supplied power to system, and the rotator in gyrosphere is started to rotate.

The Master compass starts zero adjustment, when the phasecurrent is lower than 0.35 A and the revolution of rotator comes constant.

3-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start

� Flow diagram

Turn on each of the ship’s AC and DCpowersupplies for the gyrocompass system.

Turn on the main power switch.

If AC power is not supplied to thesystem, turn on DC power only.

Revolution of the gyro-sphere rotor is high.�Phase current is higher than 0.35A

Revolution of the gyro-shere rotor is low.�Phase current is 0.35A or less

Cold start Hot start

･System status :»STBY»･The follow-up operation of the Master compass stops.･Aligning operation is prohibited.･Phase current decreases blow 0.35A and when its rate-of-change becomes low, the compass enters nomal operating status.

Normal status ・System status : blank

The gyrocompass enters normal operationg status immediately.

�� +�� Y��W�� V��V��+�� +�� +��^��»��+�� W��V�@�� V�� W�� +��W+��

3-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Hot start`�� W��@ �� +� ��V��Y�� V^��% �� Z�� X�*��

� Cold start�� W��@ �� +� ��V�� Y�� ^W+�� W��V� ��@�� V�� V��|�� *�� ^W+��% �� W�� W��$�� W�� +�� +��

0.35A

Normal

Phase curent

Time

0.35A

Time

NormalSTAND-BY

Phase curent

3-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-�� +�� V��>�� _��is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit.

NOTE�� @��+��^�Z*� �� @��+��^=��»�� |��%�� +��

� C.operation unit�� |��W�{�� % �� V��{�� @��»��W�� %��

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Control box

C.operation unit

� M.operation unit��%�� |�� % �� b�� +��Z��+��f��%�� % �� V��V�� W�� V��%�� b;��&�$f

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT� �

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

3-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� The operation mode of operation unit�� @��V�� +�� +�� +�� +��

COMMAND

(C.operation Unit)

COMMAND

BZ STOP

(M.operation Unit)

Press COMMAND key

Normal Mode

Command Mode

��*�� +�� *�� +��+�� *�� +�� speed error correction��b�� f

��{�� *�� +��% �� \��

3.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.operation Unit and Its Functions��W��

� The name of each part

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Heading display area Data display area Alarm LED andBuzzer stop key

Select LED andselect key

Arrow keys

ENT keyCommand key

Dimmer key

External headingselection key

Gyro heading selection key

3-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� The function of each part

� Heading display Displays a compass heading and system status.

� Data display Indicates displays corresponding to menus and each command code.

� Alarm lamp and buzzer stop key� *�� +�� +�� +��

� «��V�� W��

� Select LED and Select key Displays and selects the operating initiative (C.operation unit or M.operation unit). keep the

>�+�� V��

� ��X�*�� W��

� ��X�*��%�� W��

� Arrow key � � ��+�� V�� +��

NOTE��W �>^�� GYRO2

gyro heading selection key is not lit on this system.

NOTE��W �>^��{�� >�+��+�� {�� ^�� @ �� W��

3-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.operation unit and Its Functions

��W�� %��

NOTE»�� |�� %�� W��- �� %�� >�+�� the selection LED.

� The name of each part

OFFPOWER

GYROCOMPASS

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd.

SHIFT� �

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Power switch External heading selector switch

Set/Dimmer key Command/Buzzer stop key

ENT key

Data display area

Gyro heading display area

RUN indicator LEDEXT indicator LEDFAIL indicator LED Command code display area

� The function of each part

� Power switch � ��Z��V��+��+��

� External heading selector switch � «��V��>��$��V��

(gyro heading/external heading) is selected.

� �� V��}��

� Set/dimmer key � «�� >�+�� @��W�� +��

%�� +�� W�� >��W+��>�+� ��W��W+��>�+��=�� W�� $��

� «��V��>�+�� +��

� «��>�+�� {�� `»#��>�+�� bW��>�f�V��!��>�+�� the numeric value in the input digit.

3-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Command/buzzer stop key � «��>�+��

�� {��normal.

� «��V�� W�� W��>��#�»X�� LED stops.

� ENT key Enters an input value in command selection mode or command execution mode. To carry out

�� V��>�+��V��>��$��

Data display area Displays/sets data when a command is executed.

Gyro heading display area Displays a compass heading.

� Command code display area Displays a command code.

� RUN indicator LED� X��V��V��V��

EXT indicator LED Goes out when the currently selected output heading is the gyro heading and lights up when

the output heading is the external sensor heading.

�11 FAIL indicator LED Blinks when an alarm is generated.

� «��=��_��>�+�� V�� restored to normal.

3-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.3 Display of Normal State*�� +�� b�� f�V��W��W��W��V�

� Displays of the C.operation unit at normal state�� +�� +�� +�� @ ��}�� }��b�� { �� +f�

� Heading display�� % �� +��b\�;_��f� �� -��{�� +��b� �f�� +�� +��W� >�� @ �� V�� @ ��@�� +��V��^ ^ ^ � ^ ��b�� f#�� ¡�� +�� +�W�� To switch to another heading sensor, press the external heading selector key or the gyro heading ��>�+�b� ��W�� f�

� System status display��+��+�� +��W�� +��+�� V� �� +��W� >�

System Status

STBY *�� +��V��% �� ^W+�� HDG FLT *�� +��V�� V��

PWR FLT*�� +��V�� V��+��+��|��V��*��W �>��+��This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

C/O PRF Displayed when the changeover operation is not permitted.MUTE *�� +��V�� W��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

Heading display

System status display

Input method

Input value

3-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Input method�� +��

MANUAL The value is set manually.AUTO ��@ ��{��

� Input valueThe values to correct the speed error is displayed.

� Displays of the M.operation unit at normal mode

� Heading displayThe gyro heading display shows a compass heading, in-dications in the command and data displays disappear.

� System status display*�� W+��+�� +�� V��V��V �� +��

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

3-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4 Command Mode��W��V�� @�� execute.

��+�� :��!�� ;�� V��+��

� The displaying function�� +�� +��@ ��

� The setting function�� +�� +�

� The maintenance function�� @�� V��+�� +��+��V��|�� V��V��

� The generation function�� {�� +��+��V��|�� V��V��is used.

�� &��

Column:� �� @�� W�� @��W+��

3-13

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.2 Command Code List��V�� W�� V��+�� W+�� &��

NOTE�� W�� V��%�� ;��V�� W��{�� W�� %��

� Command code list

Clas-��

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Display Function

� � Compass heading display � 3-11� – True heading and system status display

10 � – �� @ ��display � 4-2

11 � – Heading deviation display � 4-312 � – Turn rate display � 4-4

13� � Gyro sphere running time display � 4-5� – �� +

14 � – Dimmer rank display � 4-615 � � Gyro-sphere phase current display � 4-716 � � = �>��W ��+�@�� + � 4-817 � – Deviation voltage display � 4-9

19 � � ��V ��@��W�� + � 4-10Setting Function

26 � � *�� +��Z�� % �� alarm � 4-22

27 � – *�� +��Z�� alarm � 4-23

28 � – Deviation alarm setting � 4-2429 � � Startup timer setting � 4-25

3-14

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

Clas-��

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Maintenance Function

Generation Function

40 � � �� 4-54

41 � �� V^�� 4-55

42 � – �� 4-56

43 � – �� 4-57

45 � – �� 4-62

49 � – %�� 4-68

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

3-15

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode��{�� %��W�� W�� %��

� Operation on C.operation unit�� >�+�� %�� +� �� {��W+�� >�+�� %�� %��

� Accessing Menus

(1) =��’:��!��»�� >�+��V�� mode, the MAIN MENU appears in the data dis-�� +�b��f�� W��>��b��W��>�� is called the cursor.)�� W+��@��-sor with the up and down arrow keys.

«��V� ��V�>�+��V��W�� +��shows the next page.»�� V�>�+��V��resides in the top line, the displayed menu shows the preceding page.�� +��accessed, press the COMMAND key.

(2) «��!��*�� +��%�»��%��!� ��press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches ��*��%��!�b ��V��the right).

��$�_�� %�»��%��!� ��press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches ��_�� %��!�b ��V��the right).

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

1 Display

2 Operate

3 Maintain

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

2 Operate

3 Maintain

4 Generate

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Disp.MENU

10 HDG

11 DEV

12 ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Operat.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

3-16

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

��% �� %�»��%��!�and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Maint.MENU (as shown in the ��f�

��&�\�� %�»��%��!� ��press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches ��\�� %��!�b ��V��on the right).

� Flow of accessing menus

ENT

SPD.MANUAL +00[kt] LAT.MANUAL N 00[°]

MAIN MENU1 Display2 Operate3 Maintain

MAIN MENU2 Operate3 Maintain4 Generat

ENT ENTENT

Disp.MENU10 HDG11 DEV12 ROT

Operat.MENU20 EXT SEL21 SPD SET22 LAT SET

Maint.MENU30 Password

Generat.MENU40 Password

ENT ENT ENT ENT

COMMAND

Nomaldisplay

Mediumclassificationmenu

Roughclassificationmenu

Display menu Operation menu Maintenance menu Generation menu

To displaying heading To external headinginput selection

To password input formaintenance mode

To password input forgeneration mode

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

>123.4

126.0

3-17

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

� Operation on M.operation unit�� W�� %�� >�+�� %�� >�+�� %�� %��

�� ?��@�Q�� >�+�� %��W�� W��>�� +� �� »�� {��-� ��>�+�$�� $�� b»�� W�� $��>�+��f

COMMAND DATA

COMMAND

BZ STOP

COMMAND DATA

U P▲

SHIFT▼

U P▲

COMMAND DATA

ENT

COMMAND

BZ STOP

blinking

(1) Normal mode

(2) Command selection mode

(3) Command excution mode

The value of place of ten become «1».

The blinking move to place of one.

The value of place of one become «5».

Push ENT key 2 times each 2 seconds or more.

Push UP key 5 times.blinking

3-18

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 3.Operation >

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the Value��W�� @ ��

� The procedure on C.operation unit��@ �� V�>�+�� @ ��{��W+��-ing ENT key.

� The item selection operation

I t e m 1

I t e m 2

I t e m 3

I t e m 4 . . .

Set ValueWhen is pressed, The previous item is selected.

When is pressed, The next item is selected.

� The setting value input operation

When is pressed, The previous item is selected.

When is pressed, The cursor move to next place.

When is pressed, The next item is selected.

When is pressed, The cursor move to previous place.

Set Value

«�� W��

� The procedure on M.operation unit��@ �� `»#�� !��>�+��%�� @ ��{��W+��>�+�

� The item selection operation

0 01 02 03 0 00 10 20… 80 90

Set Value

UP▲The next item is selected by every pressing the key.

� The setting value input operation

0123 0 1 2 … 8 9

UP▲

SHIFT▼

Set Value

When is pressed, the blinking place moves to the next.

The next value is selected by every pressing the key.

4-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4. Function Explanation and Operation Method

�� W��%�Q��=Z�� +�� V�� {��W+�� W��&��&�$��&�� &�&�� {�� W��&�Y�

;�� {�� {��operation with enough understanding.

4.1 Display Functions��W��V�� +�@ �� V��Q�� W�� +��

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M� � Compass heading display � 3-10� – True heading and system status display

10 � – �� @ ��-play � 4-2

11 � – Heading deviation display � 4-3

12 � – Turn rate display � 4-4

13� � Gyro sphere running time display � 4-5� – �� +

14 � – Dimmer rank display � 4-615 � � Gyro-sphere phase current display � 4-716 � � = �>��W ��+�@�� + � 4-817 � – Deviation voltage display � 4-9

19 � � ��V ��@��W�� + � 4-10

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

� �� {��W+�� %��

��$��

��&��

��&�&��@ ��

4-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.1 Displaying Heading

COMMAND CODE :10�� +�� @ ��correction .

� Operation with The C.Operation Unit��`*\��*��%��!� ��pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading.�� V�>�+��V�� +�W��V�� @ �� V�� { �� +�� (True HDG), compass heading (Compass HDG) ��@ ��b��*�Error).»�� >�+��-turns to normal mode.

� Operation with The M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

The M.operation unit displays a compass heading at normal mode.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

True HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

122.9°

Compass HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

-00.5°

SPD Error

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.2 Displaying Heading DeviationCOMMAND CODE : 11

�� +�� @� ��W��V��+�� {�� +��b�f�

� Operation with The C.operation Unit��*�@��*��%��!� ��pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading deviation.*�@� ��@ �� W �� +�W��are displayed.

��V�� { �-�� +�� @� ��{�� W ��+��heading.(Heading deviation) = (External heading) — (Gyro heading)

��V��V�� { �-�� +�� @� ��+��^�� W ��{�� heading.(Heading deviation) = (Gyro heading) — (External heading)»�� >�+��

NOTE»�� {�� +�� @� �� +��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

E/G1 02.6º

Deviation

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1/E -02.6º

Deviation

123.4

>126.0

4-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.3 Displaying Rate of TurnCOMMAND CODE : 12

�� +��; �� V��>�� +��_��b�fZ�� b�fZ��

� Operation with the C.Operation unit��$�;_��*��%��!� ��pressing the ENT key switches to the display ��V�� »�� V�>�+�� +�� W�� Z��Z��V�� { �� +�� Z�� V�� { �� +�� Z��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°/min

ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

12.34°/s

ROT

>123.4

126.0

4-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.4 Displaying Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 13

�� +�� % �� +�� -��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��;��*��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the running time.

��b\�f�� % �� running time and the third line (OP) the C.op-eration unit running time.

«�� V�>�+�� +�� W��V��W��V�� -ning time, gyrosphere running time, and time ��

�� V��V��{ �� +�� (Total time), gyrosphere running time (Gyro ��f� �� b��V��f�respectively.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE The M.operation unit displays the gyrosphere-running-time only .

;��+�� +��b��QQQQQQ��f�»�� {��V��{��+�� displayed in the data display.»��`»#��>�+��V��{�� +�� `»#��>�+��V��V��{��-��V�� are displayed.»��{ ��+��QY$��Q��Y$��V��W�� +��»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 001234h

OP 012345h

Total time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345h

Gyro time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 000123h

OP 000123h

Power time

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and AdjustCOMMAND CODE : 14

�� +�� >� �� >��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&�*��@��*��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the dimmer rank (as shown in the ��f�

� adjusting the value�� >�� W+�� *»%%�;�>�+�� >�� W+�� *»%%�;�>�+�V��>�+��

�� W��

key.

�� W�� key.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE M.operation unit does not display the dimmer rank.

� adjusting the value�� >�� W+�� Z*»%%�;�>�+�� W��>�+�� W��>�+�

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

16/32 DIM.

13/32 CONT.

Dim.level

>123.4

126.0

4-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase CurrentCOMMAND CODE : 15

�� +��+��}�� b�+��}��@��f��@ �� +��}�� @ �� Y��Y��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��Y�\��*��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the gyro-sphere phase current (as ��V��f�

�� @ �� Y��0.35 A.

� Operation with the M.operation unit��+�� b��@��+-rosphere) is displayed (0.00 to 0.99 A).�� @ ��Y��Y��»�� Y��{��V�� -��+�� +��data display.��V�� { ��$��gyrosphere phase current.»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.21 A

Gyro Current

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery VoltageCOMMAND CODE : 16

�� +��W ��+�@�� W��W �>��+�»�� {��V�� +��W ��+�@�� C.operation unit and the Master compass.»�� {��V��%�� +��W ��+�@�� % �-ter compass.�� @ �� $�Y�’��&��’�

� Operation with the C.operation unit��=��’��*��%��!� ��pressing the ENT key switches to the display ��V��W �>��W ��+�@�� b ��V��f�

� Operation with the M.operation unit��@�� W ��+��W �>��+�� +��b��Q�Q�’f�

«�� {��W �>��W ��+�voltage is displayed in the data display.��V�� { ��’��@�� W �>��W ��+�»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98V

BATT.Volt

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.8 Displaying Deviation Voltage COMMAND CODE : 17

�� +��@� ��@�� % �� @ �� ̂ ��&�’��&�’�

� Operation with the C.operation unit��<�*’�’��*��%��!� ��pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the deviation voltage (as shown in the ��f�

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.12V

DV.Volt

>123.4

126.0

4-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.1.9 Displaying Software Version NumberCOMMAND CODE : 19

�� +��V ��@��W��»�� {��V�� +��@�� -tion unit and the Master compass.»�� {��V��%�� +��@��% ��compass.

� Operation with the C.operation unit��Q��’��*��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +��V��V ��@��W��b ��V��f�»�� >�+��-turns to normal mode.

� Operation with the M.operation unit��V ��@��W�� V�W+�� @��b �� W��f� ��@��(numerical value).�� @��V�W+�� @ �� %��-�� @��V� ��£��}��@��V�W+�� @ ��V��When command 19 is executed, the major version is dis-�� +��@�� +��W+��key. The decimal point is displayed in displaying the minor version.�� +��V��W+��>�+��V�� { �� +��V ��@��W��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01

Soft.Ver.

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��!�&� ��̂ ��_

ENT

COMMAND

Disp.MENU10 HDG11 DEV12 ROT

Disp.MENU13 Run Time14 Dim level15 G.Current

123.4°

True HDG

-00.5°

SPD Error

122.9°

Compass HDG

ENT

>123.4

126.0

E/G1 02.6°

Deviation

GYRO 1GYRO 2EXT

123.4°/min

ROT

ENT

12.34°/s

ROT

ENT

G1 001234h

OP 012345hTotal time

G1 012345h

Gyro time

G1 000123h

OP 000123hPower time

16/32 DIM. 13/32 CONT.

Dim.level

Disp.MENU13 Run Time14 Dim level15 G.Current

Disp.MENU16 BT.Volt17 DV.Volt18 reserved

Disp.MENU17 DV.Volt18 reserved19 Soft.Ver.

ENT

0.25 A

Gyro Current

ENT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98VBATT.Volt

ENT

0.15V

DV.Volt

ENT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01Soft.Ver.

ENT

Midiumclassfi-cationmenu

DisplayingHeading

Displaying HeadingDeviation

Displaying Rateof Turn

DisplayingRunning Time

Displaying Dimmer Rank

DisplayingGyrospherePhase Current

DisplayingBackup BatteryVoltage

DisplayingDeviationVoltage

Dispalying Software VersionNumber

From any screen

Normal mode

4-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��!�&� ��̂ «��_

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT▼

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

▼

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

▼

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT▼

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

▼

COMMANDBZ STOP

Displaying gyrosphererunning time

Displaying gyrospherephase current

Displaying backupbattery voltage

Diplaying softwareversion number

From any screen

Normal mode

4-13

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2 Setting Functions�� +�� +�

�� V��

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M20 � – External heading input selection � 4-1421 � � �� 4-1522 � � X �� 4-1623 � � �� % �� × 4-1724 � � % � �� % �� × 4-1925 � � ��% �� V^�� 4-2126 � � *�� +��Z�� % �� 4-2227 � – *�� +��Z�� 4-2328 � – Deviation alarm setting � 4-24

29 � � Startup timer setting � 4-25

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

� �� {��W+�� %��

��$��

��&��

��&�&��@ ��

4-14

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.1 External Heading Input SelectionCOMMAND CODE : 20

�� W�� _%%��*��{�� +�� {�� +� �� { ��{�� V��

��{ ��{�� Port 1 : Magnetic compass (TMC unit) Port 2 : THD Port 3 : disconnected

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$�� X��_�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the external heading input selection.

�{�� {�� heading input ports 1 to 3 is displayed (as shown ��f�

�{��

NONE Without external heading input settingOK ��{�� {�� W�� +��NG ��{�� {�� W��

#�� {�� ¡�� +�� +�W��^��»�� @��¡�� W+��V� ��V�>�+� ��>�+�� +�W��>�� @ �� »��>�+�� W��>�� `�V�@�� W�� V��{��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

4-15

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 21

�� }��^��*�� W+�� @ ��^��^��@ ��speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) =� b�� f��b’ ��^��^��f��b’ ��»�� ^��^��f

‘ ��^��^��b��f�= ��}��¤>��¥ × cos (Compass heading)� Y¦� ��bX ��f

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$��*��_�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing speed-error correction speed input.��V�� { ��-�� +��}��$��>��b>�f�V�� -matic input.To select automatic or manual input, press the ��>�+��=��!�_� ��%��!�X�W��>��with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.»��!�_�� }��W��@ ��»��%��!�X��}��W��>�� V�� @ ��W��V��QQ�>��W��}��W+�� V�>�+�� V� ��V�>�+�to change the numeric value.��}��>�+��@ ��W��>�� @ �� »��>�+�� W��>�� @ ��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $��{��is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to W��f�W��>��>�+�� @ ��W+��!��>�+�� V��b��QQ�>�f��V�� { ��>��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

NOTE»��W��{��V�� !�_��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-16

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 22

�� }�� ^��*�� W+�� @ ��^��^��@ ��speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) =� b�� f��b’ ��^��^��f��b’ ��»�� ^��^��f

‘ ��^��^��b��f�= ��}��¤>��¥� × cos (Compass heading)� Y¦� ��bX ��f

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$$�X��_�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the speed-error correcting latitude input.��V�� { �� +�� Q��To select automatic or manual input, press the ��>�+��=��!�_� ��%��!�X�W��>��with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.»��!�_�� W��@ ��»��%��!�X�� W��>�� V�� @ ��W��V��<��W��}�� W+�� Select N or S with up or down arrow key and press ENT key.�� V�>�+�� V� ��V�>�+�to change the numeric value.�� >�+��@ ��W��>�� @ �� »��>�+�� W��>�� @ ��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $$��{�� is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to W��f�W��>��»�� +�� +�� #��{ ��V�� +��To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change ��@ ��W+��!��>�+�� b��<��f��V�� { ��&Y�� @ �� W��-��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��-tered value is displayed continuously and is set as the ��@ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��

NOTE»��W��{��V�� !�_��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

N 39°

AUTO

LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-17

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 23

�� W+��+�� +��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$��+��_�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches the display showing automatic Master compass ��b ��V��f�

�#��V�!�� +��+�� % �-�� V��+��»��>�+��V�� ;� �+�� +� �� V�� W+��automatic alignment.»��>�+�� ;��display appears showing that automatic align-��W�� b��% �� starts automatic alignment.)»�� +�� +� �� `�V�@��-�� +� �-�� »�� {��% ��-pass alignment manually.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Follow Up

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Ready

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Running

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Success

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

Gyro=G1

4-18

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $��{�� W��>�� +� �� W��-��W+��_%%��*�>�+�»�� +��-�� +��W��W��>�� +�� +�� b��f�»�� b�� W��f�� W��>��»�� +�� »��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-19

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 24

«�� % �� W��{�� +�� @��@ �� W��@ �� as the adjustment method.

CAUTION�� >��@ ��W+��}��>��W+��$��V��+��{��

� Relative value alignment ��W��@ ��W� �� V �� W+��+�� @ ��b»�� ̂ ��?��§��?��f� «��@ ��̈ �b�� W��@ ��f�̂ �b�� f� � ��+��^��+��§�#��{ �� Y�� W��@ ��$��@ ��^�� +�W��@�� W�� W�� W��W� ��

� Absolute value alignment=+�� W�� @ �� Input value = (true heading)�� +�W��@��>��W�� W�� W��W� ��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$&��+��% ��_�� %��!� ��>�+��V�� +��V�� % �� b ��V��f�

«��>�+��;��W��>�� V�� b W��@ ��©�?�� @��@ ��YQ�Q��f��W��entered.�� V�>�+�� V� ��V�>�+�� W��@ �� b�W��f�� @��@ �� b;��f� ��to change the numeric value.�� >�+��@ ��W��>�� @ �� »��>�+�� W��>�� @ ��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.0

Sync.Manu

>123.4

126.0 Gyro=G1

4-20

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $&��{�� +�� +�� +�� and the mode changes to relative value alignment setting mode.»�� >�+��>��$�� +�� `�� +�� +��-cates the current compass heading and the mode chang-�� W��@ �� b�V��W��V��V�� >�+�f��b��W��f�� +��+�� +�W��>��To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change ��@ ��W+��!��>�+�b�� @��@ ��̂ ��?��?�� W��@ ��000.0 to 359.9 degrees).»�� @��@ ��W��W�� b��f� ��!��>�+��@�� +�� +�� @ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-21

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up GainCOMMAND CODE : 25

��% �� V^�� V�� W ��V^�� V^��V��W��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$Y�#��\�»��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the display ��V��V^�� >�+� � ��V^�� W��>��Pressing the upper arrow key increases the gain W+�Y�ª�b� {��$��ªf�Pressing the lower arrow key decreases the � ��W+�Y�ª�b��ªf�� @ ��>�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��V^�� +�� @ ��+��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $Y��{�� +��-� �� b�V�� f� ��b��W��f�W��>�� W��W+��`»#��>�+� �� @ ��W��W+��!��>�+�� @ ��b��$�f��V�� { �� QY�ª��b�� ªf�� @ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� -other 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continu-��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

100 %

Gyro=G1

Fol.GAIN

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-22

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass Alarm COMMAND CODE : 26

�� +��V��>��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$��;��%��_�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to �� +��V�� % ��compass alarm.��V�� { �� +�V�� +�� in the Master compass.

«�� +�� error contents on the second and third lines.»�� +�W��>�� +��W��@��W��>�� +�W��@��»�� V�� +��W+��-�� V�>�+�� +�W��@��>�+�� +�

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $��{�� +�� +�� -erated and detected in the Master compass.�� +�� V�� { ��V��W �>��W ��+�@�� W�� An error code without a decimal point means that the �� +�W�� >�+��>��$��V��W��reset and the error message will disappear.»��V �� ^^�� +��»� �� -�� V�� W�� +�� V-�� W�� +��W+��!��>�+��#��{ ��!��>�+�� +��V�� +��W��V��&��Y��»��_%%��*�>�+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

—.-

>126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-23

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.operation Unit AlarmCOMMAND CODE : 27

�� +��V��>��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$<��;��_��_�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the �� +��V�� alarm.��V�� { �� display when no alarm cause in C.operation unit is shown. «�� +�� error contents on the second and third lines.»�� +�W��>�� +��W��@��W��>�� +�W��@��»�� V�� +��W+��-�� V�>�+�� +�W��@��>�+�� +�

��Y�$�&��>��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

No error at

operation

unit

ErrRef.OP

>123.4

126.0

4-24

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm SettingCOMMAND CODE : 28

�� @ ��@� �� W+��W��V��the current heading and the external heading.

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$?�*�@��_�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the deviation alarm setting.

��V�� { ��the deviation limit value to generate a devia-�� b��% �� {�� f�W�� 10.0 degrees.

«��>�+�� @� �� @ ��W��>�� V��@ ��W�� V�>�+�� V� ��V�>�+�to change the numeric value.��@ ��>�+��@ ��W��>�� @ �� »��>�+�� W��>�� @ ��changed.»� ��@ �� @� ��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1/E 05.0°

Dev Alrm

>123.4

126.0

4-25

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.2.10 Startup Timer SettingCOMMAND CODE : 29

�� +��+�� +� ��

CAUTION*�}��*��V��+��+��+��»�� +�� V��supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.

In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power �V��V ��V�@�� +�� -��W��+��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$Q��^!��_�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the startup timer setting (as ��V��f�

«��>�+�� W��>�� V� �� W�-�V��QQ��W�� V�>�+�� V� ��V�key to change the numeric values.��>�+��@ ��W��>�� @ �� the input.»��>�+�� +��into timer mode and the power supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.»�� +��b ��V��f�»��>�+��V�� +�� W��-ately started.In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power �V��V ��V�@�� +�� -��W��+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

00[Hour]

W-UP.Time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Next wake

up to

07.59.29

4-26

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $Q��{�� -�� +�� b��W��-��f�W��>��To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change ��@ ��W+��!��>�+��enter the startup time (00 to 99 hours).��V�� { �� ?��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously �� @ �� timer startup mode.»��_%%��*�>�+��W��@��startup mode, the mode returns to normal.»�� W�� +��W��+�� -�� +� �� +��V�� { �� +��W�� <��59 minutes and 13 seconds.»��>�+��>��$��V�� +�� W�� +�

NOTE»�� W��{��

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-27

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’� ��̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

ENT

COMM

AND

>Por

t-1

OK P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

ENT

+23k

tAU

SPD

SET

Oper

at.M

ENU

20 E

XT S

EL21

SPD

SET

22 L

AT S

Oper

at.M

ENU

20 E

XT S

EL21

SPD

SET

22 L

AT S

ENT

>Por

t-1

OK P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

Por

t-1

OK>P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

ENT

>Por

t-1

OK P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

ENT

Por

t-1

OK>P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

ENT

>Por

t-1

OK P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

Por

t-1

OK>P

ort-

2 OK

Por

t-3

NONE

EXT

HDG

SEL

ENT

+00k

tMA

NUAL

SPD

SET

ENT

+23k

tAU

SPD

SET

ENT

+00k

tMA

NUAL

SPD

SET

+23k

tAUTO

SPD

SET

+0 0k

tMA

NUAL

SPD

SET

+12k

tMA

NUAL

SPD

SET

ENT

+12k

tMA

NUAL

SPD

SET

ENT

Oper

at.M

ENU

20 E

XT S

EL21

SPD

SET

22 L

AT S

ENT

N 39

°AU

LAT

SET

ENT

N 39

°AU

LAT

SET

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SE

ENT

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SE

ENT

N 39

°AU

LAT

SET

ENT

N 00

°MA

NUAL

LAT

SET

S 00

°MA

NUAL

LAT

SET

ENT

N 00

°MA

NUAL

LAT SE

ENT

N 28°

MANUAL

LAT SE

ENT

N 28°

MANUAL

LAT SE

ENT

Foll

ow u

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Aut

Oper

at.M

ENU

23 S

ync.

Auto

24 S

ync.

Manu

25 F

ol.G

AIN

ENT

Read

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Aut

Runn

ing

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Aut

Succ

ess

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Aut

Mid

ium

clas

sifi-

catio

enu

Ext

erna

l hea

ding

inpu

t sel

ectio

peed

set

tein

g fo

rsp

eed

erro

r cor

rect

ion

Latit

ude

sette

ing

for

spee

d er

ror c

orre

ctio

utom

atic

alig

nmen

t of

mas

ter c

ompa

From

any

scr

een

Nom

al m

ode

4-28

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’� ��̂ ��_�̀ «|{�

COMMAND

Operat.MENU

23 Sync.Auto

24 Sync.Manu

25 Fol.GAIN

Rel. +000.0

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

ENT

Rel. +000.0

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

Abs. 000.0

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

ENT

Rel. +

000.0

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

Abs.

000.0

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

ENT

Rel. +012.3

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

Abs. 123.4

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

ENT

Rel. +012.3

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

Abs. 123.4

Gyro=G1

Sync.Manu

ENT

Operat.MENU

23 Sync.Auto

24 Sync.Manu

25 Fol.GAIN

ENT

100%

Gyro=G

1Fol.GAIN

100%

Gyro=G1

Fol.GAIN

ENT

095%

Gyro=G1

Fol.GAIN

ENT

095%

Gyro=G1

Fol.GAIN

ENT

Operat.MENU

26 ErrRef.MC

27 ErrRef.OP

28 Dev Alrm

ENT

G1:CODE=010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

G1:CODE=090

ExtHDG input

time-out

ErrRef.MC

ENT

G1:CODE=010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

ENT

Dis

play

ing/

rese

tting

cau

seof

mas

ter c

ompa

ss a

larm

Set

ting

follo

w-u

p ga

inM

anua

l alig

nmen

t of

Mas

ter c

ompa

From

any

scr

een

Nom

al m

ode

Mid

ium

clas

sific

atio

enu

in c

ase

of re

leas

ed fa

ctor

Inpu

t the

err

orva

lue

or tr

head

ing

byar

row

key

4-29

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’� ��̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

Oper

at.M

ENU

26 E

rrRe

f.MC

27 E

rrRe

f.OP

28 D

ev A

lrm

ENT

OP:C

ODE=

070

MC1

Tran

smit

fail

ure

ErrR

ef.O

ENT

OP:C

ODE=

110

LAT

inpu

tti

me-o

utEr

rRef

.OP

OP:C

ODE=

070

MC1

Tran

smit

fail

ure

ErrR

ef.O

OP:C

ODE=

110

LAT

inpu

tti

me-o

utEr

rRef

.OP

No e

rror

oper

atio

nun

itEr

rRef

.OP

ENT

Oper

at.M

ENU

26 E

rrRe

f.MC

27 E

rrRe

f.OP

28 D

ev A

lrm

ENT

G1/E

00.

0°

Dev

Alrm ENT

G1/E

.0°

Dev

Alrm ENT

G1/E

.0°

Dev

Alrm

ENT

Oper

at.M

ENU

27 E

rrRe

f.OP

28 D

ev A

lrm

29 W

-UP

Time

ENT

00[H

our]

W-UP

.Tim

ENT

00[

Hour

]

W-UP

.Tim

ENT

18[H

our]

W-UP

.Tim

ENT

wak

eup

17.5

9.59

ENT

COMM

AND

Mid

ium

clas

sific

atio

enu

Dis

play

ing/

rese

tting

cau

seof

C.o

pera

tion

unit

alar

ivia

tion

alar

m s

ettin

tartu

p tim

er s

ettin

Gyr

o st

arts

From

any

scr

een

Nom

al m

ode

In c

ase

of re

leas

ed fa

ctor In

put t

he d

evia

tion

alar

m li

mit

byar

row

key

Inpu

t the

tim

erpe

riod

byar

row

key

Nom

al m

ode

4-30

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’� ��̂ «��_�̀ «�{|

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲

COMM

AND

BZ ST

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼

UP ▲

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

EXT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼UP ▲ GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼UP ▲ GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼EN

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

SHIF

▼

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

Setti

ng th

e sh

ip’s

spe

for s

peed

erro

r cor

rect

ion

Setti

ng th

e la

titud

e fo

rsp

eed

erro

r cor

rect

ion

Auto

rmat

ic m

aste

rco

mpa

ss a

lignm

ent

Man

ual m

aste

r com

pass

alig

nmen

t(R

elat

ive

valu

e al

ignm

ent)

(Abs

olut

e va

lue

alig

nmen

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

ecPr

ess

for 2

sec

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

Pres

s fo

r 2 s

4-31

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’� ��̂ «��_�̀ «|{|

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

UP ▲EN

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

TA DATA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼UP ▲ GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

▼

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

T▼

UP ▲

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

TADA

DATA

ENT

COMM

AND

BZ ST

Set

ting

mas

ter c

ompa

ssfo

llow

-up

gain

Dis

play

ing/

rese

tting

cau

seof

mas

ter c

ompa

ss a

larm

Sta

rtup

timer

set

ting

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

Pre

ssfo

r 2 s

A d

ecim

al p

oint

is d

ispl

ayed

afte

r th

e le

ast s

igni

fican

t dig

it of

the

erro

r cod

Exa

mpl

e of

the

setti

ng v

alue

105%

200%

95%

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

4-32

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3 Maintenance Functions��W�� *�� }�� W�� W�� - �� V��&��

CAUTION_�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� V��>��W�� ̀ �V�@�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��+�� W��V��W��

�� V��

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M30 � � �� 4-3331 � � Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3432 � � % � ��@��% �� 4-3633 � � % � ��@��;�� 4-3734 � � Resetting gyrosphere running time � 4-3835 � � Resetting log � 4-39

36 � � «�� W �>��+ � 4-40

37 � � Correcting Master compass installation error � 4-41

39 � � Log display � 4-43

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

� �� {��W+�� %��

��$��

��&��

��&�&��@ ��

NOTE�� +��+��

4-33

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.1 Permission for Maintenance FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 30

�� W+�� V��^�� >�� V��

NOTE��>�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� W�@��

� Operation with the C.operation unit�� V��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +�� V��b ��V��f��>�+� � ��W��>��+�� V�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V��arrow keys to change the numeric value.�� V�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��»�� V��-��+�� -W��b ��V��V��f�When a wrong password is entered, the ones ��W��>�� +��reenter a password.�� W��W+�� V��@��V��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� {�� +�� +� ��b��W��f��W��>�� +�� W+��>�+�� W��>��@ �� `»#��>�+�� W��>��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� W��b��V�� +�� +f�»��>�+��$��and enter the code again.»��_%%��*�>�+�� V�� { �� +�� V�� W��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

maintenance

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maintenance

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-34

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC SignalsCOMMAND CODE : 31

�� +��V�� W�� -�� |� �� ^��^��

��V�� V��

� Heading (HDG) and quadrant (QUAD) ��; ��b;_��;_�$�� ;_��f

5.00

Output Level

0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

Output

5.00

3.75

2.50

1.25

0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

Heading signal

Quadrant signal

Output Level5.0004.844

2.500

0V- 30°/min-100-120

0°/min 30°/min100120

-300 300Rate of turn

0.156

� Operation with the C.operation unit��*��*��+��% ��MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the simulated DAC sig- ��b ��V��the right).

��>�+� � ��`*\�W��>�� W��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select �� `*\�b�� f��®!�*�b|� �-� �f��;_��b� ��f��;_�$�� ;_��>�+�� W��>�� @�� @��W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V��arrow keys to change the numeric value.��@�� @��>�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��@�� @��W��>�� +�� @ ��+��V��V�� { �� $��’��|� �� % ��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 0.00 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

QUAD 1.23 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

4-35

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� {�� W��W��>�� +�� @�� @��b�� @ �� f�»��!��>�+��W��>�� +�� W��b��Y�� f�� »�� W�� `»#��>�+��@�� -�� +�� +� ��b��W��f�W��>�� W��W+��`»#��>�+� �� @ ��W��-��W+��!��>�+�� @��b��Y��’f�� @�� W�� @ �� +�W��>�� W�� @ ��>�+��>��$��»��>�+�� -��$��(1) the entered value is displayed continuously, (2) the ��@�� +�� @��+�� b�f�� W�� +�� +�bW��>��f��V�� { �� ?�’�� $�»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.Until the COMMAND key is pressed, the simulated output remains in the set level.

Channel No. Output signal1 Analog heading2 Analog quadrant3 � �� 4 � �� $5 � ��

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-36

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master DompassCOMMAND CODE : 32

��% �� >��V^��+��% �-ter compass.*��{�� V^��+��-�� W�� »��;�� remains stopped.

� Operation with the C.operation unit��$�;�� %��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +��V�� deg/s.��>�+� � ��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change �� V��

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise:��$��&��Y��$��?��$&��

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise:�̂ ��̂ $&��̂ �?��̂ �$��̂ ��̂ �Y��̂ �&��̂ ��̂ �$��̂ ��

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: ��^��^��$��^��^�&��^�Y��^��^�$��^�?��^$&��^��

Decelerates the speed clockwise:��$&��?��$��Y��&��$��

��V�� { �� +�� ̂ �$��Z��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� $��{��+�� display remains the present heading value, and the data display indicates the turning speed (00 deg/s).»��>�+��% �� >-V��b��f� ��>�+��-clockwise (CCW).��V�� { �� +��Z��=+��>�+��>�+�� +��speed accelerates.=+��>�+��% �� -ates in the opposite direction.»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.

��V�� { ��|�� +�V��>�+��>�+�� +��Pressing the same key : 00 � 01 � 02 � 03 � 04 � 05 � 06 � 12 � 18 � 24 � 30

Pressing the opposite key: 30 � 24 � 18 � 12 � 06 � 05 � 04 � 03 � 02 � 01 � 00

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

-12 deg/s

Gyro=G1

Rotate MC

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-37

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater CompassCOMMAND CODE : 33

��;�� >��V^��+��Repeater compass.*��{�� ;�� V^��% �� W��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��;�� ;��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +��V�� deg/s.��>�+� � ��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change �� V��

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise:��$��&��Y��$��?��$�&��

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise:�̂ ��̂ $�&��̂ ��?��̂ ��$��̂ ��̂ ��Y��̂ ��&��̂ ��̂ ��$��̂ ��

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise:��̂ ��̂ ��$��̂ ��̂ ��&��̂ ��Y��̂ ��̂ ��$��^��?��̂ $�&��̂ ��

Decelerates the speed clockwise:��$�&��?��$��Y��&��$��

��V�� { �� +�� Z��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� {��+�� -ing display continues to indicate the compass head-ing and the data display indicates the turning speed (0.0 deg/s).»��>�+�� ^�� >V��b��f�� >�+��counterclockwise (CCW).��V�� { �� +��$��Z��=+��>�+��>�+�� +��speed accelerates.=+��>�+��;�� -celerates in the opposite direction.»��_%%��*�>�+��

��V�� { ��|�� +�V��>�+��>�+�� +��Pressing the same key : 0.0 � 0.1 � 0.2 � 0.3 � 0.4 � 0.5 � 0.6 � 1.2 � 1.8 � 2.4 � 3.0

Pressing the opposite key: 3.0 � 2.4 � 1.8 � 1.2 � 0.6 � 0.5 � 0.4 � 0.3 � 0.2 � 0.1 � 0.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

0.6 deg/s

Rotate RC

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-38

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 34

!��b��f��+��V�� +�� |�� +��adequate maintenance scheduling.

NOTE��>�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� W�@��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&�;��;��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +�� V��>�+� � ��W��>��+�� -word. �� V�>�+�� W��>�� V��arrow keys to change the numeric value.�� V�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��»�� V��+�� V�� V��W��>�� +��reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� &��{�� +�� +� ��b��W��f�W��>�� +�� W+��>�+�� W��>��@ �� `»#��>�+�� W��>��an example.��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��continuously and the gyrosphere runtime is reset to ��b��V�� +�� +f�»�� @ �� W��>�+��$�second, and enter the code again.»��_%%��*�>�+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345 h

Gyro=G1

Code=00000

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-39

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.6 Resetting LogCOMMAND CODE : 35

�� +� �� +�

� Operation with the C.operation unit��Y�;��X_\��% ��MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.��>�+� � ��_��W��>�� W��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��_��b�� f� ��\��(Master compass), then the ENT key.��W��>�� +�� W�� V�� V�>�+��+��b��f��b�� log), and press the ENT key.��W��>��+�� V�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� V�keys to change the numeric value.�� V�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��»�� V��+�� V�� V��W��>�� +��reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� Y��{�� +�� ¤�X¥� ��>�+��+��X�b��X��f��X�b�� X��f��>�+��$�� +�� +� ��b��W��f�W��>�� +�� W+��>�+�� W��>��@ �� `»#��>�+�� W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��entered value is displayed continuously and the selected ��b��V�� +�� +f�»�� @ �� W��>�+��$�second, and enter the code again.»��_%%��*�>�+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP

Log =Error

Code=00000

Reset LOG

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-40

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.7 Initializing Backup MemoryCOMMAND CODE : 36

!��

CAUTION*_��_�� +��V�� W+� � ��@�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��»��%�%��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +�� V��>�+� � ��_��W��>�� W��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��_��b�� f� ��\��(Master compass), then the ENT key. The unit ��W��>�� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� V�keys to change the numeric value.�� V�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��»�� V��+��W �>��+�� when the power is turned on next time.�� V�� V��W��>�� +��reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� {�� +�� +� ��b��W��f�W��>�� +�� W+��>�+�� W��>��@ �� `»#��>�+�� W��>�� { ��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+�W��W �>��+�� +��W�� W �>��+�� V��power is turned on next time.(in which the decimal point �� +�� -mand display).»�� @ �� W��>�+��$�� »��_%%��*�>�+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP

Code=00000

Init.MEM

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-41

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation ErrorCOMMAND CODE : 37

��W�� V��+�� V +�� WW��% �� +� �� V��}��^ �^ ��

� Relative value correction��

Example: ��Y��b��f�̈ �� &$�Y��b�� W��@ ��f��&$��b�� f

CAUTION�� ^��W+�� @��@ ��W��{�� @ ��is returned to zero to prevent the setting mistake.

NOTE�� % �� W��V�� W+� �� V��% �� W� �� W��@ �� V�� V��docked.

� Absolute value correction»�� W�� W��W� �� V��>�� heading. Example: b»��@ ��f�̈ �b W�� V��>��f

NOTE��@��W�� W��>�

4-42

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the C.operation unit��<�»��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the current correction setting.There are two correction procedures: relative @ �� W��@ ��-��V��Y��Press the ENT key, then Rel. (relative value cor-��f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��;��b�� @��©�?�f� ��W��b W��YQ�Qf� ��>�+�� V�>�+�� W��>��b�� W��+f��

Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��W��>�� +��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� W�� >�+�� {�� <�� V�� @��@ �� W��@ ��-�� >�+��$��V��W��V��V��

��{ �� +�� @��@ ��compensation

��{ �� +�� W��value compensation

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.5

Gyro=G1

Inst.Err

>123.4

126.0

4-43

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Relative vlaue correction (AE)��W��@ ��W� �� V �� W+��+�� compensation value. ��+�� +�� @ �� b��W��f�W��>�� W��W+��`»#��>�+� �� @ ��W��W+��!��>�+��@ �� b^��?��180.0 degrees).�� @��@ ��W�� b��f�and press the UP key several times. When correction value is negative, M.operation unit displays ��@ �� @ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��

� Absolute value correction (AH)»�� W��}�� W� ��W+��|� +^W� �� @ �� heading.

On the �� +��+�� +�� §�� -�� @ �� b��W��f�W��>�� W��W+��`»#��>�+� �� @ ��W��W+��!��>�+�� b��YQ�Q�degrees).�� @ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��

4-44

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.3.9 Displaying LogCOMMAND CODE : 39

�� +�� V��>�� »��W�� @�� {�� W��W�� {��W�� {��W��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��Q��X_\��% ��%��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.��>�+� � ��_��W��>�� W��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��_��b�� f� ��\��b% �-ter compass), then the ENT key.��W��>�� +�� W��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��+��b��f��b��-mand log), then press enter key.�� displayed. �� W��b��QQf�� »��W�� V�� V�>�+�displays the immediately preceding log, and pressing the upper arrow key displays the immedi- ��+��V�� W��

� Operation with the M.operation unit»�� Q��{�� +�� ¤�X¥� ��`»#��>�+��+��X�b��X��f��X��b�� X��f��>�+��$�� +�� W��log data (0 to 99). (�� W��V�f

��`»#��>�+��V��W��V�� +��X��W��X��bX�V��$��X�� Xf��!��$�� $�� X�V��$�� »��+�� +�� W+��V��»��!��>�+��@�� +��»��_%%��*�>�+��

NOTE�� {��W��V�� +��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =99

Code=080

Time=012345

>123.4

126.0

4-45

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�Example of displaying «EL» �Example of displaying log number

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

�� +�� W��W+�� +�� +� �� +�

Decimal point Display item

Command display Data display

00 00 X��W��00. 00 !��$��00. 00. X�V��$��b ��Xf0.0 00 !��$�� 0.0 00. «�� $�� 0.0 0.0. X�V��$��

�Example of displaying an error code �Example of displaying generated time 1

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

�Example of displaying generated time 2 Example of displaying generated time 3

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-46

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

COMM

AND

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

dMa

int.

30 P

assw

ord

31 D

AC D

ummy

32 R

otat

e MC

ENT

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000 EN

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.**

***

Main

tena

nce

comm

and

isav

aila

ble.

Pass

word

deni

ed.

Try

agai

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

d31

DAC

Dum

my32

Rot

ate

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

QUAD 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT1 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT2 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

0.0

DAC

Dumm

ENT

HDG

0.00

DAC

Dumm

QUAD

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT1

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT2

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

0.00

DAC

Dumm

ENT

HDG

1.00V

DAC

Dumm

QUAD

2.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT1

3.00

DAC

Dumm

ROT2

4.00V

DAC

Dumm

ROT3

5.00V

DAC

Dumm

ENT

enu

disp

lay

mai

nten

ance

mod

Men

u di

spla

y,in

case

mai

nten

ance

ode

has

been

inhi

bite

Acc

essi

mai

nten

ance

mod

utpu

tting

sim

ulat

edD

sig

nal

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

Ent

sim

ulat

edvo

ltage

val

4-47

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ ��_�̀ «|{�

ENT

Angular SPD

00 deg/s

Gyro=G1

Rotate MC

ENT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

31 DAC Dummy

32 Rotate MC

Angular SPD

00 deg/s

Gyro=G1

Rotate MC

Angular SPD

-12 deg/s

Gyro=G1

Rotate MC

ENT

Angular SPD

0.0 deg/s

Rotate RC

Maint.MENU

33 Rotate RC

34 Reset RT

35 Reset LOG

ENT

Angular SPD

0.0

deg/s

Rotate RC

Angular SPD

0.6

deg/s

Rotate RC

ENT

G1 012345h

Gyro=G1

Code=00000

Maint.MENU

33 Rotate RC

34 Reset RT

35 Reset LOG

ENT

G1 012345h

Gyro=G

1Code=0

0000

G1 000000h

Gyro=G

1Code=END

G1 012345h

Gyro=G

1Code=*

****

ENT

Unit=O

PLog =Error

Code=00000

Reset LOG

Unit=OP

Log =Error

Code=00000

Reset LOG

Maint.MENU

33 Rotate RC

34 Reset RT

35 Reset LOG Un

it=G

1Log =Error

Code=00000

Reset LOG

Unit=O

PLog =E

rror

Code=00000

Reset LOG

ENT

Unit=O

PLog =C

ommand

Code=00000

Reset LOG

ENT

Unit=O

PLog =E

rror

Code=0

0000

Reset LOG

ENT

Unit=OP

Log =Error

Code=END

Reset LOG

ENT

Unit=OP

Log =Error

Code=*****

Reset LOG

ENT

COMMAND

Mid

ium

clas

sifi-

catio

enu

Man

ual d

rive

mat

er c

ompa

ssM

anua

l driv

e of

peat

er c

ompa

ssR

eset

ting

gyro

sphe

re ru

ntim

eset

ting

log

From

any

scr

een

Nom

al m

ode

Ent

er p

assw

ord

with

arr

ow k

eys

Sel

ect r

otat

ing

spee

0.0 ,

1 ,

0.2 ,

4 ,

0.5 ,

6 ,

1.2 ,

8 ,

2.4 ,

0 , —

0.1 ,

-0.

2 , —

0.3 ,

-0.

4 ,

-0.5, —

0.6 ,

-1.

2 , —

1.8 ,

-2.

4 , —

3.0

Sel

ect r

otat

ing

spee

00,

01,

02,

04,

05,

06,

12,

18,

24,

30,

-01 ,

-02,

-03 ,

-04,

-05 ,

-06,

-12 ,

-18,

-24 ,

-3

4-48

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=G1

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=END

Init

.MEM

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=***

Init

.MEM

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

ENT

Rel. +

000.

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

000.

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

3.4

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

Unit

=OP

Err

Num

=Co

de=

Time

Main

t.ME

NU37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

d39

LOG

Ref

ENT

Unit=OP

Err

Num

=Co

de=

Time

Unit

=G1

Err

Num

=Co

de=

Time

ENT

Unit=O

P Er

rNu

m =

Code=

Time=

Unit

=OP

Com

Num

=Co

de=

Time

Unit

=OP

Err

Num

=10

Code

=095

Time

=012

345

Unit

=OP

Err

Num

=09

Code

=090

Time

=001

234

Unit

=OP

Err

Num

=01

Code

=151

Time

=000

012

Unit

=OP

Err

Num

=00

Code

=090

Time

=000

012

ENT

Unit

=OP

Com

Num

=025

Code

=100

0Ti

me=0

0123

Unit

=OP

Com

Num

=024

Code

=200

1Ti

me=0

0123

Unit

=OP

Com

Num

=001

Code

=280

2Ti

me=0

0001

Unit

=OP

Com

Num

=000

Code

=370

1Ti

me=0

0000

ENT

COMM

AND

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

Mid

ium

clas

sifi-

catio

enu

Initi

aliz

ing

back

up m

emor

orre

ctin

gin

stal

latio

n er

ror

Dis

play

ing

log

Ent

pass

wor

4-49

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ «��_�̀ «�{+�

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

COMMAND

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

(QUAD)

(HDG)

(ROT1)

(ROT2)

(ROT3)

ENT

Permission for maintenance function

Outputing simulatedDAC signals

Manual drive of master compass

Manual drive of repeater compass

If password is incorrect then the decimal point is not displayed.

press for 2 sec

~�»��!�� { �� +�V��>�+��>�+�is pressed.accelerates（�）：��$��&��Y�

��$��?�$&��decelerates（�）：��$&��?��$��Y�

�&��$��

~�»��!�� { �� +�V��>�+��>�+�is pressed.Accelerates（�）：��$��&��Y

��$��?�$�&��Decelerates（�）：��$�&��?��$��Y

��&��$��

Channel number Entered value

4-50

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ «��_�̀ «|{+

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP▲

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT ENT

Press for2 sec

Press for2 secPress for

2 sec

Press for2 sec

if password is incorrect thenthe decimal point is not displayed.

Resetting gyrosphererunning time

Initializing backup memory Resetting log(Error log) (Command log)

4-51

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ «��_�̀ «�{+

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

EXT GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTUP

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFTENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENTSHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

Correcting master compass installation-error

Relative value correction Absolute value correction

Example of the setting valueAE : -123.4°

Example of the setting valueAH : 234.5°

Press for 2 sec

4-52

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :�� ̂ «��_�̀ «+{+

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

UP GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

ENT ENT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

UP GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SHIFT

ENT

Displaying log(Error log) (Command log)

Press for 2 sec

(Log number)

(Log code)

(upper two digitsof the time of log)

(intermediate two digitsof the time of log)

(lower two digitsof the time of log)

under displaying the log data

(Log number)

(Upper two digits of Log code)

(Lower two digits of Log code)

(upper two digitsof the time of log)

(intermediate two digitsof the time of log)

(lower two digitsof the time of log)

under displaying the log data

4-53

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4 Generation Function��W�� V��Z��@��-��%�Q�� @��V�� V��&�}�� V��V�� &�}�� W�� W�� V��&�&��

CAUTION_�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� V��>��W�� ̀ �V�@�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��+�� W��V��W��

�� V��

Command code

Operation unit Function item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M40 � � �� 4-5441 � � ��V^�� 4-55

42 � – �� 4-56

43 � – �� 4-5745 � – �� 4-6149 � � %�� 4-66

� : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted � �� %� �� »��

� �� {��W+�� %��

��$��

��&��

��&�&��@ ��

��V��V��

4-54

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.1 Permission for Generation FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 40

�� W+�� V��^�� &��>�� V��

NOTE��>�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� W�@��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&�� V��\�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the �� +�� V��b ��V��f��>�+� � ��W��>��+�� V�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� -row keys to change the numeric value.�� V�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � ��»�� V��-��+�� -W��b ��V��V��f�When a wrong password is entered, the ones ��W��>�� +��reenter a password.�� W��W+�� V��@��V��

� Operation with the M.operation unit�{�� &�� +�� +��V��b��W��f��W��>��`»#��>�+�� W��>�� +�� !��>�+��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� W��b��V�� +�� +f�»��>�+��$��and enter the code again.»��_%%��*�>�+��normal.��V�� { �� +�� V�� W��V��+� � ��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generation

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-55

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Parameter for Stepper SignalCOMMAND CODE : 41

��@ �� ^�� »�� ’ ��#��V^�� X��$&��Z�#��V^�� X��&��Z�2

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&��\�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the display ��V�� {��V^�� {�-��V^�� $��V�� >�+� � �� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� V�keys to change the numeric value.�� b��QQf��>�+��W��>�� >�+� � �� W��>�� W��>��Enter the angular acceleration (0000 to 9999) in the same way and press the ENT key. All the ��W��>�� >�+�� W��>�� +�change to the values you set.

� Operation with the M.operation unit�� &��{�� +��-� ��X��+�� +�� {��V^��»��`»#��>�+�� +��-�� {��V^�� +�� X��+�� +�� {��V^�� X��V^��X��b��QQf��X��V^�� X��b��QQQQf��V�� { �� +�� {��V^�� &��Z�2. «�� >�+��>��$�� +�W��>��To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change ��@ ��W+��!��>�+��@ ��@ ��W��>��>�+��>��$�� W�� @ ��»��>�+�� $��@ �� +��+� �� @ ��»��_%%��*�>�+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

24 °/s

0140 °/s/s

Gyro=G1

Stepper

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMAND

BZ STOPENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd

4-56

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 42

�� V�� {�� +�� +�� W�� +�� +�� b�� f� �� W��

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&$�_��\�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-�� +�� W��b ��V��f��>�+� � ��W��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change ��W��b��f��>�+��W��W��>�� W �� W��>�� V�� V�>�+�� W �� b&?��W��?&��W��f��W �� >�+��W��W��>�� >�+��W��W��>�� +�� @ ��+��

NOTE��W �� {��&?��W��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

��W+��^�V��% �� ^�V��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 4800 bps

P=2 4800 bps

P=3 4800 bps

>123.4

126.0

4-57

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.4 Setting Format of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 43

��

��+�� W�� W�� +�� {�� +��

Port 1

Gyro headingb\�;_f

Record 1Record 2Record 3

External azimuth b� �f

Record 1Record 2Record 3

�� V��+�� +^� �� V��

� Ready-made formats:��+�� @�� +^� �� _�� +^� �� b��V�� W��f�� W�� +^� �� V�� W��

Data Ready-made FormatHeading (HDG) $**HDT, $**HDG, $**HDM, $**THS

; ��b;_�f $**ROT

`� ��Z�; ��b`*\�Z�;_�f ²³³`;��²`�`;��²`�`;��²��*�`

�� {^Y� W�� +^� ��

� New formats:»�� +^� �� W��V��{�� W�� V��

� Create a new HDG format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «��W�� «�� b��W�� f�� >��bV��V��f�� +�� »�� +�� »��

�{�� %�% ��!XX�

4-58

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

3 4 5

T, , , ,xxx.x

Field Number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data ID Heading [degrees]Fixed length

T=TrueM=Magnetic“ ” =NULL

Checksum

Checksum Identifier

Terminator

Example of a new HDG format (number of data = 5,starting position=2)

� Create a new ROT format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «��W�� «�� b��W�� f��;_�� >��bV��V��f�� ;_��b�Z��Z�f�� V�� b_��_##f

1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

3 4

, ,,Axxxx.x

Data IDTalker ID

Header

Terminator

Data Field Number

Rate of turn

«–» means bow turns to port

Fixed length

Status:A=Data validV=Data invalid“ ” =NULL

Checksum

Checksum Identifier

Example of a new ROT format (number of data=4,starting position=1)

Character

–/0000.0 [degrees/minute]–/ 00.00 [degrees/second]

� Create a new HDG/ROT format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «��W�� «�� «�� b��W�� f��;_�� >��bV��V��f�� +�� »�� +�� »��

�{�� %�% ��!XX�� ;_��b�Z��Z�f�� V�� b_��_##f

$1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

3 4 5T, ,, ,xxx.x

6,Axxxx.x

Heading [degrees]Fixed length

Data IDTalker ID

Header

Terminator

Data Field Number

Charactor

Rate of turn

«–» means bow turns to port

Fixed length

Status:A=Data validV=Data invalid“ ” =NULL

T=TrueM=Magnetic“ ” =NULL

Checksum

Checksum Identifier

Example of a new HDG/ROT format (number of data=6,starting position [HDG]=1, starting position [ROT]=4)

–/0000.0 [degrees/minute]–/ 00.00 [degrees/second]

4-59

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&��_��#��\�� MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the �� +�� b ��V��on the right).

� Selecting the output port, record number, and types��>�+��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��W��b��&f�� >�+��W��W��>�� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��W��b��f�� >�+��W��W��>�� \�;_��W��>�� V�� V�>�+�� b\�;_�� f�� >�+�� W��>�� +��`*\��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the data type (HDG, ROT, HDG/ROT, or NONE), ��>�+��_�� W�� +�� +Z��V�W��>��&�� V�� V�>�+��+�� >�+�� +�� +^� �� V�� V��

� Selecting a ready-made formatThe display shows the current settings (as ��V��f� �� +^� �� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to se-�� W�� +^� ��-� �� +�� W��on page 4-57.�� +^� �� >�+�� W��>�� -�� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). ³��_�+� ��?&��W��

�� >�+��W�� +��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

HDG

Already

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$**HDT

T=1000 ms

>123.4

126.0

4-60

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Creating a new formatThe display shows the current settings (as ��V��f� �� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� b�{��²f�� upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).�� >�+�� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). ³��_�+� ��?&��W��

�� >�+�� W�� b* ��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� V�keys to change the numeric value.��W�� >�+�� +��V�� +��

· Example of creating an HDG format

��V�� { ��̀ *\�� +�� b��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.�� >�+��W��>�� Press the ENT key again. The starting position ��W��>�� >��b�>��f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��Z��>��>�+��>��W��>�� Z% �-��W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select True, Magnetic, or None, and press the ENT key. ��V�� b�� f��W�� - ��+��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

>123.4

126.0

4-61

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

· Example of creation an ROT format

��V�� { ��;_�� +�� b��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.�� >�+��W��>�� Press the ENT key again. The starting position ��W��>�� >��W��>�� V�� V�>�+��Z��>��>�+��>��W��>�� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ��b�Z��Z�f�� >�+�� Z’�� W��>�� V��V�� V�� V�>�+��Z�� >�+��V�� b� ��f��W�� +��

· Example of creation a HDG/ROT format

�� { ��`*\Z;_�� +��-�� +��V�� -�� b`*\��f� �� b;_��f�� >�� the HDG and ROT.��>�� +�� -�� V��V�� >�V�� V�� b�� Z� ��f��W�� +��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

°/min

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

True

°/min

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

HDG Pos= 01

ROT Pos= 03

Ck Sum = ON

>123.4

126.0

4-62

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.5 Setting Format of Input PortCOMMAND CODE : 45

�� V�� Z;_��{�� Heading and ROT input:�� ;_�� W��;_�� -�� Position input:�� W��Speed input:�� W�� W�� signal or pulse signal.

�� V��+�� +^� �� b�� W��W��Vf� ��V�� b ��W �� W��Vf�

� Ready-made format:��+�� @�� +^� �� _�� +^� �� b��V�� W��f�� W��

Data Ready-made Format��}��b��*f ‘%’�*��’=��’`��’�\

Latitude (POS) GGA, GLL

Heading (HDG) HDT, HDG, HDM, HRC, THS

; ��b;_�f ROT, HRC

�� {^Y� W�� +^� ��

� New formats:»�� +^� �� W��V��{�� W�� V��

� Create a new SPD format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «�� b��W�� f�� >��bV��V��f�� b>��>�Z�f

4-63

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

$1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

3 4, , ,x.x

Data field NumberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data ID Speed Checksum

Checksumidentifier

Terminator

Example of a new SPD format (starting position = 2, unit=KNOT)

[knot]

� Create a new POS format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «�� b��W�� f�� >��bV��V��f

$1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

3, ,aabb.cc x

N/S

Data Field NumberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data ID Latitude

Terminator

Checksum

ChecksumIdentifier

aa:[degrees]

Example of a new POS format (start position=1)

aabb:Fixed length

� Create a new HDG format�� «�� b� >��»*��* � �»*f�� «�� b��W�� f�� >��bV��V��f�� V��@��;_��»��_��;_��

heading.

1 2

,x x x x x * hh

< CR > < LF >

, , x.x

Example of a new HDG format (start position=3)

Data field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data ID Heading [degrees]

Terminator

Checksum

ChecksumIdentifier

4-64

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&Y�»�#��\�� %��!�and pressing the ENT key switches to the display ��V�� -�� { ��}��}��b� ��f��$��and the heading to ports 1 and 2.��>�+��}��b��*f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��b��^�f��}�� ^��}��>�+��}��W��>�� }��b�_�f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��b��^�f��^��}��>�+��}��W��>�� *�W��>�� V�� V�>�+�� W��>�� +��b��*��POS, or HDG).

��*�b��+f� ��>�+�� Cre- �� }��

��_��b��+f� ��>�+�� Cre- �� }��

��`*\� ��>�+��

� Creating a ship’s speed format��V�� { ��*�� +�� +Z��V�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��+�� press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current �� +^� �� W��>��upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-� �� >�+�� +��V�� +�� V��V�� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� b�{��²f�� V�� V�>�+�� (A to Z, cyclic).�� >�+�� W��>�� Press the ENT key again. The header stops W��>�� b��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-meric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD Port= 3

POS Port= 2

HDG P1,P2

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD Port= 3

$VMXXX

Str Pos= 01

Ck Sum = ON

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD Port= 3

Already

$VMVSD

>123.4

126.0

4-65

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � �� W��>�� >��b�>��f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��Z��>��key. The display changes as shown in the upper �� W��>��Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a unit (Knot or Km/h), and press the ENT key. ��V�� }�� +��-��

� Creating a ship’s position format��V�� { ��_�� +��

�� +Z��V�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��+�� press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current �� +^� �� W��>��upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-� �� >�+��-�� +��V�� +�� V�� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� b�{��²f�� press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).�� >�+�� W��>�� Press the ENT key again. The header stops W��>�� b��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� V�� V�>�+�� -meric value.�� >�+��W��>�� >�+� � �� W��>�� >��b�>��f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��Z��>��>�+��V�� }�� +��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD Port= 3

knot

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

POS Port= 2

Already

$**GLL

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

POS Port= 2

$HEXXX

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

>123.4

126.0

4-66

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

� Setting serial input ports for heading��V�� { ��̀ *\�� +��The display shows whether the heading is input to the serial ports 1 to 3. Either SET (yes) or NONE (no) is displayed.��W�� W��>-��W�� V�>�+��;�>�+�� W��>��£��}��£�_��}�� V�>�+��;�>�+�»��£�_��}��W�� +�� »��£��}�� +�� { ��

�� +Z��V�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��+�� the ENT key.

When Already is selected here, the current �� +^� �� W��>��upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-� �� >�+��;_�� W��>��&�� lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.��;_�� ENT key. �� +��

NOTE��;_�� _��;_�� @��

��V�� +�� V��{�� W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� b�{��²f�� V�� V�>�+�� (A to Z, cyclic).�� >�+�� W��>�� >�+� � �� W��>�� b��f�W��>�� V�>�+�� W��>�� and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 1

Port-1 SET

Port-2 SET

Port-3 NONE

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 3

Already

$**HDM

$**ROT=NONE

>123.4

126.0

4-67

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� >�+��W��>�� Press the ENT key again. The starting position ��W��>�� >��b�>��f�W��>�� V�� V�>�+��Z��>��key. The display changes as shown in the lower ��;_�� W��>��$��upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.��;_�� >�+�� +��-��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 3

$HEXXX

Str Pos= 01

Ck Sum = ON

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 3

$**ROT=NONE

>123.4

126.0

4-68

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.4.6 Miscellaneous FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 49

��{��_�Z_##��V��

� Mute function»��_��W�� V�� +� � �� -tion is used when the gyrocompass is connected to the center alarm unit.

� Bow Swap Function»��_�� @��W+��?��V��W��inverse contact signal.

� Operation with the C.operation unit��&Q�%��\�� %��!�and press the ENT key switches to the display ��%�� Press ENT key again .��%!��W��>�� V�� V�>�+��%!��b%!��f�or the Bow swap Function (Bow swap).�� >�+��W��>�� V�� V�>�+��_�ZOFF.Press ENT key.

«��_%%��*�>�+��

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTE «��W��{��V��%��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Mute =OFF

Bow Swap=OFF

Misc.

>123.4

126.0

4-69

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

COMM

AND

ENT

Plea

se i

nput

gene

rati

onpa

sswo

rd.

0000

Plea

se i

nput

gene

rati

onpa

sswo

rd.

0000

0 ENT

Plea

se i

nput

gene

rati

onpa

sswo

rd.

****

Gene

rati

onco

mmand

isav

ailabl

Pass

word

deni

ed.

Try

agai

ENT

Gene

rat.

40 P

assw

ord

Gene

rat.

40 P

assw

ord

41 S

tepp

er42

Out

Por

ENT

Gene

rat.

40 P

assw

ord

41 S

tepp

er42

Out

Por

24° /

s01

40° /

s/s

Gyro=G1

Step

per

25° /

s01

40° /

s/s

Gyro

=G1

Step

per

25° /

s01

40° /

s/s

Gyro

=G1

Step

per

26° /

s01

50° /

s/s

Gyro

=G1

Step

per

26° /

s01

50° /

s/s

Gyro

=G1

Step

per

Gene

rat.

40 P

assw

ord

41 S

tepp

er42

Out

Por

ENT

P=1

480

0bps

P=2

480

0bps

P=3

480

0bps

ENT

P=1

480

0bps

P=2

480

0bps

P=3

480

0bps

P=1

480

0bps

P=2

480

0bps

P=3

480

0bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2

00bp

sP=

3 4

800b

P=1

480

0bps

P=2

3840

0bps

P=3

480

0bps

24° /

s01

40° /

s/s

Gyro

=G1

Step

per

ENT

Men

u di

spla

y of

gene

ratio

n m

ode

Acc

essi

ng g

ener

atio

n m

ode

Set

ting

the

follo

w-u

p sp

eed

for s

tepp

er s

igna

ettin

g co

unic

atio

npr

otoc

ol o

f out

put p

ort

From

any

scr

een

Nom

al m

ode

4-70

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «|{�

COMM

AND

Gene

rat.

43 O

ut F

orm

44 r

eser

ved

45 I

n Fo

ENT

Port

=1 Re

c=1

GYRO

ENT

Port

=1Re

c=1

GYRO

Port

=2Re

c=1

GYRO

Port

=3Re

c=1

GYRO

Port

=1Re

c=2

GYRO

Port

=1Re

c=1

GYRO

Port

=1Re

c=3

GYRO

ENT

Port

=1 Re

c=1

GYRO

Port

=1 Re

c=1

EXT

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG

Alre

ady

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

ROT

Alre

ady

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG/

ROT

Alre

ady

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

NONE

No f

orma

ENT

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG

Alre

ady

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG

New

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HD

TT=

1000

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HDG

T=10

00 m

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HD

MT=

1000

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**THS

T=10

00 m

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HD

TT=

1000 m

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HD

TT=

20 m

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HD

TT=

200

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HDT

T= 5

00 m

ENT

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

ROT

Alre

ady

ENT

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

ROT

New

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**RO

TT=

1000

ENT

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG/

ROT

Alre

ady

Port

=1 R

ec=1

GYRO

HDG/

ROT

New

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$**HR

CT=

1000

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEH

RCT=

1000

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$PYD

KHT=

1000

4EN

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HCH

RCT=

1000

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

Mid

ium

clas

sifi-

catio

enu

Set

ting

form

at o

f out

put p

ort

4-71

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEX

XXT=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

200

msDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

500 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 00

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 03

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

True

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

True

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

True

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

OFF

True

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ONTr

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ONMa

gnet

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ONNo

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEX

XXT=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

20 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

0 ms

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

500 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

°/m

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

° /mi

n ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

° /mi

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

OFF

° /mi

5ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

° /mi

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Str

Pos=

Ck S

um =

OFF

° /s

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

A/V

= ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

A/V

= OF

ENT

In c

ase

sent

ence

was

Gan

d m

etho

d w

as N

ewIn

cas

e se

nten

ce w

as R

and

met

hod

was

New

4-72

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «+{�

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

20 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

0 ms

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

500

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEX

XXT=

1000

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

Dat

Num=

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

ROT

Pos=

Ck S

um =

OFF

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Magn

etic

°/m

inA/

V =

P=1

R=1

GYRO

None

° /mi

nA/

V =

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /s

A/V

=ON

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =OF

COMM

AND

In c

ase

sent

ence

was

G/R

and

met

hod

was

New

From

any

scr

een

Com

man

d M

ode

4-73

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

COMM

AND

Gene

rat.

43 O

ut F

orm

44 r

eser

ved

45 I

n Fo

ENT

SPD

Port

= —

POS

Port

= —

HDG

ENT

SPD

Port

= —

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= 2

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= 3

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= P

POS

Port

= —

HDG

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= 1

HDG

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= 2

HDG

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= 3

HDG

ENT

SPD Po

rt=

1PO

S Po

rt=

2HD

SPD

Port

= 1

POS P

ort=

2HD

SPD

Port

= 1

POS

Port

= 2

HDG

ENT

SPDPo

rt=

1Al

read

y$V

MVSD

SPD

Port

= 1

NEW

$HEX

ENT

POSPo

rt=

2Al

read

y$*

*GLL

POS

Port

= 2

NEW

$HEX

ENT

SPDPo

rt=

1Al

read

y$V

MVSD

SPD

Port

= 1

Alre

ady

$**V

SPD

Port

= 1

Alre

ady

$**V

SPDPo

rt=

1Al

read

y$**V

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

Alre

ady

$**G

POSPo

rt=

2Al

read

y$*

*GGA

ENT

ENT 7

ENT 8

HDG

Port

= 1

Port

-1 N

ONE

Port

-2 N

ONE

Port

-3 N

ONE

HDG

Port

= 2

Port

-1 N

ONE

Port

-2 N

ONE

Port

-3 N

ONE

HDG

Port

= 3

Port

-1 N

ONE

Port

-2 N

ONE

Port

-3 N

ONE

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

Port

-3 SE

TPo

rt-2

NON

EPo

rt-1

NON

EHD

G Po

rt=

Port

-3 N

ONE

Port

-2 N

ONE

Port

-1 N

ONE

ENT

HDG

Port

= —

Port

-1 N

ONE

Port

-2 N

ONE

Port

-3 N

ONE

ENT

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

y$*

*HDM

$**R

OT=N

ONE

HDG

Port

= 3

NEW

$HEX

XX$*

*ROT

=NON

ENT

From

any

scr

een

Nor

mal

mod

Mid

ium

dlas

sifi-

catio

enu

Set

ting

form

at o

f inp

ut p

ort

4-74

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

POS

Port

= 2

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

ENT 6

HDG

Port

= 3

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= ON

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

Alre

ady

Alre

ady

$ **H

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**T

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

y$*

*HRC

SPD

Port

= 1

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 00

Ck S

um =

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= O

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= ON

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= OF

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

knot

SPD

Port

= 1

Km/h

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

NONE

HDG

Port

= 3

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**H

DG$*

*ROT

=$*

*HDG

SET

NONE

SET

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

HDG

Port

= 3

Set

ting

form

at o

f SP

D d

ata

in N

ewS

ettin

g fo

rmat

of P

dat

a in

New

Set

ting

form

at o

f HD

G d

ata

in n

Set

ting

form

at o

f HD

G d

ata

in c

urre

4-75

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ ��_�̀ «�{�

Gene

rat.

47 r

eser

ved

48 r

eser

ved

49 M

isc.

ENT

MUTE

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=ON

Misc

. ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Mute

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

. ENT

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

idiu

mcl

assi

fi-ca

tion

men

Mis

cella

neou

sFu

nctio

4-76

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

�� :��@�Q��’�� :��’�� ̂ «��_

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

SHIF

COMM

AND

BZ ST

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

ENT

GYR

O H

EADI

COM

MAN

DDA

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

SHIF

ENT

COM

MAN

GYR

O H

EADI

NGG

YRO

HEA

DING

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYR

O H

EADI

NGG

YRO

HEA

DING

SHIF

TUP

SHIF

TUP

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYR

O H

EADI

NGG

YRO

HEA

DING

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYR

O H

EADI

NGG

YRO

HEA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

AND

DATA

GYR

O H

EADI

NGG

YRO

HEA

DING

SHIF

T▼

ENT

Per

mis

sion

for

gene

ratio

n m

ode

Set

ting

of fo

llow

-up

spee

dfo

r ste

pper

sig

nal

Follo

w-u

p sp

eed

limit

Follo

w-u

p ac

cele

ratio

n lim

itFr

om a

ny s

cree

Nor

mal

mod

ress

for

2 se

Pre

ss fo

sec

Pre

ss fo

sec

Pre

ss fo

sec

Pre

ss fo

sec

Pre

ss fo

sec

Pre

ss fo

sec

Exa

mpl

e of

the

setti

ng�

X��

&¸Z�

Exa

mpl

e of

the

setti

ng�

X��$

��¸Z�

if pa

ssw

ord

is in

corr

ect

then

the

deci

mal

poi

nt is

t dis

play

ed.

4-77

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.5 Heading Signal Selection»��{�� +�� »�� -��+�� W��W+��{��

4.5.1 Prohibition of Heading Changeover»�� @� ��W��V��+�� {�� V�� V�� @�� W��+�� rapid course change. �%�Q�� W�� %�Q�� W��V�� W+�� b³�f��b³$f�� @�� W�� +��C/O PRF» at the system status display area.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

C/O PRF

It means prohibition of heading changeover

³�� W�� @��³$�� W�� |��

� The commands that cannot be executed during prohibition of heading changeover�� `� ��>�+�b\��Z�� f

�� b�_%%��*�$�f

�� b�_%%��*�$$f

�� % �� b�_%%��*�$�f

�� % � �� % �� b�_%%��*�$&f

4-78

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 4.Function Explanation and Operation Method >

4.5.2 Heading Changeover Method�� @��W��

� Changeover to external heading�� >�+��@��$�� V�� +��-pass to external device.

�� EXT key

�� %�� EXT key

��\�;_��>�+��+�� V�� >�+��+�� V��

NOTE\�;_$�>�+��@ ��%�Q��=Z�

� Selection of external heading device�� @��_�� W��_�� _%%��*�$��{�� @��

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

��&�$�� _%%��*�$��

NOTE�� {�� @�� W��{�� %��

5-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5. Troubleshooting

�� (1) If it is suspected that there is an error in a heading shown by a Repeater compass

or an Autopilot:��>��}�� ^��

��$�� $$��»��+� ��@ ��

b��&�$�$� ��&�$�� f��}�� >�� % �� ;�-

�� »��+� �� ;�� -pass and Master compass.

b��Y��$�� f��>�� +��% �� V�� +��

�W��@ ��»�� -mand.

b��&�$�&� ��&�$�Y�� f

(2) If an abnormal sounds can be heard from the Master compass:�� +��+�� % ��

Repeater compasses.

�� % �� ;�� {�� V�� +�� -��{��

b��&�Y�� f� ³��»�� >�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

(3) If you desire to know the gyrosphere running time:�� W�� +�� ̀ �V�@�� @ �� W��W� ��unless the running time was reset when the gyrosphere was replaced.

b��&��&�� f

(4) If you desire to know the phase current of the gyrosphere:�� W�� +�� Y�

b��&�� f

(5) If you desire to implement automatic re-startup using the timer:�� W�� $Q�

b��&�$�� f

(6) There is a possibility that abnormality has occurred on the selected device.b��&�Y�� f

5-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.2 AlarmThe gyrocompass system generates an alarm in the following situations.

~� �:��Q�~� ��’��~� ��

�:��:��:��:�� :��

YES

Displayed the error content (C.ope) Push COMMAND key to display normal mode.

Sounding the buzzer Push BZSTOP key to stop the buzzer sounds.

Blinking the alarm LEDAlarm factor cancelled?

Lighting the alarm LED Recovery

Turning off the alarm LED

Alarm factor

Appended to the current alarm list Operate the COMMAND 26/27 to confirm.

Recorded on the error log Operate the COMMAND 39 to refer the error log.

Alarm generation

5.2.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated��+�� +�� V�� W�� W�� X�*�W��>�� +�� +� �� V�� { �� \�;_��`�;��#�»X!;�� W��W+��=��_��>�+��»�� when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.»�� +�� V��=��_��>�+�� X�*��»��V�� V�>�+�� +�� _%%��*�>�+�� +��_;%�X�%_*��

�� W��Y�$�&�

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

—.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

5-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

��|�|� �� ;��_�� $��$<�� +��W+�� W�@�� »�� +�� W�� $��W��&�$�� $<��W��&�$�<�� W��Y�$�&�

5.2.3 Cancellation of Alarm��W��W+��=��_��>�+��»�� V��=��_��key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.»�� +�� V��=��_��>�+�� X�*�� X�*�>�� V��W�� Y�$�&�� V��

� Cancelled by system restoration�� W+�� +�� V�� {�� @�� V��W�� W+��

� Cancelled by checking the power supply, connected device�� W+��V��V��+�� W�� +��@�� V��W�� W+��V��+�� @��

� Cancelled by manual operation or changing the setting�� W+�� -ting. ex) ERROR CODE : 080 , 151

� Cancelled by exchanging to spare parts»�� V��W�� W+��{��

� The service call is necessary �� W�� >��V��@�� +�� >�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

5-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures»�� V��W��V�� W�� W�� &�»��W�� W+��V�� >�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

� ERROR CODE LIST��W��W��¤�¥�� %��

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

��\+��

010[10]

\+�� Y��$��min. or more. (40 min. �� f

�� W�� W+� W�� +��+��

The gyro sphere replacement is nec-essary. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation] ��»�� @�� —

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. (*2)

��»��{�� @��-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

$��»@��

020[20]

«@�� <Y��seconds. (no inverter output voltage)

��V��b�@��f��

��

��>�� assy. (*1)

��>�� W��%�%�»��=*��%��%�»�’�=*��%��=*�� ;��% ��

[Correspondence method under navigation]��»�� @�� —

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. (*2)

��»��{�� @��-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

021[21]

Low phase current�� <Y��seconds. (with inverter output voltage)

�� V��+-��

��

30’s : Memory Failure (The memory test is executed at start up)

030[30]

;_%�� ;_%��>�� is generated.

%��+�� ;�� ^ ��W�+��b³�f

031[31]

;�%�� ;�%�� ZV�� generated.

%��+��

³�� >�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� _�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� `�V�@�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��+�� {�� W�+�� {��

³$�� >�� @�� {�� @��³�� ;�� +�� W��*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to Master compass.

5-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

&��= �>��W ��+�@��

040[40]

= �>��W ��+�@�� -ure.

‘�� +�W �>-��W ��+�� $�Y�’�or less.

%��+�W �>��W ��+�� ;�� ^ ��W�+��b³�f

[Correspondence method under navigation]»��V��+��-ously, all set values are kept. However ��V��+��@ ��settings are initialized. (*3)

Y��#��V^��

050[50]

#��V^�� *�@� ��Y�� $��-onds or more.

��V^�� V��large value.

��#��V^�� %��@��

��{�� $��$&�� V��^��

��*�� V^�� command 25.

� ;�� ^ ��W�+�� ;�� V�� Replace the container. (*1)� Check wiring and connections.

��_�� V��

060[60]

�V�� _��+��seconds or more

�V�� unit.

��;�� b³�f

[Correspondence method under navigation]�� +�� W�� W��+�� @ �� W��

<�� W��V�� % ��

070[70]

�� =�� >��V�� =�� >��V��=��% ��

�� W��>��@��V��W�-

tween the C.operation unit and the Master compass.

��>�� W�� units.

��{�� =�� W�� +��Master compass.

��b%��;%»��X�=*��%�%�»��=*��%�»��=*��;%»��X�=*��f�b³�f

071[71]

Invalid data ��@��V��W�-tween the C.operation unit and the Master compass.

�� W+��

��>�� W�� units.

��>��#\��

?�� % �� b�� f

080[80]

Master compass alignment � ��b��^�� f

��=�� >��V�� -

nection

��Exchange the photo sensor assy. (*1)��>��

[Correspondence method under navigation]»�� +�� % ��compass, operate the command 24 ��

³$�� >�� @�� {�� @��³�� ;�� +�� W��*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to Master compass.

5-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

Q��{��

090[90]

External heading inputTime out

More than 10 seconds interrup-��{��

��>�� @ �� the connected device.

��>�� unit.

��>��V��

091[91]

��{�� signal (*4)

��@�� or parity error occurs in external signal.

��>��V��b�� -��+�� f

��>��W �� V ��protocols.

092[92]

��>��external heading signal

��% ��W+��

��>��W��V��+�� connected device.

��>�� W�� b�� +��FG line.)

��>��-vice.

093[93]

* � ��@ ��{�� heading signal

��+�� device.

Repair the connected device.

094[94]

External ROT input time out

More than 10 seconds interrup-��{�� ;_��

��>�� @ �� the connected device.

��>�� unit.

��>��V��

096[96]

��>��external ROT signal

��% ��W+��

��>��W��V��+�� connected device.

��>�� W�� b�� +��FG line.)

��>��-vice.

097[97]

* � ��@ ��{�� ROT signal

��+�� device.

Repair the connected device.

�� (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

100

Speed signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-��

��>�� @ �� the connected device.

��>�� unit.

��>��V��

102

��>��signal

��% ��W+��

��>��W��V��+�� connected device.

��>�� W�� b�� +��FG line.)

��>��-vice.

103 * � ��@ ��signal

��+�� device.

Repair the connected device.

�� (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

110

Latitude signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-��

��>�� @ �� the connected device.

��>�� unit.

��>��V��

³$�� >�� @�� {�� @��³�� ;�� +�� W��*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to Master compass.

5-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

112

��>��latitude signal

��% ��W+��

��>��W��V��+�� connected device.

��>�� W�� b�� +��FG line.)

��>��-vice.

113 * � ��@ �� signal

��+�� device.

Repair the connected device.

120’s :Serial input port protocol error

120 �� -nal input port 1

��@�� or parity error occurs in serial input signal.

��>��V��b�� -��+�� f

��>��W �� V ��protocols. (*1)121 �� -

nal input port 2

122 �� -nal input port 3

�Y��*�@� �� b��&�$�Q� W��@� �� f

151

Deviation alarm �� W��V��gyro heading and external azimuth exceeded the alarm value.

��>��+��@ ��>��% �� {-

�� @��»��+��-� �� W�� >��+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��»��{-�� W�� >�� @-ice department.

[Correspondence method under navigation]»�� @�� -tion mode, switch to the hand naviga-tion mode according to the situation.

³$�� >�� @�� {�� @��³�� ;�� +�� W��*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to Master compass.

5-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures

5.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater compass

�� X�*�W��>��V��;�� W��>��+�� X�*�� ;��

090100

110120

130

140150160170180190200210220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320 330 340 350 000 010 020 030 040

050060

070080

FAIL

RUN SYNC DIMMER

Fail Indicator LED (RED)

Junction Box (MKN019) Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)

� Repeater compass error contents and countermeasure

Fail indicator LED condition Error contents Causes Countermeasure

X�� Normal

Light on º ��!�;�%�� ;_%��

=��>��V��!�W� ��in Junction Box

�{�� !� W� ��(*1)

Blink Light on one time per1.6 seconds.

�� Broken down optical sen-�� ;�� compass

Exchange optical sensor b»��W�� W+�� +f�(*1)

º��º��º��»1.6 sec» ¼

�� V��Optical sensor

Restore connectionb»��W�� W+�� +f�(*1)

Light on two times per1.6 seconds.

�� W��V��% �� and Repeater compass

�� wire

�� V��inversely

Restore connection

ºº�ºº�ºº��»1.6 sec» ¼

º: Light on ��X��

5-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 5.Troubleshooting >

5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater compass IndicationThe Repeater compass indication is automatically aligned with the Master compass indication when ��V��»�� |��̀ �V�@�� @�� W��>��% �� +� ��;�� W�� @��W�� »��% �� +� ��;�� +�

NOTE��>�� ;�� V��}��»�� ^��% �� V�� V��;�� compass card reading.

� Procedure using the zero adjustment switch»��;�� % �� +�� switch to align the indication. Press this switch for 2 seconds or more. The Repeater compass card turns and the

zero of the compass card is aligned with the pointer to correct the shift. � ��;�� V��@��@ ��»�� ^�� W��W��V�to align the indication.

� Procedure in the case where the zero point photo-sensor fails»��W�� W+�� +�V�� V��(1) Push Zero adjustment switch more than 2 seconds. � b��;�� V�� Y��f� ��# �� V�� (2) Push Zero adjustment switch. (The Repeater compass card will turn round rapidly)(3) Push Zero adjustment switch when the outer Repeater compass card (360 degrees/

revolution) value go below 10 degrees. (Rough adjustment) The compass card will turn round slowly.(4) Push Zero adjustment switch when the compass needle agree with the 0 scale of inner

Repeater compass card.� �� W��# �� V��W�� ;��

shows same heading as Master compass heading. (Fine adjustment)

If you failed manual null point adjustment, try again the above procedure.

Blank Page

6-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

�� 6.1.1 Power Supply

CMZ900B CMZ900SMain power supply $&�’�*��§��ª��̂ ��ª � ��

��Z��Z��YZ$$��’��Y�Z��̀ ��b³�f ��Z��Z��YZ$$��’��Y�Z��̀ ��Backup power supply $&�’�*��§��ª��̂ ��ª�b³�f $&�’�*��§��ª��̂ ��ª�Power consumption�b$&�’�*�f

�� {��Y��§��Y�� W��;��

�� {��&�<��§��Y�� W��;��

�� +�� {��$��§��Y�� W��;��

�� +�� {��Y��§��Y�� W��;��

Power consumption (AC) �� {��$Y�’��§��$�’�� W��;�� b³�f

�� {��$Y�’��§��$�’�� W��;��

�� +�� {��Q��’��§��$�’�� W��;�� b³�f

�� +�� {��’��§��$�’�� W��;��

³�� _�� »�� V��%�;�$<�

6.1.2 Input SignalCMZ900B CMZ900S

�� speed-error correction

��W�� 1 circuit (*1) 1 circuit�� 200 pulses/n mile,

or serial IEC61162-1� ��

X �� speed-error correction

��W�� 1 circuit (*1) 1 circuit�� Serial IEC61162-1 � ��

Heading signal ��W�� 1 circuit 3 circuit�� Serial IEC61162-1 � ��

�� W�� 1 circuit, contact � �� Bow swap contact input 1 circuit, contact (*1) 1 circuit, contact C/O PRF singnal input 1 circuit, contact (*1) 1 circuit, contact

*1: Optional: The C.operation unit is necessary

6.1.3 Output SignalCMZ900B CMZ900S

Repeater compass signal ��W�� 3 circuits 8 circuits �� Serial IEC61162-1 sen-

tence� ��

Stepper heading signal ��W�� 1 circuit, capacity 0.3A / 1A (option)

4 circuit, capacity 1 A

�� $&�’�*��^W�� +��1/6 degree/step

� ��

�� Z� ��^��^��signal

��W�� 3 circuits, individual gen-�� W��

� ��

�� Serial IEC61162-1 / -2 � ��

6-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

CMZ900B CMZ900SAnalog heading andquadrant signals

��W�� 1 circuit each � �� Y�’�*� � ��

� �� ^��^�� W�� 3 circuits, individual range ��W��

� ��

�� Y�’�*��$�� Z��

� ��

Serial ship’s speed input ��W��_��

��W�� 1 circuit (*1) � ��

�� serial IEC61162-1 � �� ’��^�� W�� 1 circuit, contact � ��

Signal status «Open» or «closed» when no voltage is applied

� ��

\+�� W�� 1 circuit, contact � �� Signal status «Open» or «closed» when

�+��

Heading selection signal ��W�� 1 circuit, contact 1 circuit each, contactSignal status Closed when Gyro is se-

lectedClosed when each sensor is selected

Gyro running signal ��W�� 1 circuit , Contact (*1) � �� Signal status «Open» or «closed» when

running� ��

�+�� W�� 1 circuit, contact (*1) � �� Signal status «Open» or «closed» when

�+��

Deviation Alarm ��W�� 1 circuit, contact (*1) � �� Signal status «Open» or «closed» when

W��

Buzzer stop ��W�� 1 circuit, contact � ��

*1: Optional: The C.operation unit is necessary

6.1.4 Setting Time and AccuracySettling time ��Y��b��+�� +�W�� W��$�� fNorth-pointing accuracy ��©��$Y��Z��½�b½�W�� fFollow-up accuracy ��% {��V^�� Z�

6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal operating conditions)

��V W�� &��W��

��V W��@�W� �� ^��?��?��̀ �

��Y��^��?��$Y�̀ �

��^��$Y��Y��̀ �

Operating temperature range ^��Y��§�YY��^��§�Y��b% �� f^�$Y��§�YY��b=� ��;�� f

6-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

6.1.6 External Input /Output signal Specifications and Circuits

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��Serial signal input RD1A/RDMA

RD1B/RDMB

RD2ARD2B

RD3ARD3B

CurrentRegulatorDiode.

CRDR

RDxA

RDxB

��W�� W��bThe C.operation unit is necessary)��* � ��̀ � ��b�� f� �� b�� f��;��@��^�� ^�� &?��W��* � �� {

Ship’s speed pulse input

LPPLPN/BSC 5V

2.2K¾

47K¾

0.01¿FLPP

LPN

��W�� W��b�� +f�� $��Z�� _��b��^��f��@��^��

Repeater compassheading output

$&’_!�GNDSD1RASD1RB

$&’_!�GNDSD2RASD2RB

��

$&’_!�GNDSD8RASD8RB

RS422 Driver

SDxRA

SDxRB

GND

24V

��W�� W��b=^�+��f 8 (S-type)�� +��;�&$$�b�� @��|��@ ��;�&$$��

or RS485)�� ^�� &?��Z�Q��W�� W�� * � �W��?�� W�� Parity None��* � ��

Format Transmission period Remarks��*�` 1 sec ��+� ��Q��W��**HRC 1 sec ��+� ��Q��W��HEHDT 50 ms

6-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��

Stepper head ing output

REF1SS11SS21SS31COM

REF2SS12SS22SS32COM

REF3SS13SS23SS33COM

REF4SS14SS24SS34COM

REF

SS1

SS2

SS3

ReceiverMastercompass

+24VDC REF

SS1

SS2

SS3

ReceiverMastercompass

+24VDC

AlarmCir.

Com.

< 4 wiring > Control circuit < 5 wiring > Control circuit

��

REF-SS1

REF-SS2

REF-SS3

+24VDC

0 6/6°3/6

1°

��W�� W��b�%�Q��=f�Z&�b�%�Q��f��_%��’�b��\�*f��;�#��@�� $&�’�*��Y�’�*��b�� f��;�#�� {��_��_��b$&�’�*��^W�� +��f

Serial signal output SD1ASD1BSG

SD2ASD2BSG

SD3ASD3BSG

RS422 Driver

SDxA

SDxB

��W�� W��b»��$^�f�� $�b»��$^�Z^$�� W��f�� +��;�&$$�b�� @��|��@ ��;�&$$��

or RS485)�� ^�� W��&?��Z��?&��W��* � �� »��$^��Z�̂ $

6-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��

Analog headingquadrant signaloutput

HDGCOM

QUDCOM

LF398 1K¾

0.1¿F

1K¾HDG or QUD

COM

��

5.00

Output Level

0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

Output

5.00

3.75

2.50

1.25

0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

Heading signal

Quadrant signal

� �� ^��^��output

ROT1COM

ROT2COM

ROT3COM

LF398 1K¾

0.1¿F

1K¾ROT

COM

Signal FormatOutput Level

5.0004.844

2.500

0V- 30°/min-100-120

0°/min 30°/min100120

-300 300Rate of turn

0.156

6-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��

�� }�� Speed Signal *��W��_��

RD1RARD1RBSG

RS422 DriverRD1RA

RD1RB

��W�� W�� +��;�&$$� (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A or RS485)�� ^�� &?��W��* � �� »��$^��{

Master compass Ex-ternal Buzzer Stop Signal Input

(MKM026)

BSPBSN

�� W��stop.

4.7K1K

CPU

C.opera t ion Un i t External Buzzer Stop Contact Input(MKC326 / MKN018)

BSPINBSNIN

�� W��stop.

2.2K

CPU

Bridge Selection Con-tact Signal Input(MKC326 / MKN018)

BRGSELLPN / BSC

Contact closed at AFT.Contact open at FWD.

��W��_��`� �-ing Changeover Con-tact Input(MKC326 / MKN018)

SELOFSELOFC

Contact closed at C/O PRF.

Master compassHeading SelectionContact Output

(MKM026)

GMCOM GM

COM

Selected headingContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Open CloseGyro heading Open CloseExternal heading Close Open

Gyro FailContact Output

(MKM026)

\�;_�#�»XCOM GYRO FAIL

COM

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Open CloseNormal Open CloseFail Close Open

6-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��

Master compass��V�� Output

(MKM026)

�’�’� NV

NVC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Open ClosePower ON Close Open

Gyro FailContact Output

(MKC326)

1FAIL1FAILC 1FAIL

1FAILC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Power FailContact Output

(MKC326)

1PFO1PFOC 1PFO

1PFOC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close Open

Normal Close Open

Fail Open Close

RunningContact Output

(MKC326)

1RUN1RUNC 1RUN

1RUNC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenRunning Open CloseNot running Close Open

System Fail Contact Output

(MKC326)

FAILFAILC FAIL

FAILC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

6-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

Signal Name Abbreviation ��{��’�!��

Deviation AlarmContact Output

(MKC326)

*�’*�’� DEV

DEVC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Buzzer StopAcknowledge

(MKC326)

BSTOPBSTOPC BSTOP

BSTOPC

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Normal Close Open# ��b ��W��f Open Close

Output Heading Contact Output

(MKC326)

G1� �COM

COMEXTG1

Contact is made when the sensor is selected.

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data SentenceInput/output Sentence �� DataInput ‘%’�* �*�� Ship’s speed

‘=� IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed’`� IEC61162-1 Ship’s speed’�\ IEC61162-1 Ship’s speedGGA IEC61162-1 LatitudeGLL IEC61162-1 LatitudeHDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingHRC �*�� `� ��Z�; ��THS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

Output HDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingROT IEC61162-1 ; ��HRC �*�� `� ��Z�; ��*�` �*�� `� ��Z�; ��THS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

6-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

6.3 Setting Dip Switches;��@��@�� +��V�� W�+�� V��V��V�� -�� *��

DIP SW1 DIP SW2 DIP SW3 DIP SW4

Bit 1 Bit 8

OFF

Bit 1 Bit 8

OFF

Bit 1 Bit 8

OFF

Bit 1 Bit 8

OFF

Master compass M.MAIN BD ASSY DIP switch

� ��V��V��

CAUTION_�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� V��̀ �V�@�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��+�� W��V��W��

� Dip-switch settings and functions on Mastercompass

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW1 1 reserved ��_##�� OFF

2 OFF3 ��W �� $�b³�f �?&��W�� &?��W�� OFF4 ��W �� b³�f �?&��W�� &?��W�� OFF5 ��

port 1 (*1)��b� W��f�� b� ��6-10).

OFF6 ON7 ON

8 �� port 2 (*1)

��b� W��$f�� $�b� ��6-10).

OFF

DIP SW2 1 ON2 ON3 ��

port 3 (*1)��b� W��f�� b� ��6-10).

OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 ��{�� b³�f ��b� W��&f��{��

�� b� ��^��f�OFF

7 OFF8 OFF

DIP SW3 1 ;_��{�� b³�f External Internal OFF2 �� ;_�� b� W��Yf��

ROT 1 output range (page 6-11).OFF

3 OFF4 �� ;_��$�� b� W��f��

ROT 2 output range (page 6-11).OFF

5 OFF6 �� ;_�� b� W��<f��

ROT 3 output range (page 6-11).OFF

7 OFF

6-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW3 8 Use C. operation unit Used Not Use ONDIP SW4 1 �� +�� Keep latest value NULL OFF

2 ��W �� &?��W�� Q��W�� OFF3 Reserved ��_##�� OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 System Reserved ��_##�� OFF7 OFF8 OFF

³�� «�� V��

(Table 1) Setting of output sentence for serial port 1DIP SW 1 Data

FormatTransmission

PeriodBit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

OFF OFF OFF HDT 200 ms

ON OFF OFF ROT 200 ms

OFF ON OFF HDT/ROT 200 ms

ON ON OFF THS 200 ms

OFF OFF ON THS/ROT 200 ms

ON OFF ON ��*�` 200 ms

OFF ON ON HRC 200 ms

(Table 2) Setting of output sentence for serial port 2DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Data

FormatTransmission Period

Bit 8 Bit 1 Bit 2 at 4800 bps at 38400 bps

OFF OFF OFF HDT 200 ms 20 ms

ON OFF OFF ROT 200 ms 20 ms

OFF ON OFF HDT/ROT 200 ms 20 ms

ON ON OFF THS 200 ms 20 ms

OFF OFF ON THS/ROT 200 ms 20 ms

ON OFF ON ��*�` 200 ms 20 ms

OFF ON ON HRC 200 ms 200 ms

(Table 3) Setting of output sentence for serial port 3DIP SW 2 Data

FormatTransmission Period

Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 at 4800 bps at 38400 bps

OFF OFF OFF HDT 200 ms 20 ms

ON OFF OFF ROT 200 ms 20 ms

OFF ON OFF HDT/ROT 200 ms 20 ms

ON ON OFF THS 200 ms 20 ms

OFF OFF ON THS/ROT 200 ms 20 ms

ON OFF ON ��*�` 200 ms 20 ms

OFF ON ON HRC 200 ms 200 ms

6-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

(Table 4) Setting of external heading format

DIP SW 2 DataFormatBit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8

OFF OFF OFF HDM

ON OFF OFF HDG

OFF ON OFF HRC

OFF OFF ON HDT

ON OFF ON THS

(Table 5) Setting of analog ROT 1 output range

ROT 1 ROT 2 ROT 3Output Range

DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3

� Dip-switch settings and functions on MKR056 / MKN019

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW4 1 System Reserved ��_##�� OFF

2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 ��

port ��b� W��f��-�� b� ��^��f�

OFF6 OFF7 ��W �� Q��W�� &?��W�� OFF8 System Reserved ��_##�� OFF

(Table 6) Setting of input sentence for serial portDIP SW 1

Data FormatBit 5 Bit 6OFF OFF $HEHDTON OFF $HCHDT

OFF ON $GPHDT

6-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

6.4 List of Initial Values�� {��»�� @ �� V��

� C.Operation Unit

Items ValueExternalheading selection Port-1 NONE

Port-2 NONEPort-3 NONE

Speed input AUTO / MANUAL MANUALSetting value 0 knot

Latitude input AUTO / MANUAL MANUAL

Setting value ��@� �� \��Z�� {�� Speed Port No. P (Pulse port)

Already / New –Format –

Latitude Port No. –Ready-made / New –* � �� –

External heading 1 Port No. –Ready-made / New –* � �� –ROT input NONE

External heading 2 Port No. –Ready-made / New –* � �� –ROT input NONE

External heading 3 Port No. –Ready-made / New –* � �� –ROT input NONE

6-13

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� Master compass

Items ValueFollow-up gain Gain ��ªMaster compass alignment REL / ABS –

Correction value ��= �� _;�^��W �� &?��W��

�_;�^$�W �� &?��W��_;�^��W �� &?��W��

_�� PORT-1 \�;_ REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat= HEHRCPeriod= 200 ms

REC 2 –REC 3 –

� � REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-2 \�;_ REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat = HEHRCPeriod = 200 ms

REC 2 –REC3 –

� � REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-3 \�;_ REC 1 Output = HDGFormat = HEHDTPeriod = 1 s

REC 2 Output = ROTFormat = HEROTPeriod = 1 s

REC 3 –� � REC 1 –

REC 2 –REC 3 –

Stepper signal control Maximum angular velocity $&��Z�Maximum angular acceleration �&��Z�2

6-14

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

6.5 External Product View� Master compass

420 300

500

50210

420

AA17

331

260±0.5

260±

0.5

200

HOLE126

4-ø13 HOLE

MKM026-1

MAINTENANCE AREA

BOW SIDE

CABLE ENTRYSECTION A-A

Unit: mm

6-15

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� AC Adapter

FAN

240±

0.5

366

4-ø12 HOLE

275±0.5

300 130

MKR027

EXHAUSTINHALATION

CABLE INLET(30 x 110)

TERMINAL BOARD

INHALATION

EXHAUST INHALATION

PLUGING HOLECOAMING(32 x 90)

240±

0.5

366

4-ø12 HOLE

275±0.5

300 115

MKS070

6-16

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� Control box

297227±1

2-ø14 HOLE

520

470±

142

1450636

175

208±1

472±

127

2±1

348±1

430±

307±2

HOLE

8-ø12 HOLE

472±

127

2±1

376297

500

420

208±1348±1

8-ø12 HOLE

175 12

3.265

MKC326-W

MKC326-F

CABLE INLET (60 x 140)

EARTH TERMINAL

PANEL CUT

CABLE INLET (50 x140)

Unit : mm

6-17

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� Repeater compass / Junction Box / Stand & Bracket

138

120 ± 1

102

132

± 1

190

(235

)12

0 1

456

378

000N

270

180S

090E

170

ø 246 ± 1

(141

ø 360 ± 1

6-ø19 HOLE

ø 150

ø 40027

1170

ø 384

ø 376

4620

011

391

180

200 3-ø18 HOLE20

ø 40

378190

386

138

104

± 0.

114 ± 0.53-ø17 HOLE

160

1230

245

ø170

130

Repeater Compass MKR050 Connection Box

MKN019

Horizontal StandKX223A

Horizontal Bracket KX201A

BASE LINE

Tilting Bracket KX213

BOW

DRAIN

Unit : mm

6-18

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� Steering repeater compass

90E

270

000

180

177±0.5

177±

0.5HOLE

182

4-C13

4-ø6HOLE

192

40 68

4816

(20)(8)

(115)

(20)

4-M5 x 0.8

192

240

40 92

210±0.5240

192

210±

0.5

4-ø7 HOLE

210±0.5

210±

0.5HOLE

(192)

4-M6

(192

)

(20)(2.5)

(115)

(20)

4-M5 x 0.8

120±0.5

220±

0.5

ø20 HOLE

4-M6

(20)(8)

(115)

(20)

4-M5 x 0.8

192

4-ø7 HOLE

120±0.5

220±

0.5

240

3.2

HOLE

(192)

4-ø6 HOLE

(192

)

225±0.5

225±

0.5

546

240

40 92

240

(20)(8)

(115)

(20)

4-M5 x 0.8

270

000

180

546

270

000

180

546

270

000

180

546

E EE

MKR056-S/F2

MKR056-F1

MKR056-P

MKR056-W

PANEL CUTPANEL CUT

PANEL CUT MOUNTING DIMENSION

View Z

Unit : mm

6-19

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

��

� C.Operation Unit

192

177±0.5

81±0

.5HOLE

182864-C13

4-ø6HOLE or M5

4-M5 x 0.8

ø8

2 40 40

129

225240

144

4-ø6 HOLE

225±0.5

129±

0.5HOLE

230

134

4-C13

4 — ø6 HOLE or M5

4-M5 x 0.8

ø8

40366

MKR040

3.2

PANEL CUT

Attached cable (Max. 10m)

Unit : mm

� Junction Unit

TB501 13

TB521 13

TB511 13

TB531 13

TB5518

170±0.5

190

120±

0.5

140

(70) 42

4-ø6 HOLE

12TB54

(100)

MKN018

Max 10m

7-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation7.1 Inspection

«��V�� +�� +�� V��>��

7.1.1 Daily Inspection�� V��

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

��Y��W+��{�� Y��(See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

��>�� ;�� -� �� V�� % �� Once/departure

3��}��@ ��X �� >�� }��

�� W+��{�� $�� $$��b��&�$�$� ��&�$��f

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-�� +�� W��@ �� Once/day

DC Battery input ��>�� *��@�� (MKR027/MKS070)are regulated voltage.%�;�$<�� b�^�fMKS070:TB1 3-4

Once/year

NOTE��>�� ;�� V��}��»�� ^��% �� V�� V��;�� compass card reading.

7.1.2 Regular Maintenance��V�� +� ��

NOTE_��@��*�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

Inspection Item Procedure

1 Gyrosphere �� V�� W ��

2 Container �� b�{�� V�� f��V��W ��V^��

3 Supporting Liquid Replace4 �� b;�� V�� > W��+��+�f

7-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere

CAUTION_�+�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X�� V��>��W�� `�V�@�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��+�� W��V��W��

7.2.1 Precautions During Removal� The gyrosphere should not be removed from the Master compass until at least

1.5 hours has elapsed since the power has been turned.

� Make sure that the surrounding area of the Master compass is clean, there is ample lighting and prepare all required equipment and tools before beginning work. To avoid damaging the nuts and bolts, be sure to use the correct tools such as drivers and wrenches for each part.

� Be sure to do the following to ensure proper reinstallation of the gyrosphere:�� @�� >��|��W�� W�+�

�� +��W��

�� W��

�� «��V�� W��>�� V�� W��them to ensure correct reconnection.

� Do not remove any part that does not need to be disassembled.

� Never disassemble the gyrosphere.

CAUTIONPrecautions in handling the gyrosphere

�� `��+��+�V��W�� W�� +��>��

�� *��+��*��+�� +�� mechanism or lead to personal injury.

�� *�� W��+��

Precautions in handling the container

�� `�� +�V��W��

�� *��*��+�� +�� lead to personal injury.

7-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere

� Equipment and tools to be prepared=� >��$��V��@��V��@��+�� W��V ��|��+��stand and container stand.

Gyrosphere standContainer stand

Syringe

Beaker

� Removal of the container from the master compass and take-out of the gyrosphere

Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

� X�� W�� @��

� ;��@��V��@��

� ;��@��

Pull out the center pin.

� �� W� >�� @�� V�

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.

Loosen the nut and rotate the hook to outer side.

Remove the upper container.

� ;��@��|��V��^��

� � >��+��V��

CAUTION!�� V��V��>��

NOTE�� W�� |��

�� |�� |�� V ��disposal trader.

�� _�� +�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��

7-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

� Procedure for removing the gyrospere Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

Disengage the connectors (4 terminals).

Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.Loosen the three containe bolts. Rotate counterclockwise while lifting the container and remove.Be careful not to let the container hit the floor.

Container bolts

Remove the screw from the vent hole.Remove the screw from the vent hole.

Vent hole

Remove the cap from the center pin.Turn the cap of the center pin to remove it.

7-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Pull out the center pin.Pull out the center pin.

Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.Remove the drain screw.

Drain all the supporting liquid from the drain hole while holding the container as horizontally as possible.

After draining, reinsert the screw in the drain hole.

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.Disengage the connectors (two terminals).

7-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Remove the hook that fasten the upper and lower containers together.Loosen the long nut while pressing by minus driver until the hook rotates to outside.Loosen all long nut in the same way.

Long nut

Remove the upper container.Lift the upper container and remove.Take care in the direction of all hooks.

Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.Remove the supporting liquid, from the funnel-shaped portion with a syringe (remove all liquids).

CAUTION Do not upset the gyroshere.

7-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.When taking out the gyrosphere, hold the side in a location with no gold line on it.

Place the removed gyroshpere on to a gyrosphere stand.

7-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere� Equipment and tools to be prepared

�� +��+��W� >��|��$��V��@��screwdriver, Gyrosphere stand and Container stand .

Container stand

Center pinSyringe

Beaker

Gyrosphere stand

� Installing the gyrosphere and attaching the container to the master compass»�� +�� W�� W�� >��>��>�� @��

CAUTION;�� V��

�� _��

�� _�� V

�� _��

�� V ��@��V

Cleaning.

� �� }��>��+��b��V�� V��f� ��»��>��V�� W��

� �� V��V�� +��lower container.

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.

Pour the supporting liquid into the container.

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.

Seal the vent hole.

Connect the connector.

� �� W��

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.

7-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

CAUTION!�� V��V��>��

� Procedure for installing the gyrosphere

Cleaning.�� }��>��+��b��V�� V��f� ��»��>��V�� W��

CAUTION��+�� V�� V�� >��W�� >�� V�� *�� >�� +�� *��W�� *��W��+�� *��V��

Gyrosphere

Lower container

Upper container

Be careful, do not damage to the electrode when you wipe off the stain with cloth .please wipe from center of the electrode to outside direction

Side band electrodeof the gyrosphere

Lower electrode ofthe container

Follow-up electrode of container

Band electrode of container

Center Pin

Top

7-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

Drain screwconfirm that an O-ring is attached.

Lower container

Drain

Confirm that there is an O-ring the lower container.

Hold the gyrosphere as shown in the photo, and with the container tilted, place it into the container. Hold the sphere on the opposite side of the gold line.

Do not tilt the gyrosphere beyond the required limit (30º).

After placing the gyrosphere in the container, position the container and gyrosphere horizontally.　　

Gyrosphere

O-ring

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.Confirm that there is an O-ring the lower container, then align the knock-pin and fit both the upper and lower containers to each other.

Hole

7-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Rotate the hook to inside and tighten the long nut by driver until the upper container closes adherence to lower container.

Tighten six long nut. confirm that the upper container closes adherence to lower container.

Minus screwdriver

Rotate the hook to inside

Pour the liquid into the container.Prepare the supporting liquid in the beaker.

Insert the funnel into the hole of the center pin after put off the vent hole screw.

pour liquid slowly from the beaker into the funnel until it begins to overflow from the vent hole. (Liquid is used by 650 ml in total)

Vent hole

7-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.Confirm that there is an O-ring on the center pin and then insert the center pin.

O-ring

Put the cap on.

Seal the vent hole.Seal the vent hole with screw.

Wipe off any liquid that overflows from the vent hole with the rag.

Connect the connector.Fasten the connectors (two terminals) that connect the upper and lower containers.

7-13

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.Insert the container bolts into the hanging slit of master compass and rotate clockwide the container.

Hanging slit

Container bolts

Mating marks

Align the mating marks when engaging the container.Then tighten the container bolts.

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.Connect the connector.

7-14

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.2.4 Replacement of Lamps in the Repeater Compass

(1) Place the repeater compass on a stand with the repeater card face down and draw alignment marks on the lower cover and the body.

(2) Remove the eight mounting bolts from the lower cover.

(3) Raise the lower cover to separate it from the body.

(4) hold the lower cover in this position while replacing the illuminating lamp or lamps.

(5) Align the alignment marks, and then tighten the eight bolts.

7.2.5 Replacing the Fuse��W�{�b%��$�f� �� b%�;�$<Z%��<�f��+��»�� ;�� {^&��

CAUTION ��V��+�V��

�� +��+�� +�

7-15

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

��|�� &��?��%�Q��+�� @�� +��

� Lamp test»��W��>�� +� ��W��W+�� >�+�� See section 3.2.2

� Repeater signal output»��W�� See section 4.3.4

� Analog signal output»��W�� W�� +� ��@�� See section 4.3.2

7.2.7 Preparation of Supporting Liquid��{�� +��Y��X��|�� % �� X��|�� @�� >�� V �*��>�>��X��|�� V +��W��W+��>�� V �*��>�>��X��W�� @�� W�� +�� +�� |�� V�� V �� {��W�� @��»��W�� +�� {�� Q��use the protection tool so as not to inhale.

Distilled water 1.8 LGlycerin 145 mLBenzoic acid 3.2 g

NOTE «�� @��+�� |��@� ��@ ��V�W��V�� +��V �� >��

7-16

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7.3 Precautions During InstallationExercise care with the following items when installing a gyrocompass.

7.3.1 Vibration Measures��V��% �� V ��V�� W� �>��W� �>�� ;�� -� �� W�� @�W� ��

7.3.3 Service Area�� % �� W��V�

50 mmor more

500 mmor more

300 mmor more

Front

A-1

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table

1.1 Speed ErrorThe speed error is an error generated when a ship in which a gyrocompass is installed sails a course �� V��»��@ ��}�� b»�� >��+��+�� f

��^��>��+�� +�� W �� }�� }�� }�� ^��>��-��+��+��»��@� ��V �� @� �� W�� ^��>��+�� W��V�� ^V��

1.2 Determining Speed Error

«�� W�@��̈ �’�� = K cos ��Since � is a small value, sin� = � (radian) = 1 / 57.3 � (unit: degree)From these equations, ��̈ �Y<��’��/ 900 cos �»��V�� { �� |� ��b� = 0), the gyrocompass course is N (�� ¨��f�� }��>�� ¨�Y<��Ä��Z�Q��¨��Q��¨��Y&�}��@ ��W��V��$<��Q�� }�� V�W��V�� ̂ ��Y&�}�̈ ��Y?��}�� W�@�� @� ��V �� W��W� ��W+��W�� @� ��V ��W� ��W+� �� {��V��V��W��V��}�� V��V�� W��W+��V�� W��

NN’

BVÅÆ

ÆC Å

A0 ÇcosÈ

È��X �� }��

��|� ��b�W��Q��>��f’��}��b>��fÅ��\+�� Æ��

A-2

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(1) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration table (Table-1);�� W� �� W��b� W��^�f��@ �� -��W+��W�� @ �� @� ��V ��W+� ��@ �� @� ��V ��#��{ �� &�� >��@ ��V� �� W�� ^��¨�$?�Q�� +�� &�� Y�� >��»�� Y��§��̈ ��Y��

(2) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration chart (Chart-1)

�� X�� }��’�� {��

�� *� V� �@�� }�� V��+�� Å�V�� Å��@� ��V �� V ��

� Next, draw a straight line that crosses that intersection and is parallel to the horizontal axis, ��V��

�� V�W�� W� ��W�� @��@ �� @��

Example:�� $�>�� &�� +�� $��$�� @� ��W+�&��V ��V��*� V� �@�� b f�� $�>�� {�� V��Å�¨�&��bWf��*� V� �� bWf� �� V��̈ �&��b�f�� V�W�� b�f��V��<<��@�� Q�$��

A-3

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Table-1 Speed Error Calibration Table*�� W+�� W��

Lati-tude

Course(degrees) Speed (knot)Northward Southward 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40

0�~

20�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.10.10.0

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

0.80.80.60.50.40.20.0

1.01.00.90.70.50.30.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.40.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

1.71.71.51.20.90.50.0

2.12.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.60.0

30�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.20.10.0

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

0.90.90.70.60.50.30.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.51.41.21.00.80.40.0

1.71.61.51.20.90.40.0

2.02.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.32.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.32.52.21.50.70.0

40�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.30.20.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.30.20.0

1.01.00.80.70.60.30.0

1.31.21.10.90.70.30.0

1.71.51.41.20.90.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.82.62.21.50.70.0

3.33.22.82.31.80.80.0

45�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.30.30.30.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.11.00.90.80.50.30.0

1.41.41.21.00.70.40.0

1.81.71.61.20.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.51.10.60.0

2.52.42.11.71.20.60.0

2.82.82.52.01.50.70.0

3.23.22.82.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.22.51.80.90.0

50�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.30.30.20.10.0

0.80.80.70.60.40.20.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.61.51.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.81.61.41.00.50.0

2.42.22.01.71.20.60.0

2.82.62.32.01.40.70.0

3.23.02.62.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.80.90.0

4.03.83.42.82.01.00.0

55�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.40.30.20.10.0

0.90.90.80.60.40.20.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.30.0

1.81.71.51.30.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.61.10.60.0

2.72.62.31.91.30.70.0

3.23.02.72.31.50.80.0

3.53.43.22.51.70.90.0

4.03.83.52.82.01.00.0

4.44.33.83.12.21.20.0

60�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

1.00.90.80.70.50.30.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.60.0

2.52.42.11.81.30.70.0

3.12.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.81.00.0

4.24.03.52.82.01.10.0

4.64.54.03.22.31.20.0

5.04.84.33.52.51.30.0

65�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

1.21.21.00.90.60.30.0

1.81.71.61.30.90.50.0

2.42.32.11.71.20.60.0

3.02.92.62.11.50.80.0

3.63.53.12.61.80.90.0

4.24.13.63.02.21.10.0

4.84.64.23.42.41.30.0

5.55.24.63.82.71.40.0

6.15.85.24.33.01.50.0

70�

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.51.51.31.10.70.40.0

2.22.21.91.61.10.60.0

3.02.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.73.63.22.71.91.00.0

4.54.33.93.22.21.20.0

5.25.04.53.72.61.30.0

6.05.85.24.23.01.50.0

6.86.55.84.63.31.60.0

7.57.26.55.23.61.90.0

A-4

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Chart-1 Speed Error Calibration Chart

FA0401

A-5

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass

2.1 Gyro��+�� +�� {�� @�� {��W+�� @��+��+�� W�� {�� +�� b#��f��+�� {�� @�� +�� W�� b �� f� �� @�� {�� +��

B’A

Figure 1 Figure 2

` �� V��b�f�� {��+��b#��$f��+��V��b�f� �� +��V�� +�� ==}� {��V�� |�� @�� {�� +�� V��V�� |�� ==}� {�� @�� V�� +�� +��-@�� {��+�� b�� Ä�� f�� |�� @��V��

(1) Quantitative: Angular momentum × precession speed = torqueb$f� *��’�� V��#��

A-6

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

2.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass�� V�� V��#�� @��+��+��+�� V��+��V�� {��»��W�� @��W�� {�� V� �� W�� @��

�� =+� �� |� �� @�� +�� {�� W�� +�� ^��>��+�� W��V�#��&��V�� }�� @��+��, at point p on latitude �� W��{�� sin � (spinning motion around the vertical axis)��cos � (tilting motion along the horizontal meridian)

Precession speed

Angular momentum

Torque

Figure 3

Weight

Ê��½

Ê��½ ½

�� @��+��

�|� ��

#��&

«��+��V��#�� V�� =�� V�� V��^=� {�� b#��Yf�� +��-mains the same. However, since the inclination at this point on the earth remains the same as time elapses, ��^��^=� {�� ^��B goes down relative to the horizontal plane. Then, precession is carried out as the weight generates a torque to return the A-B axis to the horizontal position. When end-point A arrives at the meridian with the gyro tilted, the tilt is at its maximum and end-point A contin-ues to turn towards the west. When end-point A enters ��V�� V��|�� W+��weight gradually decreases and precession stops when end-point A reaches the west end. Then, like-V��^��V� ��W��-V ��»�� gyro spins around with north at its center in an elliptical motion as shown in Figure 6.

B Ê��½

Ê��½

��

� ��

*�V

#��Y

#��

`��

A-7

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

«� ��+�� +�� +�� +�� {�� V�� ^�� W�� -� �� V�@��V��^��@� �� V��V�� V +�� @��V ��

��+�� {�� W�� cos ��b��f�� }��

�� W�@��W��^��>��`�V�@�� +�� +��{�� +�� V��+�� >��W+� �� @��+��@�� W+�� +�� +�� W+� ��{�� {�� V�� @�� V��»�� V��+�� ^��>��+�� ^��>�� +��@��+�� +��W�� @�� {�� @��+��W�� ^��>��+�

2.3 Gyrocompass Errors2.3.1 Speed Error

;��{^��*�� W��

2.3.2 Acceleration Error»�� }�� |��+��W�� @��+��+�� W��V��W��+ �+�� ^��>�� +��@ ��V�� @��+�V�� @ ��V�� }�� W+� �� @��+�� @��+��+��%�Q��@�� b�� +�� +��V�� @�� W��85 minutes.)

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error»��+��+��W��@�W� ��}�� @�W� ��+�� ^V�� {�� ^�� {��+�� +��@�W� ��+��W��V��V�� {�� V��+�� @��W��V��@�W� ��+�� ^�� {�� east-west axis, thus preventing the rolling and pitching error. In addition, a damper mounted to the �� @�W� �� W��

A-8

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-3 Block Diagram

3.1 MKC326-F/-W Block Diagram

A-9

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.2 MKC326-S Block Diagram

A-10

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

V81

16W

TP1

TP2

FL1

TP5

2 JP1

+Vin

-Vin

+V -V

TP3

TP4

/DC

PS1

1,2

3,4

1,2

3,4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 36

1,2

4,5

1,2

4,5

F1 F2

51,

3,4

V81

16W

Q(O

ptio

TP1

TP2

FL2

TP5

2 JP1

+Vin

-Vin

+V -V

TP3

TP4

/DC

PS2

CN 4

+Vin

-Vin

+V -V

2 JP2

FL3

/DC

PS3

1,2

4,5

1,2

4,5

1,2

3,4

1,2

3,4

1,2

3,4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 36

F1 F2

1,2

3,4

1,2

3,4

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3

1 3

1,2

3,4

1,2

3,4

1 2 3 4 5 6

10 129 299 29 for N

E B

K U

P (

=0)

for D

C B

K U

P (

=1)

1 224

VOU

1 2TB20 24

VOU

5 6

24VO

D9 10

24VO

D13 14

24VO

D1 2

24VO

D5 6

24VO

D9 10

24VO

D13 14

F3F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9

TB21

R.T

MIN

V812

3VN

C/D

VCC

(5V)

F11,

23,

TP1

TPG

TP2

TPG

S.T

MIN

V81

23V

1,2

3,4 1 2CN

6 7CN

31 2 3

1REF

M1 5

2REF

M6 10

3REF

M1 5

4REF

M6 10

F1 F5 F9 F13

TB30

TB31

JP1

1 2

F147

,48

49,5

1TB

28,2

930

C.T

MIN

V81

23V

47,4

849

,50

28,2

930

(5V

)

/DC

R04

TP2

TPG

2TP1

TPG

1 TP2

TPG

TP1

45,4

645

,46

3.3 MKC326 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-11

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Serial output 1(Repeater compass)

Serial output 2(Repeater compass)

Serial output 3(Repeater compass)

Serial output 4(Repeater compass)

Serial output 5(Repeater compass)

Serial output 6(Repeater compass)

Serial output 7(Repeater compass)

Serial output 8(Repeater compass)

3.4 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (R.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� R.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VN) Test points and LED arrangement chartsTGP1

TP1

TP3DS1

TP2

A-12

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Steppersignaloutput 1

Steppersignaloutput 2

Steppersignaloutput 3

Steppersignaloutput 4

3.5 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (S.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� S.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VW) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

TP2

TGP1

TP1

JP1

TP3

TP6

TP5

TP4

A-13

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

C.O

PER

ATI

ITM

KR04

0 ME

MBR

E S

8123

RA/

C.M

AIN

ASS

8123

C.D

ISP

SYV8

123V

BLE

V81

16V

A/V

8221

WT/

/WV

/V81

16V

1 2

ZZE

C.T

MIN

AL B

D A

SSY

V81

23VZ

JUN

CTI

ITM

018

* N

orm

ally

this

boa

rd is

incl

uded

in M

326

or M

327.

LAC

3.6 MKR040&MKN018 Block Diagram

A-14

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

C.O

TIO

N U

NIT

C.M

AIN

C.T

MIN

C.D

ISP

3.7 MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-15

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (1) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-16

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (2) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-17

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (3) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-18

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (4) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-19

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.8 (5) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-20

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� C.DISP BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points arrangement charts

TP6

TP5

TP10

TP8

TP7

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) Test points arrangement charts

TP19TP23, 30 TP20, 25, 27

TP1TP2

TP4

TP33

TP36

TP5

TP31, 32

TP6 TP3

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) LED arrangement charts

LED8LED1LED11LED9LED4

LED10LED3LED5LED2LED6LED7

A-21

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� C.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VZ) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

JP1JP7 JP3 JP5 JP11

TP1 JP4JP2TPG2 JP6

TPG1

TP2

A-22

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

M. P

S B

D A

Y(V

8123

)

NTA

INE

R A

Y(V

8123

/DP

)

ATI

IT A

025

SGP N

3BS

S35

G/M

FC NV

C24

1RA

1RB

2RA

2RB

3RA

3RB

NIN

T3C

TB2

TB1

TB3

P NP N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 43 46 47 48 1 2

24V

D39 40

24V

D44 45

M.T

MIN

(V81

23W

M. P

INV

(V81

23W

SLI

P R

ING

M. M

AIN

(V81

23W

27 28 30 31

V81

14U

TRA

(V81

23TC

)

V81

14U

8114

ITM

026

I/F A

8114

I/F B

V81

14S

V81

14U

A/U

V81

14U

FAN

TOR

(V81

23G

Ana

log

G/Q

outp

Ana

log

T ou

tput

Ana

log

T ou

tput

Ana

log

T ou

tput

Ser

ial d

ata

outp

ut 1

Ste

pper

sig

nal o

utpu

Ser

ial o

utpu

t 1(R

epea

ter c

ompa

ss)

Ser

ial d

ata

outp

ut 2

INP

24V

CN14 CN11 CN20 CN7 CN3 CN8 CN10 CN5CN12 CN13

CN11CN20

N14

FAN

19 RED

BLK

CN1

1 2 3 4

CN16 CN15

CN2 CN1

CN1

CN1CN2

STE

ING

TOR

V81

14U

(A)

V8114UP

No.

1 M

TER

S M

026

Ser

ial d

ata

outp

ut 3

Ser

ial o

utpu

t 2(R

epea

ter c

ompa

ss) C

Ser

ial o

utpu

t 3(R

epea

ter c

ompa

ss)

R04

0 I/F

Ser

ial d

ata

inpu

t (B

-type

) CA

3.9 MKM026 Block Diagram

A-23

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

TB1 RE

F20

M24

PS35

V26

PSG

271 23 4

ISE

FILT

SWIT

CH U

NIT

R02

24V

34G

F2 F6

24V

39G

24V

44G

32N

JP4

RL3

1,2

3,4

ENT

LIM

ITTE

RFI

LTER

+V+V

-Vin

-V

FILT

ER+V

+Vin

-Vin

-V

TPS

157 6 5 1,2

3,4

+V+V

-Vin

GND

1TP

1 TP2

-V

TRM

CTL

25-2

28-3

TP26

TP27

+15V

-15V

+V+V

-Vin

TRM

2 -V

CTL

11-1

TP28

TP29

+V+V

-Vin

TRM

3 -V

CTL

TP7

TP8

S+15V

+Vin G

NDO

TP9 +5

/DC

INVE

RTE

+15V

15.3

100V

TRA

V81

23TC

1 3 5 7 5 6

TP22

TP23

TP3

TP4

I24V

1,34,6

7-1819-30

TP24

TP25

+5V

VCC

9,10

13 25,2

1TP

5 CO

M+5V

9-10

PFAI

+5V

(N,y

ello

3 41 21 2 3 4 3 4

1,34,6

7-1819-30

3,4,7

,8,19

-24

SLI

P L

ING

M.T

ERM

INA

L B

D A

SSY

V81

23W

K/W

FAN

TOR

V81

23G

M.P

S BD

SYV

8123

M.P

V81

23W

7 6 5 1,2

3,4

+24V

+5V

JP2 24

25-2

28-3

11-1

9-10

3,4,

7,8,1

9-24

14TP

+12V

TP79

-12V

+5V

JP1

+5V

TP80

9,10

25,2

6CN

11A

TP75

TP77

14,3

15,3

5+5

FILT

M.OP

ERAT

ION

ITM

025

14,3

15,3

2 CN

M.M

AIN

SYV8

123W

+24V

1,2 4

5 5 6 7

STE

PPIN

OTO

RIB

2 31

+5V

TP46

CN20

3031

(S,re

3.10 MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-24

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

CN14

4321

8765

109

14131211

18171615

2019

24232221

28272625

3029

-12V

TP79

-12V

+12V

VCC

4321

8765

109

14131211

18171615

2019

24232221

28272625

3029

182

VCC

12U

4413

10U

4411

MPU

108

31 2

U49

U44

U40

39 122

CN11

4321

8765

109

14131211

18171615

2019

24232221

28272625

3029

4321

8765

109

14131211

18171615

2019

24232221

28272625

3029

14U

VCC

TP75

TP76

TP77

184

14+2

10U

12U

4011

34 37

14 12

3,4

1,2 5 6 7 8

3,4

1,2 5 6 7 8

U59

U13

U14

S L

INE

7 1 72 3

CN20 1 2 34 5 6

+24V

U24

TOR

IVER

1 8 11 18

433

65+ -OU

TPH

OTO

SEN

SOR

(Whi

te)

(Yel

low

)

OUT

A(B

lack

UT A

(Gre

en)

OUT

A(R

ed)

OUT

A(B

lue)

STE

PPIN

OTO

6 8

TP80

+12V

TP78

VCC

TP48

TP50�

53DG

VCC

3.3V

TP49

3.3V

DEV

ACON-I

PFAIL

M.PS ASSYV8123WH

M.M

AIN

M.P

V B

D A

CN12

CN13

3.11 (1) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-25

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (2) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-26

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (3) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-27

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.11 (4) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-28

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� M.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points and LED arrangement charts

TP32

TP63

(AD

TP30

TP79

TP78

LED

7LE

D10

TP80

TP52

(DG

)

TP77

TP76

TP75

TP53

(DG

)

TP50

(DG

)

TP51

(DG

)

LED

3,LE

D4,

LED

5,TP

19,L

TP39

TP35

TP37

TP36

TP38

LED

9, L

8, L

2TP

48 (V

)TP

49 (3

.3V

)

A-29

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

3.12 MKR027 Block Diagram

A-30

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

ACAD

APTE

KR07

AC IN

PUT

100/

110/

115/

220V

AC 5

0/60

Hz24

VDC

INPU

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y(2

4VDC

OUT

to M

KM02

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y(10

0VAC

OUT

)

3.13 MKS070 Block Diagram

A-31

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

24V

1239

101514

76548

1113

/DC

Vcc

TP1

STE

PPIN

OTO

TRO

STE

PPIN

OTO

R D

RIV

1or

que

adju

stm

ent

TBO

UTB

TAO

UTA

421

31 2

Zero

J.Sw

itch

Dim

mer

24V

7 1 10 2 3Ze

ro L

(Gre

en)

4 5E

rr LE

D(R

ed)

UFA

ILW

DO8

Vcc

24V

8bit

T.C

V81

14S

1239

101514

76548

1113

24V

UTA

7 6O

UTB

5 4D

IM3

ZER

2ZE

2BT

1BT

E,KAC

T.TB

ASS

8114

P.H

. AS

V81

14TB

STEP

PING

TOR

Yel

low

Whi

Gre

enR

edBl

Bla

Wal

l mou

nt ty

pe (

1= -W

)

1TB3

TP20

FAIL

SIG

Vcc

3.14 MKR056 Block Diagram

A-32

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

24V

SDA

SDB

1239101514

765481113

24V

UTA

7 6O

UTB

5 4D

IM3

ZER

2ZE

2BT1

E,KAC

T.TB

V81

14S

P.H

. AS

V81

14TB

STE

ING

TOR

Bla

ckG

reen

Red

Blu

Gra

yPu

rple

Yel

low

Whi

teO

rang

e9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Ye

llow

Whi

Gre

enR

edB

lue

Blac

k16

16 for P

lug

type

(1=

P1,

2,3,

R510

OBN

OITC

ATE

R C

R05

1239

101514

76548

1113

/DC

Vcc

TP1

STE

ING

TOR

NTR

STE

PPI

TOR

IVE

VR1

orqu

e ad

just

men

TBO

UTB

TAO

UTA

421

31 2

Zero

J.S

witc

Dim

mer

24V

7 1 10 2 3Ze

ro L

(Gre

en)

4 5Er

r LE

D(R

ed)

CPU

FAIL

O8U

Vcc

24V

8bit

T.C

V81

14S

TP20

FAIL

SIG

VCC

Vcc

3.15 MKR050&MKN019 Block Diagram

A-33

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-4 Components List

4.1 Master Compass(1) MKM026-1,4

14153 2 4 5

1628

3231

37 38 39 41

134 7 8

40 42

A-34

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 %�%�»��=*�� ‘?�$��= 22 FILTER KIT ‘??�<=#2 �`_�_��_;�� ‘?��&!® 23 #�� ‘?�$�\�3 �;�� ‘?�$�� 24 SCREW ‘??��4 =;!�`�!�»�� ‘?��&X� 25 ��=X�� ‘?��&!=

5 BELT 5T117G008-01 26 O RING b��;��»�f

‘?��Y=�

6 STEPPING MORTER ��

‘?��&!; 27 CENTER PIN ‘?�$�*�

7 %��%�»�’�=*�� ‘?�$�� 28 O RING b��_��»��;f

‘??��®�

8 %��=*�� ‘?�$��` 29 LONG NUT ‘?�$��9 SPACER ‘?��&X; 30 `__�� ‘?�$��X10 SPACER ‘?��&X� 31 SEAL WASHER ‘??��11 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=` 32 SCREW �Q��X!12 %��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�� 33 TERMINAL (TB3) ‘?��&’\13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 34 ��=X�� ‘?��&!�14 «Z#�=_�;*�� ‘?��&�\ 35 ��=X�� ‘?��&!!15 %%�»Z#�� ‘?��&�X 36 ��=X�� ‘?�$�\ 16 SUPPORTING LIQUID ‘?��&%X 37 SLIDE 1J124B038-0417 CONTAINER ‘?�$�*� 38 PLATE 1J355C497-0118 *�%��;�� ‘?�$�*® 39 BRACKET ‘?$��`19 \�;_��`�;� MKT007 40 BASE ‘??��’20 DRAIN SCREW ‘?��&*` 41 SPACER ‘?��&��21 _�;»�\�b��*� �f ‘?��Y=� 42 BUSH 1J371D699-01

A-35

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(2) MKM026-2,3

10 9 2 53 4

2728

21 20

2627

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 %�%�»��=*�� ‘?�$��= 17 CONTAINER ‘?�$�*�2 �`_�_��_;�� ‘?��&!® 18 *�%��;�� ‘?�$�*®3 �;�� ‘?�$�� 19 \�;_��`�;� MKT0074 =;!�`�!�»�� ‘?��&X� 20 DRAIN SCREW ‘?��&*`5 BELT 5T117G008-01 21 _�;»�\�b��*� �f ‘?��Y=�6 ��»�\�%_;��;�� ‘?��&!; 22 FILTER KIT ‘??�<=#7 %��%�=*�� ‘?�$�� 23 #�� ‘?�$�\�8 %��=*�� ‘?�$��` 24 SCREW ‘??��9 SPACER ‘?��&X; 25 ��=X�� ‘?��&!=10 SPACER ‘?��&X� 26 R-STOPPER ‘?�$�`X11 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=` 27 CUSHION ‘?�$�`�12 %��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�� 28 F-STOPPER ‘?�$�`�13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 29 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�14 «Z#�=_�;*�� ‘?��&�\ 30 ��=X�� ‘?��&!�15 %%�»Z#�� ‘?��&�X 31 ��=X��

b��X_\��f’?��&’*

16 SUPPORTING LIQUID ‘?��&%X 32 ��=X��b��#��f ‘?�$�\�

A-36

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.2 Control Box(1) MKC326-F,W

1112 1413

2117 918

3 4

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 ��Z*��_��;��!��X� ‘??�<�� 10 ��;%»��X�� ‘?�$�%�2 FUSE (15A / 2A) (*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF11 ;��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�

3 FUSE (10A) A1034EF 12 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�4 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 13 �� ‘?��5 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 14 ��b_��»_�f ‘?��®6 NOISE FILTER 5T164E039-05 15 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�7 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=` 16 TERMINAL (6-port)

(10-port)’??�<��’??�<�=

8 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=X 17 ��=X�� ‘?��’�9 =��!�� ‘?��&�* 18 MKR040 ��*» �&�Q

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-37

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

(2) MKC326-S

2021

9 1

14 222913

1112

19 20

262723 2425 10

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 ��Z*��_��;��!��X� ‘??�<�� 16 FILTER KIT ‘??�<=#2 FUSE (15A / 2A) (*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF17 #�� ‘?�$�\�

3 FUSE (10A) A1034EF 18 SCREW ‘??��4 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 19 R-STOPPER ‘?�$�`X5 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 20 CUSHION ‘?�$�`�6 NOISE FILTER 5T164E039-04 21 F-STOPPER ‘?�$�`�7 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=` 22 DISTRIBUTION BD

��b%`=��f’?�Y$��

8 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=X 23 TRANSFORMER (PS101) 1G164A044-019 =��!�� ‘?��&�* 24 DIODE MODULE (PS101) A1207HL10 ��;%»��X��b³$f ‘?�$�%��Z

‘?�$�%*25 AL CAPACITOR (PS101) A1299CA

11 ;��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’� 26 TERMINAL (PS101) 1G171Z152-0512 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’� 27 FUSE (2A) (PS101) A1031EF13 �� ‘?�� 28 ��;%»��X�� ‘?�$�%*14 ��b_��»_�f ‘?��® 29 CONNECTION TOOL

(MHB306)’??��®`

15 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A) *2: Master compass INSIDE : ‘?�$�%�� % �� _!��»*��’?�$�%*

A-38

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050)

3 4 51 2 7

86 10 9

NO PARTS NAME PART NO.1 LAMP ‘??��®2 MOTOR 5T165A165-013 WINDOW ‘?��&`�4 PACKING 1G334C027-015 PACKING 1G116A008-016 �`_�_��_;�� ‘?��&! 7 GASKET 1G333C041-018 ��=X�� ‘?��&!�9 ��=X�� ‘?��&!’10 PACKING 1G33E192-01

A-39

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.4 Junction Box (MKN019)

12 8

10 11

3 12

No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 PACKING ‘?��&Ë�2 ;��!�=*�� ‘?��&��3 ��;%»��X�=_�;*�� ‘?��&�®4 ‘�;»�=X��;��»��_; 5T162B015-025 O-RING 5T101Z005-046 KNOB 5T124A096-017 CAP 5T114A030-01

8 TOGGLE SWITCH ‘??�<*�

9 W.P. CAP ‘??�<*#10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-0111 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T166F082-0212 SOCKET M8096JC

A-40

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)

DIMMERRUN SYNC

FAIL

A B

A — A B — B

15 13

12 17 168

22 23

7465

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FRONT PANEL ‘?��?=�bÌ�Q$f’?��?=�bÌ�&&f 13 COLLAR ‘?��?=�

2 ��X��b�� f ‘?$�Q#’ 14 BUTTON 5T124A104-023 ��X��b� f ‘?��?*� 15 O RING 5T101Z005-094 GEAR ‘?��&`’ 16 ;��»��_;�b’;f 5T162A167-01

5 GEAR ‘?��&`X 17 KNOB 5T124A043-02

6 GEAR 1G422A549-01 18 COLLAR 5T108F032-077 GEAR ‘?��&`� 19 �`_�_��_;�� ‘?��&! 8 GEAR ‘?��&;; 20 ;��=�� ‘?��&�®9 MOTOR 5T165A165-01 21 ;��!�=*�� ‘?��&��

10 FAIL INDICATOR LAMP (RED) 5T166F082-03 22 LAMP ‘??��®

11 RUN INDICATOR LAMP (GREEN) 5T162F082-04 23 SOCKET ��<?’#

12 SWITCH 5T154A272-01

A-41

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.6 AC Adapter (MKR027)

89 10 13 12

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 ��Z*��_��;��!��X� 5T164A255-01 8 SWITCH 5T154A123-012 FUSE (15 A) 5T151A040-02 9 TERMINAL BOARD M8055JT3 FUSE (15 A) 5T151A040-02 10 TERMINAL BOARD M8055JT4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 11 =��!�� ‘?��&�*5 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 12 NOISE FILTER A1118EN6 FUSE (2 A) A1289EF 13 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-017 FUSE (2 A) A1289EF

A-42

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.7 AC Adapter (MKS070)

2 3 4 5 6 7

12 1311

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 ��Z*��_��;��!��X� ‘??�<�� 8 SWITCH A1351ST2 FUSE (10A) A1034EF 9 =��!�� ‘?��&�*3 FUSE (10A) A1034EF 10 TERMINAL BOARD ‘??�<�*4 FUSE (15A) 5T151A040-02 11 NOISE FILTER 5T164E039-055 FUSE (15A) 5T151A040-02 12 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=`6 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 13 NOISE FILTER ‘??�<=X7 FUSE (2A) A1031EF

A-43

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.8 Annunciator (MKR028)

GYROCOMPASSANNUNCIATOR UNIT

PWR FAILBZ STOP

1 2 3 4

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 LED K6012SB2 PUSH SWITCH K6011SB and K6015SB3 ��!��»��_;�� ‘?��&�X4 =_ ‘?��XX

4.9 Junction Unit (MKN018)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 ��;%»��X�=*�� ‘?�$�’�

A-44

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

4.10 C.Operation Unit (MKR040)

(RED)

(BLACK)

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FRAME ‘?��`�2 MEMBRANE SWITCH ‘?�$�;�3 BUZZER 5T151E007-014 ��%�»��=*�� ‘?�$�’�

5 ��*»��=*�� ‘?�$�’=

6 ��=X�� 50cm ‘?��’�

1.5m ‘?$$��

3m ‘?$$��!

5m ‘?$$��’

10m ‘?��’=

A-45

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format

5.1 Basic Format ��W �� V�� @�� W�� »»��

$ CR LF

(1) (2) (3) (5)

CR LF$ SUM1 SUM2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

, , ,

1 2 n

1 2 n��>��

��!��>��

* � �� * � ��$

* � ��$* � ��

* � ��

(1) “$”: � �� ^|_� ��!�� @��V�� >��

^�_� ��!�� W��V��

� � �� W+��

^+_�� :��!�� Check-sum value.

(5) <CR><LF> Terminator: � ��

A-46

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

5.2 Existing Format�%�Q��+�� @�� V��{��

Regular Data Format

Data Type Input OutputSpeed (SPD) ‘%’�*�’=��’`��’�\ –Latitude (POS) GGA GLL –Heading (HDG) HDT HDG HDM HRC THS HDT HDG HDM THS; ��b;_�f ROT HRC ROT`� ��Z�; ��b`*\Z;_�f HRC `;��*�`

� VMVSD

$1 2

,V V * h < CR > < LF >M S D0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

x x x x- /11 12

x x x13 14 15

h16 17 18 19 20

Í/xx.x[knot] xxxx.xx[Nautical Mile]

x x21Offset from “$”

Character

Header

Talker ID

Data ID

Y-Speed Cruising distance

Checksum identifier

Checksum

Terminato

� VBW

$1 2, , ,

3 4x x V B W

7x.x

8, x.x9

,10

* hh < CR > < LF >

x.x , x.x A ,x.x , x.x A

, A A

Data field numberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data ID

Checksum

Checksum identifier

Terminator

Longitudinal water speed

Transverse water speed

Longitudinal ground speed

Transverse ground speed

Status: Water speedA=data valid V=data invalid

Status: Ground speedA=data valid V=data invalid

Stern transversewater speed [knot]

Status:Stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

Status:Stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid

Stern transverseground speed [knot]

� VHW

$1 2, ,

3 4x x V H W

6,5 7

x.x8

, x.x ,

* hh < CR > < LF >

x.x , T x.x , M , N KData field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data ID

Checksum identifier

Checksum

Terminator

True heading Magnetic heading Water speed [knot] Water speed [km/hour]

A-47

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� VTG

$1 2, ,

3 4x x V T G

6,5 7

x.x8

, x.x ,

* hh < CR > < LF >

x.x , T x.x , M , N K

9, a

Data field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data IDTrue course made good over ground

Magnetic course madegood over ground

Ground speed [knot] Ground speed [km/hour]

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

Status:A = Autonomous modeE = Estimated (dead-reckoning) modeM = Manual Input ModeS = Simulated ModeN = Data Not Valid

� GGA

$1 2, hhmmss.ss , llll.ll ,

3yyyyy.yy ,

4x x G G A a ,

6a ,

7x , xx

8, x.x

9, x.x

10, M ,

11x.x

12, M ,

13x.x

14, xxxx

* hh < CR > < LF >

Data field numberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data ID UTC of position Latitude N/S Longitude E/W

Number of satellites in use

Horizontaldilution of precision

Antenna altitude

Units of antenna altitude[m]

Geoidal height

Units of geoidal height [m]

Age of DifferentialGPS data

Differential reference station ID

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

GPS Quality Indicator, 0 = Fix not available, 1 = GPS fix, 2 = Differential GPS fix 3 = PPS fix 4 = Real Time Kinematic 5 = Float RTK 6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode 7 = Manual input mode 8 = Simulation mode

� GLL

$1 2,

hhmmss.ss ,

l l l l . l l ,3

yyyyy.yy ,4

x x G L L a ,

,5 7

A , a * hh < CR > < LF >

Data field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data ID LatitudeN/S

LongitudeE/W

UTC of position Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

FAA Mode Indicator A = Autonomous mode D = Differential mode E = Estimated (dead-reckoning) mode M = Manual input mode S = Simulated mode N = Data not valid

Status:A = Data valid (FAA Mode A,D)V = Data invalid (FAA Mode E,M,S,N)

A-48

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� HDT

$1 2, ,x x H D T T * hh < CR > < LF >x.x

Data field numberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data IDTrue heading

T=True

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

� HDG

1 2

, ,

3 4

x x H D G , a ,

* hh < CR > < LF >

x.x x.x , ax.x

Header

Talker ID Data ID

Magnetic sensorheading

Magnetic deviation[degrees]direction E / W

Magnetic variation [degrees]direction E / W

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

Data field number

Character

� HDM

$1 2, ,x x H D M M * hh < CR > < LF >x.x

Data field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data IDMagneticHeading

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

� THS

1 2

, ,x x T H S A * hh < CR > < LF >x.x

Data field numberCharacter

Header

Talker ID Data ID Heading

Status:A = Autonomous modeE = Estimated (dead-reckoning) modeM = Manual input modeS = Simulated modeV = Data not valid

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

A-49

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

� ROT

1 2

, ,x x R O T A * hh < CR > < LF >x.xData field number

Character

Header

Talker ID Data ID Rate of turn [degrees/minute] «-» means bow turns to port

Status, A =data valid V =data invalid

Terminator

Check sum

Check sum identifier

� HRC

1 2

,H H * h < CR > < LF >C R C

0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

x x x x x — /

11 12

x x x

13 14 15

16 17 18 19 20Offset from “$”

Character

Header

Talker ID

Data ID

Heading

Rate of turn

Terminator

Check sum

Check sum identifier

xxx.xx[degrees]

— /x .xx[degrees/second]

� PYDKH

$ P D * < CR > < LF >Y K H1, x.xx

2, x.xx

3, x hh

Data field NumberCharacter

Talker ID

Header

Data ID

Heading [degrees] Rate of turn- / x.xx [degrees/minute]

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum identifier

5=External GPS Compass

　1=Gyro No.1 2=Gyro No.2 3=External Gyro 4=External Mag

Instrument identifier

5.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass� HEHDT (for Repeater compass)

1 2

,H H * h < CR > < LF >E D T

0 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

x x x . — /

11 12 13 14 15

16 17

, x x , T

18 19

Terminator

Checksum

Checksum Identifier

Heading

Data ID

Talker ID

Header

Character

Offset from “$”

xxx.xx [degrees]

Blank Page

IM80B10M-16E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

Revision Information� Title : CMZ 900B / 900S� � \+�� !��}��% � �� Manual No. : IM 80B10M-16E

Sep, 2007 1st EditionMay, 2009 2nd EditionSep, 2009 3rd Edition

� Inquiries

#��|�� W�� @��V��!;X��@��>�� V �*��>�>��V�W�� V�� product.!;X��|��>�� V �*��>�>��V�W��ZZVVV�+�>�� V ��Z�*�Z��

��W+� � ��>�� V �*��>�>��X��W��W+� ��>�� V �*��>�>��X�� Y^$�^�� + ��W�+ ^>��>+��Y�^��Y��Ë��

Blank Page

Источник